• Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to main content

Primoz Bozic

Helping online entrepreneurs build a 7-figure online business

  • BLOG
  • Show Search
Hide Search

Primoz Bozic Blog

6 Critical Mistakes That Stop You From Growing Your Online Business

By Primoz Bozic 3 Comments

When I had my first $30,000 year with my online business, I had no idea how to scale my online business to $100,000+/year.

There was no manual. No online course I could take that would help me get there. No book I could read. No-one I could really ask for a clear roadmap of building my own 6-figure online business.

I had to figure it all out myself.

I bought all the different online courses on different elements of building an online business, from writing sales pages to creating premium online courses to developing sales funnels.

I attended conferences, events and even enrolled in $25,000 masterminds aimed at 6-figure entrepreneurs to figure out what it takes to build a 6-figure online business.

Attending a high-end business mastermind in NYC to learn about growing my online business

I eventually cracked the code to building a 6-figure online business, and made over $111,170 from a single online product in less than 10 months – and I’ve made more than 6 figures online every year since then, as my business continued to grow. 

At the same time, through an intimate group coaching program I ran, I realized that one of my “superpowers” was helping 5-figure online entrepreneurs scale their online business to 6 figures and beyond.

I helped entrepreneurs go from $5,000 product launches to $75,000 product launches, from $100,000 in revenue to $300,000+ in revenue, and from selling $59 online courses to selling $997 online courses – often over the course of less than a year.

Over time, I developed a step-by-step system for starting a 6-figure online business, which you can find in my Ultimate Guide to Starting a 6-Figure Online Business:


This guide will give you a strong foundation for starting a 6-figure online business.

But when it comes to starting a 6-figure online business, there’s SO much more to say – which is why I decided to write a few more blog posts to help you scale your online business to $100,000/year and beyond.

Today, we’ll talk about 6 critical (and surprising!) mistakes I see online entrepreneurs make every day – and the exact steps you can take to avoid them.

By avoiding these mistakes, you’ll be able to break the 5-figure plateau and go from making $30,000-$50,000/year to scaling your online business to $100,000/year and beyond.

Let’s dive in!

[no_toc]

Mistake #1: Expanding Your Niche

Many entrepreneurs think that to start a 6-figure online business, you have to start really niche, gain some initial traction with your business, and then slowly expand your niche to reach more people.

While the first part is definitely true (and going extremely niche is one of the best ways to find a profitable online business idea today), the second part holds little water.

In most cases, expanding your niche could actually be one of the biggest mistakes you could make in your online business and could bring your online business growth to a screeching halt.

This is exactly what happened to one of my clients, Peter, a men’s stylist – who I interviewed for my Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

Peter started an online business that quickly took off, and in hopes of reaching more people, he began writing more general style advice that would help everyone from college students to CEOs of tech companies.

As he did that, he noticed that his blog posts began getting less and less traction – and the approach of expanding his niche wasn’t working for him.

This is a pattern I’ve seen over and over again with online entrepreneurs, and it almost always ends badly.

Here are the problems that occur as you try to expand your niche:

  • You’ll get 10-100x more competition overnight
  • You won’t stand out in a crowded market any more
  • You’ll lose your competitive advantage
  • You won’t serve your clients better than everyone else
  • Your content will get less and less traffic
  • You’ll write more general, and less mouthwatering copy
  • Your conversion rates, from opt-in rates to sales conversion rates will drop

As you try to please everyone, you’ll begin to please no-one.

Instead of trying to expand your niche, a much better approach is to narrow down your niche to your very best clients. 

While this might sound counterintuitive, it’s actually a great way to break your online business plateau.

That’s exactly what Peter did.

As we talked about who his best clients were, we realized that they were guys that worked at tech companies (either as CEOs or executives) that wanted to look good in the office, as well as on after-work dates.

We also realized that his worst clients were students that shopped at places like Uniqlo that were looking for “affordable clothes” that would rarely buy his online programs.

An example of a piece of content that attracts a low-end audience

Therefore, we switched his business positioning to focus exclusively on his best clients – we created content around problems that his best clients had, and used more premium language and focused on recommending the BEST pieces of clothing, instead of focusing so much on offering “affordable” style advice.

An example from Peter’s Business Casual Style guide that focuses on men who work in tech start ups and Finance (better clients!)

This way, we would attract more of his best clients, and hopefully help him grow his online business.

As we did that, everything became easier.

Once Peter relaunched his 1on1 styling program, he went from charging $2,000 per client to $5,000+ per client – and his new clients didn’t bat an eye at the new price point – they were happy to pay it!

Peter is a great example of why zeroing in on your best clients is a better way to increase your online business revenues than trying to expand your niche.

Now of course, there IS a caveat.

There IS a situation where expanding your niche could help you attract more of your best clients, with a subtle twist.

You should only think about expanding your niche once you feel like you really did everything in your power to serve your best clients, and you find it hard to find more of them.

In that case, it makes sense to expand your niche.

But to correctly expand your niche, you shouldn’t just try to reach “more people”.

Instead, you should attract new niche audiences to your business. 

So instead of trying to serve everyone, you’re just adding on new layers of your best clients from different industries / demographics, while serving them better than anyone else and keeping your competitive advantage.

Here’s an example of someone who expanded their niche correctly – my friend Kim Nicol, a mindfulness teacher & executive coach.

Kim started her mindfulness practice ultra-niche, by focusing specifically on lawyers. Then, to expand her niche, she added on “start up houses” as the second niche.

Ultimately became the go-to mindfulness teacher in Silicon Valley, where she regularly runs mindfulness workshops at companies like Google and Dropbox:

Another great example is Renaissance Periodization – a now multi-million-dollar science-based nutrition & training company.

When I started following this company a few years ago, they simply focused on nutrition for strength athletes (primarily powerlifters and weightlifters).

Later on, they expanded their niche to serve different audiences like CrossFit athletes, endurance athletes, vegans, and even parents of teenagers that want to teach their kids to eat well, as demonstrated by their product suite:

But as they added new niches to their business, they continued to make sure they serve their existing clients and readers in the best possible way, with targeted advice that spoke to them – and not “general” diet and training advice.

So if you feel like you “squeezed the lemon” out of your niche and there’s really nothing you can do to attract more of your best clients, go ahead and expand your niche.

But do it by adding new niches to your business, rather than going more general and trying to speak to everyone.

Mistake #2: Chasing Passive Income

Whenever I hear an online entrepreneur bring up the idea of passive income, I cringe.

Not because I wouldn’t like the idea of passive income and earning money in your sleep (I too love waking up to new sales of my online programs!), but because of what typically happens when an entrepreneur begins focusing on passive income.

In most cases, they manage to generate passive income, by setting so-called “evergreen” funnels, selling recorded online courses, Facebook Ads, and other strategies that allow you to make money on autopilot.

And in most cases, this approach is a double-edged sword.

A few years ago, when I created my first online productivity course, Success Systems, I too created an “evergreen” funnel for the course, based on the conventional advice about starting an online business: 

I recorded the course, created a 5-day sales sequence for it, and offered it to every new e-mail subscriber I got at a price point of $197.

The course regularly generated $2,000 every month, which is a considerable amount of steady monthly income.

But after a few months of selling the course, one thing consistently bugged me.

Once someone purchased the course from me, I never heard back from them. 

When I reached out to them and asked them how everything was going (MONTHS after they went through the course), I kept getting the same responses over and over again:

  • “I didn’t get to it yet”
  • “Life got in the way”
  • “I’ll work on it in the future…”

And when I looked under the hood to see how much of the course my students went through, I noticed that the vast majority of my students completed only 10-20% of my course.

No wonder they weren’t getting the results I wanted them to get – they didn’t even go through the course.

I did everything right. I recorded my course, and set up an evergreen funnel… And yet, I didn’t feel good about selling my course. I lived the dream of earning passive income, and wasn’t enjoying it a single bit.

At that point, I had a choice:

  • I could fix my course or the way that my students go through it, and make sure my students are getting the results I promised them
  • Or, I would have to take my course down and stop selling it

I decided to go with the second option because I wasn’t passionate about productivity any more, and I never sold my course again.

This cost me tens of thousands of dollars over the next few years, but I’m completely ok with that – I don’t want to run an online business that doesn’t actually help people get the results I promise them. 

I’m not alone.

I’ve seen countless entrepreneurs automate a large chunk of their business, and free up their time and schedule – yay! And just like they wanted it to, the revenue begins coming in, month by month – without them doing a single thing.

On the flip side, as they do this, they:

  • Have a success / finish rate of 1-2% with their online courses
  • Have only a handful of REAL results and testimonials in their online business
  • Have online communities that almost nobody engages in

They make money in their sleep. But their clients aren’t getting the results they promised them.

Unfortunately, some people are ok with that. Many internet marketers hide these facts and numbers, and brag about making hundreds of thousands (or millions of dollars) online with their online businesses.

They might even have a base of “star students” that get amazing results with their programs, to make it seem like everyone is successful with their programs..

But what they’ll hide from you, which you’ll discover if you join their programs or have a chance to look under the hood of their business, is that only a handful of students will actually succeed with their programs, while most of them join them but never finish them.

To me, that’s NOT OK. 

It’s like inviting people to a restaurant, charging them $100 for a meal, and them only eating half an appetizer.

If that was my restaurant, I couldn’t sleep at night.

Now of course, there ARE a handful of online entrepreneurs that do it right.

For example, remember Renaissance Periodization, a nutrition company I mentioned earlier.

They sell ready-to-use diet templates that hundreds (or thousands) of their clients have successfully used to transform their bodies, as demonstrated by 3,500+ success stories on their Instagram account:

Though even there, the success rate isn’t even close to 100% or 50%, as a lot of their clients fall off track and don’t stick with the templates – but at least it’s higher than 1-2%.

I’ll also mention that these templates aren’t 100% passive income for them. 

Yes, they sell them and deliver them to their clients on autopilot, and they get their clients results.

But over the past few years, I’ve seen them release 3 or 4 new iterations of their courses based on the feedback and results they collected from their clients, to further optimize them for better results and compliance rates:

An example of changes to the improved diet templates

Collecting the feedback and making the improvements takes time – and I love that they take the time to do this, rather than creating a product and never improving it.

There’s also a different approach to “passive income” that can work, which comes in the form of hiring a team of coaches that coach your clients to get them the results you promise them.

That’s what my friend Sarah Jones from Introverted Alpha does – she started out by doing dating coaching for introverted men:

Sarah started her business by herself back in 2014 as a dating coach for introverted men

Later on, as her business grew, she hired (and spent months training) a team to take over her coaching:

Sarah now has a team to help her grow her business while keeping the high-touch service

This way, she’s able to keep the high-touch service and high success rate of her clients, while automatically growing her business.

And yet, her business still isn’t 100% passive – and neither will be yours.

In fact, I challenge you to find ANY online entrepreneur who:

  • Has a steadily growing online business
  • Consistently gets their clients results
  • Has 100% passive income

It doesn’t happen.

Why?

Because if you want your business to continue to grow, you have to keep working on it. It doesn’t just magically grow on it’s own.

You’ll have to create new content to attract more customers, develop new products to sell, and sell them to your clients. You’ll need to do the research to create and improve those products.

Even if you hire product developers, copywriters, coaches, designers and programmers, customer support teams, project managers, a CTO and COO to run your business, as a CEO, you’ll have work to do.

You’ll have to set a vision for the company, work through the new challenges on each level of growth, have meetings with your board members… 

Even if you use Facebook Ads to grow your audience, you’ll need to change and tweak them over time.

Even if you write a book to promote your business, you’ll have to promote it to reach more people with it.

And to be honest, you probably don’t even WANT to run a 100% passive business with zero involvement.

If you’re the type of entrepreneur who wants to help as many people as possible, you probably enjoy working on your business – maybe you’re even a bit obsessed with it.

Sure, you could lay on a beach in Thailand for a month, but then you’ll probably get bored and it will be harder NOT to work on your business than to work on it.

So if all that’s true, why even bother chasing passive income in the first place? 

Especially if your priority is to scale your online business to 6, 7 or 8 figures a year, focusing on the evasive dream of passive income will hurt you more than help you.

Yes, you should absolutely create a lean schedule to free up more time, and you should absolutely hire a team and automate things like scheduling your client calls, but be wary of trying to automate your business too much.

Sure, you could earn some extra passive income through evergreen funnels or Facebook Ads, but will you be able to sleep at night knowing that only 1-2% of your clients are actually doing the work and receiving the resuts you promised them?

Or will you have a bitter taste in your mouth every time you see a sale come in?

Luckily, there’s a better way. 

In fact, there are TWO better ways.

If you WANT to use evergreen funnels and Facebook Ads to grow your business, reach more people, free up the time from draining launches and offer your products to your customers when they’re the most likely to buy them, go for it!

But if you choose to go down that route, know that it’s your responsibility to make your clients succeed – not theirs.

If 10% of your clients aren’t succeeding, that might be on them. If 98% of your clients never finish the programs they buy from you, that’s on you.

As you develop an automated online business, you’ll be faced with a new set of challenges that you’ll have to work through one by one:

  • How do you make sure that your clients actually finish your online courses?
  • How do you engage clients that join your communities and feel “late to the party”?
  • How do you keep supporting your clients in the best way possible even when you’re not there?

Each of these challenges has it’s own unique solutions, and it’s your duty to develop them, just like it’s the chef’s duty to deliver an incredible meal at a michelin-star restaurant.

Do know that those challenges aren’t easy to solve though – they might actually be harder than running a business where you’re more involved.

I know plenty of 7-figure online entrepreneurs that have downright sad success and engagement rates with their online courses that they record and let their clients work through on their own.

And even if they choose to solve those challenges (which is rare), it can cost tens of thousands of dollars to solve them.

And while not solving those challenges might not hurt you in the short run, it will in the long run – because people talk.

Once they see a lot more failures than success stories with your programs, the word will spread – and no matter how good you are at selling, you’ll slowly lose your following of raving fans. You don’t want that to happen.

So yes, build all the automated funnels you want to. But make sure your clients are still getting the support and results you’re promising – it’s your responsibility to help them succeed, and not just theirs.

Alternatively, if you decide that you maybe don’t want to run an automated online business, there’s (in my opinion) an even better approach.

This is a philosophy I strongly believe in and practice with my programs, and that has played a BIG part in helping me build a 6-figure online business.

Instead of passive income, I put my clients first.

This means spending HUNDREDS of hours writing insanely detailed guides like my 447-page Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List myself, without hiring copywriters that have never built e-mail lists or ran online businesses themselves to write them.

This means designing my online programs with the success of my clients in mind and giving them all the support that they need to succeed. This means delivering my online courses live, and coaching my clients through building their online businesses. Which then results in 50-90% success rates of my programs (rather than the industry standard of 2-5%).

This means focusing on truly helping people, and not just on how I can make the most money this month – because I know that earning another $10,000 or $50,000 this month won’t make me happier (I’ve been there and done that – it doesn’t).

But helping people in the best way possible and making them feel like my programs are the best investments they’ve ever made? That makes it all worth it.

I always try to go the extra mile for my readers and clients, and they notice:

That’s why they love reading my content, share it with others, and join my paid programs.

Because they know that I care more about their success than just making money.

And then they recommend my work to their friends – so the revenue comes as well.

If you’re not a big fan of the “passive income” philosophy, I invite you to run your business in a different way.

Put your clients first, and instead of giving them the MINIMUM amount of support they need, give them the MAXIMUM amount of support you can give them to help them succeed.

And then watch your online business grow.

Mistake #3: Charging Too Little

The vast majority of entrepreneurs I worked with to help them scale their online business to $100,000-$300,000/year come to me with a surprisingly common objection:

“My audience can’t / won’t pay more than X”.

The first thing that’s fascinating is that the ceiling is different for every person:

  • “My audience won’t pay more than $9/month for a membership program”
  • “My audience won’t pay more than $49 for an online course”
  • “My audience won’t pay more than $197 for an online ourse”

I’ve heard it all before.

And the second thing that’s fascinating?

This assumption is just plain wrong in 99% of the cases.

The ceiling we have in our minds around how much our audience is willing to pay is often made up in our minds, and might be influenced by:

  • Our prices of existing programs we’re selling
  • Prices of programs from our competitors
  • Research we did with our audience
  • Ideas we have in our minds

Very rarely are these assumptions based by cold-hard data, which is what we want instead.

In other words, most entrepreneurs that thought they could only sell $197 online course never actually tried selling a $997 online course – they made up the idea in their minds that they can’t charge more.

This is unfortunate because one of the BEST ways to grow your online business is to create premium products and services – so you might actively be preventing yourself from scaling your online business.

It’s interesting what happens when you put these assumptions to the test.

One of my clients, Jenni from Fuzzy and Birch who helps Etsy sellers grow their businesses, came to me with a membership program she wanted to grow.

She used to sell her program at $9/month, which she thought was a ceiling of how much her audience was willing to pay based on the research she’s done.

It wasn’t.

I helped Jenni gradually raise the price point from $9/month to $47/month, $97/month, and even $197/month – and surprise surprise, her audience was STILL willing to pay.

Jenni now charges $97/month with a minimum 6-month commitment for her Etsy Tribe

In fact, she noticed that she started attracting even better clients once she started charging more premium rates as she attracted clients who were more serious and had more skin in the game.

Of course we also constantly worked on improving her program and making it worth the investment – we focused on making it the absolute BEST membership in her industry by a large margin.

We didn’t just want people to join her membership – we wanted them to stay.

By focusing on increasing the price of her program and positioning it to a more premium audience, we tripled her business revenue in a year – she went from earning a bit more than $100,000/year to $300,000+/year. 

Had she not challenged her beliefs and assumptions, raised her prices and charged what her program was really worth, her belief that her audience won’t pay more would have cost her up to $200,000/year. 

Ouch.

The good news is that the solution to this “problem” is surprisingly simple.

Instead of blindly trusting your beliefs and assumptions, put them to the test and challenge them.

You can do that in two simple steps:

  • Develop the BEST program in your industry
  • Charge what the program is actually worth

(which you can do quickly and risk-free through a BETA-testing strategy I’ll share later in this article).

Time and time again, I’ve helped my clients charge 3x, 5x or 10x more than their competition, with clients that are happy to pay them.

The key of course is focusing on targeting your best, premium clients, AND developing the absolute best programs in your industry.

There’s a reason why a Ferrari is 20x more expensive than a Fiat Panda.

Ferrari focuses on creating the best cars out there, and their customers are waiting in line to spend hundreds of thousands, or even millions of dollars on their new cars.

Just like Ferrari, you can focus on being the leader in the market.

Rather than trying to beat your competition on price, beat them on quality and results.

As you stop focusing on chasing passive income and narrow down your niche, this will become easier and easier.

You can have fun asking yourself creative questions like:

  • How can I create a program that’s 10x better than any other program in my industry?
  • How can I support my clients 10x better than anyone else?
  • What would I have to do to get my clients 10x better results?

And then building, developing and iterating through a program that will slowly but surely beat all other programs in your industry.

And once your program is 10x better than anything else in your industry, you can charge 10x more than everyone else as well.

That’s how Jenni charges $97-$197/month for her membership program, while her competitors still charge $9/month. 

That’s how Renaissance Periodization charges $109 for a single excel spreadsheet that helped thousands of their clients transform their bodies (and upwards of $300/month for 1on1 nutrition coaching via e-mail).

That’s how my client Sam from Byte-by-Byte (who teaches programmers how to nail job interviews at companies like Google) just successfully launched a $997 online course that generated $75,000 in a single launch while his competitors still sell $47 online courses.

Put in the work. Develop the best programs out there. Then charge what they’re worth.

And watch your business grow even further.

Mistake #4: Not Testing Your Ideas

Back in 2015, I helped a handful of entrepreneurs write Ultimate Guides to grow their online businesses. They got hundreds (or even thousands) of e-mail subscribers in a matter of weeks, and I thought about creating an online product about Ultimate Guides.

I sent a message to my friend exploring the idea:

But then, I got stuck in my head and said to myself: “nah, nobody would ever pay for this”. I didn’t think I could create much more than a $27 e-book about creating Ultimate Guides.

So I never tested the idea – I just let it slide.

A few years later, I revisited the same idea, but this time I tested it, and instantly got my first few coaching clients for writing Ultimate Guides at $500 per client:

That’s when I knew I was something there. I evolved the idea and created a premium online course that generated $111,170 in less than 10 months. 

I had the same idea as before. The only difference was that I actually tested it – and it took off. Had I not tested my idea and said “nah, it wouldn’t work”, I would have missed out on over $110,000. Oops.

In 2016, I had another idea for an online course on building relationships with influencers and like-minded entrepreneurs.

I called it “The Insider’s Club”.

I spent weeks developing the course and writing a long, 3-week sales funnel – expecting for the sales to pour in.

Except they didn’t.

I expected 30-60 entrepreneurs to join the program, and only 3 ended up joining.

This ended up being the single worst launch, and biggest failure, of my entire online business journey.

Why?

Because I didn’t test my idea to see if there was something there.

I ASSUMED the course would sell, didn’t do enough research, didn’t validate it in advance, and wasted weeks writing a sales funnel that didn’t resonate with my audience.

That’s what can happen if you don’t test your ideas:

  • You can have a great product idea, only to never make a single cent with it because you never act on it
  • You can act on a product idea that you think is great, but turns out not to be so great – and you end up wasting weeks or months launching a product that won’t sell

To avoid those two scenarios, there’s a simple solution – my Rapid BETA-Testing Protocol.

With this step-by-step protocol, you can quickly test your ideas to KNOW if there’s something there or not in less than a week.

Here’s how the Rapid BETA-Testing Protocol works:

  • Send out a survey about your product idea
  • Develop a BETA version of the product
  • Offer the BETA version to your readers to test your idea

The first step is to create a simple survey like this one I created for a program called Write More Every Day BETA to see if there’s demand for your product.

Within the survey, you can ask your readers questions about how important the problem you want to solve is for them:

You can ask them questions that help you identify their biggest problems and desires:

And you can ask your readers if they’d like to join a paid BETA program of the product you’re developing:

If the response is positive (you get tens or hundreds of responses to your survey, people enthusiastically explain why they want to solve their problem, and over 50% of the people want to join a BETA program), you know you’re on the right track.

Then, you can use all the insights you got from the survey about the problems and desires of your audience to create a simple curriculum for your program:

And finally, you can either invite your readers that were interested in joining the BETA program to a live call with you where you pitch your idea to them, OR send them an e-mail with the details about the BETA program and offer it to them.

You could work through all of the above steps in less than a week – and have a MUCH clearer idea if there’s a hidden opportunity you’re overlooking – OR if your idea is something that people just don’t care about as much.

Especially once you begin to develop more premium products that take a longer time to develop and sell, using the Rapid BETA-Testing Protocol is a great way to quickly test your ideas before you jump into development. 

Using it will save you a lot of wasted time, and help you focus your time and attention on products that you KNOW will help you grow it.

Mistake #5: Selling Too Little

When you first start your online business, you’ll typically spend a few months building your audience, then you’ll develop your first product, and sell it to your e-mail subscribers.

After that, you’ll spend a few months further growing your audience, improving your program, and selling it again, once every 3-4 months.

This model will work well for a while, and you’ll likely see continuous growth of your online business, depending on how fast your audience is growing.

This way, you’ll earn $5,000 with your online business one month, then nothing for 3 months. Then you might earn $10,000, and again nothing for 3 months.

You’ll enter the famous “feast and famine cycle” – when you’re launching, things are going well, and you’re on top of the world.

When you’re not, you’re anxiously watching your earnings disappear and wondering when you might have to launch again.

As you do this, you’re fearfully waiting for your next launch – what if it DOESN’T go well? What do you do then?

What if your audience hasn’t grown enough? What if people are on vacation? What if your copy doesn’t resonate this time around?

The feast and famine cycle can turn your online business from something you love working on into a stressful, anxiety-inducing mess.

The solution to this feast and famine cycle is surprisingly simple – sell more, ideally every month (rather than every 3-4 months).

By Monetizing Every Month, you’ll earn additional revenue in your online business every single month, which will help you drastically increase your annual revenues (one of my clients 2x-ed their annual revenue just by Monetizing Every Month).

Monetizing Every Month will help you stabilize your business, earn consistent income, reduce unnecessary stress and get better at the skill of launching products.

“But I don’t want to burn out my e-mail list!”

The first objection I hear any time I even mention the idea of launching more often is the objection of list burnout.

If you launch to your audience too often, they’ll get sick of you, unsubscribe from your e-mail list, and send you hate e-mails and call you a sell-out. UGH.

It’s true – SOME of that might happen. You might get a few hate e-mails. Some people might unsubscribe.

But those people typically wouldn’t buy from you anyway. 

Your buyers won’t hate you from selling to them – they’ll appreciate more opportunities to work with you.

Think about it – if your favorite restaurant came out with a new dish every month and offered it to you, would you hate them for it, or love them?

It’s the same thing with your online business – giving your audience constant opportunities to work with you will make them happier – as they’ll be able to work with you any time they’re ready (rather than constantly waiting for 3-4 months).

Now of course, the list burnout CAN happen, but contrary to conventional wisdom, it doesn’t happen just because you’d sell something to your audience every month.

It can happen IF you:

  • Sell the same thing every month: Yes, your audience might get bored and sick of you if you sell them the SAME product every month for years to come.
  • Sell too hard: If you bombard your audience with 20 sales e-mails every month, they’ll also likely complain that you’re selling all the time
  • Don’t add value: If you don’t focus on making your launches extremely valuable and interesting to your audience (whether they buy or not), you’ll also make your audience feel like you’re “just selling” to them

Luckily, there are simple solutions to all of the above potential problems that will help you Monetize Every Month WITHOUT burning out your e-mail list.

You can:

  • Rotate your products: Sell a different product or service every month (and only sell the SAME product from your product suite once every 3-4 months) – to constantly keep your audience interested
  • Balance your launches: Switch between softer and harder launches, and mix things up. Sell your premium programs harder, and your lower-priced programs softer. Throw in a shorter launch to mix things up. Sell a lot softer if you’re selling twice in a short period of time
  • Always add MASSIVE value: Make sure the first part of your launch is packed with extremely valuable information, techniques and resources that blow your readers away, whether they buy from you or not

One of my clients that used the strategy of Monetizing Every Month to double her online business in a year followed these guidelines and was surprised to discover that the mythical “list burnout” never actually happened to her.

I also never experienced it myself, or seen it happen with other 6-figure entrepreneurs I work with – as long as you follow the above guidelines.

“But what if I don’t have the time to launch something every month?”

Launching every month can definitely be intense and time consuming, and can feel very different from leisurely launching every 3-4 months.

First of all, that’s normal.

If you want to go all out on growing your online business, it SHOULD feel hard and intense and like you’re pushing yourself every month – otherwise you’re just coasting (and your revenue will likely coast too).

The good news is that over time, you’ll get used to the feeling, and it will actually become weirder NOT to launch every month.

By launching every month, you’ll also get A LOT better at launching because of all the practice you’ll be getting in.

You’ll write better sales pages and sales funnels, get to know your customers a lot better, and become a much better copywriter and entrepreneur than if you only launched every 3-4 months – you’re getting 3-4x more practice!

Second of all, you don’t actually HAVE to do a big, intense launch every month.

Instead, you can balance your launches by:

  • Selling different products and services: You could launch a live $997 online course one month, a recorded $197 course the other, a 1on1 coaching program, a group coaching program, a mastermind day, a BETA program for a new product… (which might take less time to develop and launch)
  • Selling softer and harder: You could do a simple, short 5-day launch of an existing product one month that you could put together in a few days, and then a long, 2-3 week launch the next month
  • Trying out different launch formats: One month, you could launch through a webinar, the next month you could launch via e-mail. You could experiment with a quick and easy 24-hour launch, or a bundle launch of existing products (a lot of these launches could be less intensive and quick to put together, but still convert well)

In other words, you don’t have to launch in the same way every month. 

You can experiment with different approaches as you gradually grow your business every month and get to know your audience better and better.

The bottom line is – the more you’ll launch, the more you’ll likely make.

And over time, you’ll be able to systematize your launches to a point where launching every month doesn’t feel intense any more – it just becomes part of your regular routine.

And the best part? You’ll never have to worry about the feast and famine cycle again.

Mistake #6: Doing What You “Should” be Doing

When I first started my online business, I religiously learned from online courses and mentors that taught me how to set up an online business.

Following proven frameworks was a great way to jump-start the growth of my online business, and it helped me develop a strong system for running a profitable online business. 

But at a certain point, just blindly following advice from others wasn’t working for me any more.

I got a lot of advice from everyone I talked to about growing my online business:

  • “You should use Facebook Ads!”
  • “You have to learn about SEO!”
  • “You should start a marketing agency”
  • “You have to offer $20,000 1on1 coaching packages”
  • “You need to get out of your current market”
  • …

For a while, I tried to follow the advice and do all the things I “should” be doing.

But eventually, I realized that the advice I was getting was all over the place, I felt pulled into 10 different directions, and I had no idea what to ACTUALLY do next.

Additionally, there were a lot of things I just had ZERO desire to explore (like using Facebook Ads), and working on them drained me more than it helped me.

I would spend months working on something I didn’t believe in in a half-assed way just because that was something I thought I was “supposed to be doing”, instead of wholeheartedly working on something I BELIEVED in and loved doing.

Ultimately, I realized that doing things I “should” be doing weren’t helping me grow my business – they just became a source of constant frustration.

At the same time, as I worked with tens of entrepreneurs to help them start and scale 6-figure online business, I realized that there’s no SINGLE way to build a 6-figure online business:

  • Some entrepreneurs successfully use Facebook Ads, while others don’t spend a single cent on them
  • Some entrepreneurs use YouTube to grow their audience, others use SEO, while others use partnerships and Joint Ventures
  • Some entrepreneurs make the bulk of their income from high-end 1on1 coaching and group coaching, while others hate the idea of working with clients 1on1 and only sell online courses

Now of course, there ARE universal strategies that can help you grow your online business (like Monetizing Every Month, developing your Flagship Program and expanding your Product Suite) which many entrepreneurs successfully use to scale their online business.

But the exact nitty-gritty strategies and tactics vary from person to person. 

It’s just like getting in great shape.

You could have a great body from rock climbing, doing martial arts, or hitting the gym 3x/week. You could follow a low-carb diet, a paleo diet, or a ketogenic diet.

There’s no one way to success – the key is finding the way that works for you.

From my experience, the single best thing you can do is to find strategies that are within your Zone of Genius.

Specifically, these are growth strategies that:

  • Work in your industry (Demand)
  • You are good at (Expertise)
  • You enjoy doing (Excitement)

For example, people have told me that they love my ultra-long Ultimate Guides (like this one). 

I enjoy writing Ultimate Guides a lot more than writing short blog posts, and based on the results I got from them, they have proven to be a great way to grow my blog audience.

That’s why, instead of worrying about growing my audience through Facebook Ads or Instagram, I simply focus on writing long-form blog posts and guides – and I’m way happier than by trying to learn Facebook Ads.

On the other hand, if you hate writing, I wouldn’t recommend you to write Ultimate Guides. Perhaps you could grow your e-mail list through your own Youtube Channel, Facebook Ads or one of the other list-building strategies.

Whenever you decide to do something in your online business, ask yourself if you’re doing it because you “SHOULD” do it, or because you WANT to do it.

Choose things in your Zone of Genius that genuinely excite you so you can do them in a wholehearted way and give it your 110%, rather than being frustrated with something you don’t enjoy doing or don’t want to do and doing it in a half-assed way.

There are many ways to scale your online business to 6 figures and beyond. Pick ones that work for you!

Summary

In this post, I went over 6 classic mistakes that I see online entrepreneurs make over and over again that prevent them from scaling their online business to 6 figures and beyond.

Here’s a quick summary of how you can avoid these mistakes:

  • Instead of expanding your niche, narrow down to serving your best clients
  • Instead of chasing passive income, chase success of your clients
  • Instead of charging too little, experiment with charging premium rates
  • Instead of not testing your ideas, always use the Rapid BETA-Testing Protocol
  • Instead of selling too little, Monetize Every Month
  • Instead of doing what you “should” be doing, do things in your Zone of Genius

If you want to move beyond these mistakes and dive deeper into building a 6-figure online business, you should also read my Ultimate Guide to Starting a 6-Figure Online Business.

In this guide, you’ll learn:

  • How I went from earning $7/h as a programmer to earning 6 figures with my blog 4+ years in a row 
  • How to start a profitable online business and earn your first $10,000 online in 6 easy steps 
  • How to scale your online business to $100,000/year and beyond with my 6 proven and tested growth strategies

You can download the guide through the box below:

What Will YOU Do?

Now that you know about 6 mistakes you should avoid to scale your online business to 6 figures and beyond, I’d love to hear from you:

Which of these mistakes are YOU going to fix? Which of them surprised you? Is there a mistake you’ve made that I didn’t list but I should have? Do you disagree with me on any of them?

I’d love to hear what you think – leave a comment below and let me know!

The Ultimate Guide to Starting a 6-Figure Online Business

By Primoz Bozic Leave a Comment

Over the last 4 years, I made more than 6 figures with my online business every single year through selling online courses and coaching services:

In this guide, I’ll show you exactly how I did it, step-by-step, and give you a system that you can use to start your own profitable online business and grow it to 6 figures and beyond.

This guide is split into three parts.

In Part 1, I’ll tell you my full story of how I went from earning $7/h as a programmer to making 6 figures online while traveling the world.

By telling you my story, I’ll show you exactly how I built a 6-figure online business over the past few years against all odds, and hopefully show you that if I can do it, you can do it too.

In Part 2, I’ll share my 6-step system for starting a profitable online business with you, that will help you go from making your first $1,000 or $10,000 online, to earning $30,000-$50,000/year.

In Part 3, we’ll cover 6 advanced strategies that will help you scale your online business from $30,000-$50,000/year to $100,000/year and beyond.

I used these exact systems with my private online business coaching clients to help them scale their online businesses to 6 figures and beyond – over and over again.

Let’s dive in!

Download the PDF of this 102-page Guide!

Since this is a long guide, you might want to grab a PDF and read it on the go:

This way, you can print it out, take notes, mark the key sections, or save it on your computer for future reference.

PART 1: How I went from earning $7/h as a programmer to making 6 figures online while traveling the world

A few years, nobody would guess I’d ever start a 6-figure online business. 

Not even me.

I felt like all the odds were against me. I had no rich parents, formal education, business knowledge, investors, connections, or anything else that would help me build an online business.

Plus, I lived in Slovenia – where nobody knew online businesses even existed at the time!

I finished high-school with not-so-glaring grades (even though I was considered a “smart kid”). I did okay as a computer science student and passed most of my exams without too much effort, but wasn’t a great programmer by any means.

This was me – quite a few years ago, living a clueless, comfortable life

I got myself a summer job as a programmer where I earned $7/h, which I was more than happy with at a time. Since I still lived with my parents, earning $1,000/month of “spending money” was plenty for me.

I mostly enjoyed my work on a daily basis, though I couldn’t really say I was making any sort of a difference coding anti-virus programs in my cubicle for 10 hours a day.

Deep down, I knew I wanted something more. I just didn’t know what that was at a time.

Then, one day, I had a conversation with one of my co-workers that changed my life forever.

I was talking to a senior programmer at the company over lunch, and he told me about his story.

He joined the company 20 years ago when he was a young programmer, fresh out of university. He was one of the first Slovenians to create their own video game.

When he joined the company, he worked on exciting projects, was paid well, and really enjoyed working at the company. 

But as the company grew from a handful to 500+ people, things changed. Slowly but surely, he was working on less and less exciting projects. He began to enjoy his work less and less, but because he had a wife, kids, and bills to pay, he was too afraid to change anything. He settled for what he had.

20 years later, he was working in the same room as I was. He was working on the same boring project.

And the worst part? He was earning less than I was, and I just joined the company a few month ago.

Hearing that made my heart drop, but also gave me a reality check.

At that point, I knew I didn’t want to work at a 9-5 until the end of my life. I wanted to something more. 

I wanted to be in control of my life, my income, and how I spend my time.

And it was at that point that I decided I would start my own business.

I had no idea HOW I would do it, but I was determined to make it happen.

I became obsessed with starting my own business.

I started reading every book and blog I could find online on starting my own business.

I even spent $1,000 on an online course that taught me how to freelance (and was one of the best investments I’ve ever made).

For the first time ever, I found something so exciting that I could spend hours and hours immersed in it – even when I was tired after work and university classes.

I learned about how to find a profitable business idea, how to find your first clients, what to charge, how to stand out from your competition…

I left no stone unturned.

How I made $0 in my first 7 months of starting a business

As I started learning about starting my own business, I was eager to put what I learned into action.

I connected with other entrepreneurs in Slovenia and tried to get their support with starting my business, which wasn’t that useful as I didn’t know anyone that could teach me how to start my own freelancing business.

I eventually teamed up with 2 other students that wanted to start their own business to start our own website development company.

They would take care of coding, and I’d take care of the marketing side of the business. 

We developed our master plans over long evening meetings for how we’d work with amazing clients and build websites for them.

We started reaching out to potential clients, had many meetings with them, but there was just one problem:

We never got any paying clients.

There are many reasons why our idea didn’t work out.

We didn’t work well together as a team. We didn’t have a clear gap in the market. We didn’t know how to build trust and credibility as university students. We didn’t even officially have our own company!

After 3-4 months of working on an idea that felt like an uphill battle, I had enough.

I was burned out from putting hours and hours into the business every day and receiving nothing back, and I was bored of endless meetings that didn’t really change much.

I decided to leave the team and take a break from starting my own business.

If at first you don’t succeed…

In the meanwhile, I became obsessed with the topic of productivity.

Because I had to juggle working in a 9-5 job, attending university AND starting my own business, I had to learn how to become more productive.

I devoured all the productivity books I could find, and applied them to my own life. I was excited to discover a whole new world of self-development books that was hidden to me as a college student who only knew textbooks and fiction books.

Eventually, I got the idea to become a productivity coach for a video game company in Slovenia that I really liked. My idea was to help their employees become more productive, so they can meet deadlines more easily.

I did my research, visited the company, met the CEO, negotiated for weeks, and was set to start working with the company within two weeks…

…until they lost funding they were supposed to receive, and couldn’t hire me.

I called them a few more times over the next few weeks, but when I saw that things weren’t going to change, I decided to move on.

Third time is the charm: How I made my first $50 online

One spring morning at 6am, I woke up in my room in my parents’ apartment. It was still dark outside.

I had a crazy idea on my mind – I could teach online poker players how to become more productive, so they could make more money.

Throughout my high-school and university years, I played some online poker to make a side-income, and I knew that the more focused you stayed for the longer period of time, the more you would make.

Since I’ve now spent 6+ months immersed in the world of productivity, I felt like I definitely knew more than an average joe about productivity – and I knew I could help other people become more productive.

In my head, this seemed like a perfect idea. 

Now I needed to find out if other people felt the same way too.

I turned on my computer and visited an online community I used to be active in, and started writing “The Ultimate Guide to Skyrocketing Your Poker Productivity”:

My idea was to simply start sharing some of my knowledge online and see if people liked it.

Still early in the morning, I cranked out a few chapters of the guide where I talked about basic self-development concepts like writing your vision statement and setting measurable goals:

Happy with what I’ve written, I went back to sleep and wake up a few hours later, at 11am. I was eager and anxious to check if anyone liked what I wrote.

I was surprised to see a flood of positive comments and feedback on what I wrote:

Which gave me the momentum to keep writing more and more. I wrote about everything that came to my mind, from exercising to nutrition to taking breaks, and added new chapters to the guide every 1-3 days:

And in the meanwhile, I listened to the feedback from my readers and wrote chapters that answered their specific questions:

I kept writing the guide, and more and more people kept reading it and sharing it with their friends.

Eventually, over 223,000 people read the guide:

And the readers liked the guide so much that they translated it to 7 other languages to share in other communities (like the German community of the same website):

I started writing this guide just to share my knowledge online – little did I know it would become an overnight sensation in the world of online poker.

Within a few weeks of publishing the first few chapters of my guide, something surprising happened:

Poker players that read the guide started reaching out to me, asking me to coach them 1on1.

They read the guide and liked it, and wondered if I could help them answer their questions about productivity and answer their specific questions. 

Naturally, I said yes, and picked a starting hourly rate of 50eur/hour, which seemed high enough to be exciting to me, but was still at the bottom range of what online poker players typically paid for poker coaches.

Soon, I got my first paying client:

How I went from my first $50 to $38,000 in a year

Seeing the response on my guide and the demand for productivity coaching, I decided to write to the administrators of the website where I published the guide and offered to find ways to work together.

Since they had a poker school on their website where they published educational videos, I suggested that I create a few videos and live classes and see how their readers would like them.

I ended up recording over 40 videos on various topics which received tens of thousands of views:

And I also delivered some live classes where I coached poker players on how to become more productive live.

I was paid around $50/hour for coaching and $200 for each video I created, which helped me consistently earn $500-$1,000/month:

On top of the videos I recorded for the poker school, I took on up to 13 private coaching clients at a time, and gradually increased my 1on1 coaching rates from $50/h to $100/h, $200/h and even $400/h.

Eventually, I turned $50 coaching contracts into $5,000 contracts:

Which is how I was able to earn more than $38,000 within the very first year of starting my online business.

Then, I did something radical.

Why I moved on from poker productivity into a completely different niche

As a poker productivity coach, I was consistently earning $2,000-$3,000/month (sometimes more), which was 2-3x more than what I was making as a programmer before.

I had more free time than before, worked on my own schedule, and did things I loved doing. 

I could do anything I wanted to, from traveling, to eating out at fancy restaurants, to eventually moving into my own apartment with a friend of mine.

Still, deep down, I didn’t feel as happy and fulfilled as I wanted to.

Yes, the money was good. Yes, I had the freedom to do what I wanted to.

But I didn’t really feel like I was making a difference in the world.

Every time someone asked me what I did for a living, I was ashamed to talk about what I did.

They would instantly say I’m a “gambler”, and I also knew that I wasn’t really changing the world in any way – I was just helping good poker players take more money from gamblers.

As I learned more about growing my business and started attending business events and conferences all over the United States, I was introduced to a whole new world of entrepreneurship:

I went on a VIP tour of the Metropolitan Museum when I visited my first conference in NYC

I met entrepreneurs that I felt were actually making a difference and helped thousands of people live better lives.

I wanted that too.

I wanted to build a business I would be proud and happy to talk about with anyone I met.

I wanted to build a business where I could help millions of people all over the world.

I wanted to build a business where I could speak at conferences in front of hundreds of people and write a book about in the future.

The poker industry just wasn’t going to cut it, and I wanted to start something else.

I stopped focusing on growing my poker business and taking on new clients, and decided to start a brand new business.

$500, 6 months, and hundreds of hours went down the drain

Starting a brand new online business wasn’t as easy as I thought it would be.

With my poker productivity business, I was able to tap into an existing community of hundreds of thousands of poker players, attracted by the poker school.

This meant that I didn’t have to do much to promote my content or my coaching services – I simply wrote guides about productivity, motivation, nutrition, and other topics, the readers in the forums liked them, and many of them reached out to work with me.

When I first started playing with the idea to create a new online business about productivity for “everyone” (I didn’t have a clear audience in mind), I wanted to set up my own website that I would be in control of.

I had no clue how to go about setting up a website at that time, so I spent $500 on a custom website design:

And since I had no idea how to run an online business on my own, I just started writing short blog posts about things I thought were interesting:

Now while this approach MIGHT have worked well in the poker industry where nobody was writing about topics like getting out of your comfort zone, it didn’t work on my own blog.

I spent over 6 months writing articles, endlessly tweaking my website, and sharing my posts on social media, but nothing really happened.

Over the course of 6 months, I got barely any website traffic, about 46 e-mail subscribers, and earned less than $3 through affiliate sales of books I reviewed.

Even though my first online business was a wild success, things just weren’t working out with this new online business model. I just couldn’t crack the code to make it work.

I was on the verge of giving up on my new idea and focusing on my poker productivity until…

I learned how to start an online business the RIGHT way, and my new business took off 

One of my mentors that taught me how to build a freelance business invited me to join a secret BETA online program to help me develop my online business, because I expressed my interest for doing that at a conference he hosted.

Over the course of 8 weeks, I learned the ins and outs of building an online business, and was determined to make it work this time around. 

I gave myself a month to build a website and get some initial traction with my new website that would focus on teaching entrepreneurs and executives how to become more productive.

This time, I set up a simple website over just a few days:

I started writing blog posts that my audience would enjoy reading:

As well as Ultimate Guides which worked really well in my previous online business:

And I created a free e-book (lead magnet) that would help me build my e-mail list and later sell online courses and coaching services:

This is when things started to work.

Largely through the help of my Ultimate Guides and lead magnets, I was able to build an e-mail list of 500 e-mail subscribers within the first month of starting my website, and had days when I got tens of new e-mail subscribers in a single day:

And my e-mail list continued to grow through the remarkable content I developed to over 2,200 e-mail subscribers within the first year of starting my online business.

As my e-mail list grew, I learned how to create and sell online courses that would become my new method for growing my online business.

I started out by creating a short course about productivity, Success Systems, that I sold for $49 to my e-mail list of 500 e-mail subscribers:

7 of my readers bought my course, which would help me earn my first $350 with my new online business idea:

It wasn’t much compared to what I was earning with my poker productivity coaching business, but it was enough to see that this business could take off. 

After my first launch, I created a second tier of the product. I added a few master classes with my entrepreneurial friends and charged $99 for the premium tier. I also focused on growing my email list so I could launch to a bigger audience. 

A few months later, I launched my updated product again to a list of 1200 subscribers. This time I earned $1600. 

I later increased the price of my product from $49/$99 to $99/$199 for different tiers. I launched the product again to a list of 1700 subscribers and earned $4000. 

To celebrate the exponential growth of my online business, I decided to travel around Thailand for a month, where I recorded a new online course:

This course (I called it Limitless Life) was about overcoming mental barriers in your life, and it generated a few thousand dollars. 

Over the next few months, I focused on selling these two courses, and my business slowly but steadily grew. This was the time when I decided to completely let go of my poker productivity coaching business and focus on my new business full time.

Next year, my business grew on a whole new level. 

I developed my first semi-premium online program, Skyrocket Your Side Business, and sold it to an e-mail list of 3,500 e-mail subscribers at $497.

This program generated over $20,000 in sales, making it my first 5-figure launch, and a 5x bigger launch than any of my previous launches:

I couldn’t believe it – and saw endless possibilities to continue to grow my online business.

Then, I did something radical (and crazy) once again.

I put my business on hold, just as it was about to grow to a whole new level.

Why I put my business on hold and worked with Ramit Sethi for 2 years

To fully understand what happened next, I’d like to introduce you to my first online business mentor, Ramit Sethi. 

I first learned about Ramit when I dove into the world of personal development and started learning about how to manage my money better.

I was blown away by his book I Will Teach You To Be Rich which opened my eyes about how saving, investing and handling money in general.

I liked his “no-bs” approach to life and that he said things as they were, and resonated with his philosophy that “there’s a limited amount of money you can save, but an unlimited amount of money you can earn”.

I joined a few of Ramit’s online courses and used them to learn about freelancing and creating online courses, which helped me successfully start my own online businesses and earn thousands of dollars every month.

I soaked in all the knowledge I could from Ramit, and flew to the United States multiple times to different conferences he hosted just so I could learn as much from him as possible.

Then, one day, I got an unexpected opportunity to work together with Ramit – IF I put the growth of my online business on hold.

To help more of his students succeed in building an online business, Ramit decided to start an online coaching program called “Accelerator”, and was looking for a coach to run the program.

At first, I wasn’t sure if I wanted to do that, as I knew that it was a full-time position that would require me to put the growth of my rapidly-growing online business on hold.

On the other hand, I saw this as a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to work together with someone who successfully built a 7-figure online business, which could be priceless in the long run.

Since I didn’t want to miss out on this opportunity, I took a leap of faith and said yes.

How I turned Accelerator into a 7-figure online program

As I came on-board of Accelerator, my role was to:

  • Coach hundreds of online entrepreneurs on how to start and grow their online businesses as an online business coach
  • Continue to grow and scale the program to increase the monthly and yearly revenues as the product manager

To do that, I had countless resources at my disposal.

I could learn directly from Ramit about how he ran his company throughout the team calls, I attended annual in-person strategy retreats with his company, and got his personal support with growing the program.

I tackled the opportunity head-on and spent 2 years developing and improving the program, from changing how the program works, to writing new sales pages for the program, running webinars to sell it, and tweaking pricing and sales strategy.

I later brought on a copywriting coach and a community manager to the team, and we soon scaled the program to well beyond 7 figures in revenue.

This was a priceless experience as I:

  • Learned the “behind the scenes” of how Ramit ran his 7-figure online business with a team of 30+ employees
  • Learned how to run a 7-figure online program (and manage my own team) myself
  • Worked with 1,000+ online entrepreneurs to help them start and grow their online businesses

While I worked on Accelerator, I gained a deep understanding about how to run and grow my online business, and I was ready to take what I learned and put it into action in my own business.

After 2 years and one week, my Accelerator adventure came to an end. I felt like I gave the program everything I could, saw the program rapidly grow to 7 figures and beyond, and soaked all the knowledge I could out of my work with Ramit.

But deep down, I knew I wanted to go back to running my own online business, and after handing off the program to my previous team-mates, I did just that.

How I finally hit the $100,000/year mark with my own online business

Even before I went back to running my own business full time, I technically had a 6-figure online business (I made more than 6 figures a year through my contract and the online courses I sold through my own website).

But once I switched back to running my own online business in 2017, I finally made more than $100,000 in a year by selling my own online courses and coaching services – and finally felt like a 6-figure entrepreneur.

As I came back to running my own online business, I felt completely different than 2 years ago.

First, I no longer had the desire to talk about productivity. That was a topic that I had been talking about for years now, and I had no desire to continue talking about it.

Instead, I decided to test out a completely different idea – helping online entrepreneurs write Ultimate Guides.

I came up with that idea because I noticed that even while I wasn’t focusing on growing my online business, my e-mail list continued to grow by thousands of e-mail subscribers every year:

When I looked through my numbers to find out why that happened, I’ve found a simple common denominator – my Ultimate Guides.

By writing Ultimate Guides like this one, I attracted thousands of visitors to my website every month, and converted them into e-mail subscribers and raving fans.

I noticed that other established entrepreneurs were using Ultimate Guides to grow their online businesses as well (my mentor Ramit Sethi used them, SEO expert Neil Patel used them, companies like Leadpages used them…), so I knew they didn’t just work for me.

And since a lot of my readers have told me that they loved reading my Ultimate Guides, and writing them came easy to me, I decided to see if I could teach other entrepreneurs how to grow their online businesses through Ultimate Guides as well.

I talked to hundreds of entrepreneurs about writing Ultimate Guides, got a few 1on1 coaching clients for creating them, and wrote an in-depth e-book about how to write them to raise awareness around this method of growing an online business.

This put me in a perfect position to develop an online program about creating Ultimate Guides.

The second thing that was different than 2 years ago was that I was no longer interested in creating $47 or $197 online courses.

Doing that didn’t feel like a challenge any more, and I didn’t feel like recorded online courses were the best way to help people (as the follow-through rate of recorded online courses was only a few %).

I decided it was time to develop my very first “flagship program” – a premium online program for creating Ultimate Guides that I would price at $997.

I created the program as a “live” program where I coached my students how to write their Ultimate Guides over the course of 14 weeks, and the program was a huge success.

The vast majority of the students that joined the program successfully finished it, and got hundreds (if not thousands) of new e-mail subscribers through the Ultimate Guides they wrote.

Many of them got new coaching clients or freelance clients through their guides as well, even far before they were finished. One specific client managed to get over $100,000 worth of consulting work within less than a year of writing and publishing his guide.

On the other side of the business, Ultimate Guide System was a huge hit as well – it generated $111,170 in a single year through 3 big product launches ranging between $30,000 and $42,000, making it my first “true” 6-figure year in my online business.

How I continued to earn 6 figures with my online business every year

Over the next few years, I continued to test and create new online programs, and evolved my online business in a direction that helped me help more and more people with the things I did best.

I developed a 12-week online program called Write More Every Day which helps online entrepreneurs consistently create remarkable content every week.

I created a 6-month premium online coaching program called 6-Figure Accelerator (previously called The Top Performer Club) where I work with 5-6 figure entrepreneurs to help them scale their online businesses to 6 figures and beyond through weekly live coaching calls.

I evolved Ultimate Guide System into List-Building Accelerator, a hands-on coaching program where I help online entrepreneurs rapidly grow their e-mail lists over the course of 8 weeks. 

This, combined with my Ultimate Guides (that help me attract new visitors to my website month after month), has helped me run a 6-figure online business every year for the past few years.

And that’s where my story ends (at least for now). 

Now you know how I built my own 6-figure online business, and in the second part of this guide, I’m excited to show you how you can do the same.

PART 2: How to start a profitable online business, and make your first $10k, $30k or $50k online

In the first part of this guide, I shared how I started my own online business over the past few years.

However, I realize that just knowing how I did it won’t help you do the same – as you can’t just copy all the steps I took to get there.

Your journey to building a 6-figure online business will be different than mine, and you’ll need a different set of steps to get there.

Luckily, throughout the past few years, I “cracked the code” to starting a 6-figure online business FOR you, and I’m excited to share the complete system for starting a 6-figure online business with you in this guide.

To write this guide, I gathered data from:

  • My personal experiences of building a 6-figure online business, and major tipping points I experienced along the way
  • Coaching 1,000+ entrepreneurs on how to start an online business through Accelerator, and seeing exactly what separated entrepreneurs that succeeded from ones that didn’t
  • Helping multiple entrepreneurs scale their online businesses from $20,000-$30,000/year to $100,000-$300,000+/year through Top Performer Club, my intimate coaching program

I condensed all of the insights and methods that I’ve seen work over and over again into a simple, bulletproof system that you can follow step-by-step to start and grow your online business to 6 figures and beyond.

You can use this system if you’re just starting out from scratch, or if you’re already making $30,000 (or even $100,000) a year to scale your online business to the next level.

The basic system for starting a profitable online business includes the following elements

  • Your Gap in The Market is the foundation of your online business, as it makes people care about what you do.
  • Your High-Converting Website allows you to capture website visitors and turn them into paying customers.
  • Your Remarkable Content helps you attract more visitors to your website.
  • Your E-mail List helps you sell your paid products and services.
  • Your Paid Products and Services help you monetize your online business and make a living with it.

In this guide, we’ll work our way through these elements to build an online business layer by layer.

We’ll build a strong foundation first, then add additional layers to develop your own bulletproof system for earning money with your online business.

Step #1: Find Your Gap in The Market

If there’s one thing that can “seal your fate” and make or break your business idea, it’s finding a Gap in The Market.

If you haven’t found a Gap in The Market, working on your business will feel like an uphill battle.

You’ll struggle with generating the initial traction, attracting traffic to your website, growing your e-mail list and getting clients for your online courses and coaching programs. 

When you find a Gap in The Market, everything becomes 100x easier.

Your potential customers will instantly want to talk to you, read and share your content, recommend your website to their friends, and wait in line to work with you.

You could follow all the remaining steps in this guide step by step, but if you don’t have a clear Gap in The Market, they “won’t work”, and you won’t see the traction you’ll want to see with your online business.

So what is the “Gap in The Market”, and what are the signs that you’ve found one?

In it’s very basic form, the Gap in The Market is the gap between demand and what’s already out there:

In my very first business (productivity coaching for online poker players), the Gap in The Market was simple.

While there were already a lot of books and blog posts about productivity out there, there weren’t any specific resources (or coaches) that would be tailored to online poker players.

After testing my idea, I also noticed that the demand was there (since a lot of people loved my Ultimate Guide and wanted me to write more chapters of it).

Every 6-figure entrepreneur I ever talked to has a clear Gap in The Market.

It could be:

  • Helping coders ace Google interviews
  • Helping Etsy sellers grow their Etsy shops
  • Helping Upwork freelancers get more clients

You can find 12 more examples of Gaps in The Market here.

Once you find your Gap in The Market, you can then continue to create both free content (blog posts, YouTube videos, guides,…) and paid content (online courses, coaching programs,…) to “fill the gap”.

To find your Gap in The Market, you can read my in-depth guides on finding and validating your online business idea…

…or watch my in-depth masterclasses on finding your profitable business idea:

and validating your business idea:

Then, once you’ve seen enough traction with your idea, you can move to the next step of this guide.

Step #2: Create a High-Converting Website

Once you’ve found your Gap in The Market and generated some initial traction, it’s time to set up your High-Converting Website.

Your website will become the physical foundation of your online business. 

It’s where you’ll host your blog, create content to attract new readers, collect e-mail subscribers, and host and sell your online courses and coaching programs.

You’ll want to create a website that fills the gap in the market, is simple and easy to navigate, and helps you collect e-mail addresses of potential customers, so you can later sell to them.

By “high-converting”, I mean that your website should be optimized to help you build an e-mail list for your online business, which will become the key channel for selling your online courses and coaching program.

I made the mistake of not creating a high-converting website when I first started a productivity blog and got 46 e-mail subscribers over the course of 6 months (and $3 worth of affiliate revenue).

If you want to avoid that mistake and start earning hundreds or thousands of dollars with your online business within a few weeks or months, you’ll want to get your website right.

To help you create your own high-converting website, you can use the following step-by-step guides:

  • How to choose the right e-mail provider and set up your e-mail list
  • How to set up a high-converting website

As you set up your website, you’ll probably wonder “what should I put on it?”. 

On your website, you’ll want to publish your Lead Magnet, set up opt-in forms, write opt-in copy and start creating remarkable content to begin attracting new visitors to your website.

Ideally, you’d have all of these (including at least one piece of remarkable content) set up before you share your website with the world.

Then, once you have all the pieces set up, you can focus on creating more remarkable content and growing your e-mail list to continue attracting new potential customers to your online business.

Here’s a simple checklist you can refer to to know exactly when you’ve finished creating your high-converting website:

Again, here are the resources that will help you work through all of the above steps:

  • How to set up your domain, hosting and website platform
  • How to set up your e-mail provider
  • How to create a lead magnet
  • How to write opt-in copy
  • How to create opt-in forms
  • How to create your homepage, blog page and about page
  • How to create your first piece of remarkable content

Once you have all of the above elements in place, you should be ready to move on to the next layers of the pyramid – consistently creating remarkable content and growing your e-mail list.

Step #3: Consistently Create and Promote Remarkable Content

So you have a website… but how will your potential customers find it?

The answer is simple – through Remarkable Content.

The next layer of your website is your free content that helps you spread your ideas and build trust with your potential customers, typically in the form of blog posts or YouTube videos.

With your Remarkable Content, you’ll fill the Gap in The Market and give your potential customers what they want – solutions to their Problems Worth Solving.

With every piece of Remarkable Content you create, you’ll add an additional stream of visitors to your website that might become your customers down the line.

The more Remarkable Content you create, the more streams you’ll have, and the more potential customers you’ll have.

When it comes to creating Remarkable Convent, it’s important that you:

  • Create content that is truly remarkable (to stand out from everyone else in your industry, create content that’s useful to your audience, and so your readers share it with others)
  • Create Remarkable Content consistently (so you keep attracting new potential customers to your online business every week and keep your existing readers engaged)
  • Promote your Remarkable Content (so you can spread the word about it and reach more readers with it)
  • Create your Content Strategy (so you can attract more of the RIGHT customers to your business for years to come through different Content Seasons)

Content Creation is a key skill for consistently growing your online business, and you can use the resources linked above to master it.

Step #4: Build Your E-mail List

Your Remarkable Content will help you attract new visitors to your website every week.

Your High-Converting Website will help you “capture” those new readers and turn them into e-mail subscribers, so you can stay in touch with them, send them every new piece of content you create, and sell your future products and services to them.

Before you start thinking about selling your first product or service online, it’s wise to get at least 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers.

If you diligently followed the previous steps from this guide, the combination of a High-Converting Website and consistent creation of Remarkable Content will already help you gradually grow your e-mail list – woohoo!

But since growing your e-mail list is too complex of a topic to cover in this guide, I wrote a separate, 447-page (!) guide exclusively on building your e-mail list to (tens of) thousands of e-mail subscribers.

You can read my Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List here (it’s free, just like this guide).

Reading the guide above will give you all the information you need to grow your e-mail list ro 1,000+ e-mail subscribers (and beyond). 

Both Creating Remarkable Content and Growing Your E-mail List are key activities that will help you grow your e-mail list from 0-$10,000, but also to $50,000, $100,000 and beyond.

It’s important that you continue to focus on these 2 key growth strategies, even while you’re developing and selling your paid products or services. 

Step #5: Create and launch your first online product (or service) 

Once you build an e-mail list of 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers, you’ll have enough potential customers to successfully develop or launch your first online products or service and get your first 5-10 paying customers.

When you’re just starting out with your online business, I recommend you to start with a lower-priced offer.

If you want to go down the product route, you could develop an online course, a workshop or a live course and price it somewhere between $47 and $97.

If you want to go down the service route, you could sell 1on1 coaching for $50-$100/h.

I recommend starting low (and not diving right into $497 or $997 online courses or $3000-$5000 coaching packages) because:

  • You want to get as many clients as possible in the beginning, to get raving testimonials and case studies that you can use later in your business
  • You don’t want to spend hours and hours developing a product or service that gets 0 sales
  • You have to learn the skill of selling or “launching” online – and that’s easier to do with lower price points

Increasing the price of your offerings is one of the easiest things you can do – while decreasing the price is a lot trickier.

I don’t recommend selling a product or service below $50 (like a $7 e-book) because you’ll likely attract lower quality customers, and the math just isn’t there to help you create a meaningful amount of revenue.

Once you successfully launch your first product or service, you can choose to:

  • Improve your existing product or service and/or increase the price next time you launch it
  • Create a new, more premium version of your product or service

Once you see that your business “works” and you’re getting your first few sales, you can gradually increase the prices of your paid offerings to scale up your revenue.

To develop your first online product or service, you can:

  • Choose a major problem of your audience (ideally a problem nobody else is solving well)
  • Think about how you can BEST solve that problem and get the best results for your clients
  • Develop a curriculum for your online course or coaching program based on your ideas

You can then choose to either fully develop the program BEFORE you sell it (if you’ll feel more comfortable that way), or you can develop it AFTER you sell it “on the go”, and use the feedback from your customers to improve your program as you create it.

I know this is a lot – and I’ll write an in-depth guide to developing paid products and services in the near future. 

In the meanwhile, you can read this article from Foundr to help you get started with creating your first online course!

Step #6: Launch your product or service to your e-mail subscribers

Once you’ve successfully developed your first online product and service, there’s just one final step between you and earning your first dollars with your online business – offering it to your e-mail subscribers.

You’ll typically do that through a so-called “sales sequence” or “sales funnel”.

There are multiple different ways to sell your products and services – from phone sales to webinar sales to e-mail funnels.

If you’d like to sell your products or services via phone, I can highly recommend the book Prosperous Coach from Rich Litvin, and if you’d like to sell via webinars, I can recommend The Ultimate Webinar Marketing Guide from Lewis Howes.

I’ve used both of these resources in the past, and they’ll give you a good foundational framework and exact steps to get started.

In this guide, I’ll instead focus on a basic 5-day sales funnel and a simple sales page that you can use to successfully sell your first product or service.

To create your sales page, you can read my in-depth article about creating a $111,170 sales page, where you’ll learn:

  • The exact strategies I used to develop and sell a $1,997 online course from scratch
  • A detailed walkthrough of how I wrote my $111,170 sales page in 8 simple steps
  • How YOU can create a high-converting sales page for your e-book, online course or coaching program

Then, to create your the 5-day sales funnel, you can read this in-depth guide from Teachable.  

Finally, if you’d like to see what it takes to make $36,381 with a single product launch, you can read my in-depth guest post on Growthlab to learn exactly how I did it.

With your first product launch, you’ll earn your first few hundred (or thousand) dollars online.

Then, it’s “rinse and repeat”:

  • You’ll create and promote Remarkable Content to grow your e-mail list
  • You’ll relaunch your existing product (or service) once every few months

Over time, you might start thinking about developing new online products or services, you might increase the price of your existing products (while making them more valuable), or you might learn how to sell your products better.

All of these will contribute to steady growth of your online business, and as long as you’re successfully attracting more e-mail subscribers every month, your online business will continue to grow. 

But at a certain point, you’ll hit a plateau where growth of your online business will slow down – and you’ll want to go faster.

Maybe that will be at $10k/year, $30k/year, or $50k/year.

At that point, you’ll benefit from the final part of this Ultimate Guide.

PART 3: How to scale your online business to $100,000/year (and beyond)

What does it take to scale your online business from $30k/year or $50k/year to 6 figures and beyond?

  • Is it just a matter of growing your audience or getting more clients?
  • Should you focus on selling more of your existing products and services, or developing new ones?
  • Do you need to hire a big team to get there?

Here’s the good news:

If you’re already making 20k, 30k or 50k a year with your online business, you’re already doing something very right.

You’ve found your profitable business idea. 

You’ve built an audience around it. You’ve successfully sold one or more products or services. You have a growing base of customers, testimonials and success stories.

You’re making money, and know that you can take this business to 6 figures and beyond.

Here’s the not-so-good news:

Your business might be a mess.

You have cycles of “feast and famine” where you make $5,000 or $10,000 one month when you launch your product or land that big proposal and feel on top of the world… only to make $1,000 or $2,000 next month, which is barely enough to pay the bills. It’s a constant roller coaster.

You try a lot of different things and just work on whatever “feels good” in the moment but don’t have a clear strategy for the future. You feel scattered, unfocused, and even though you’re putting in the work, you’re not sure if what you’re working on is the BEST use of your time.

Deep down, you know that what got you here won’t get you there.

Hustling every day and just putting in the work was enough to get to 5 figures, but you know that you’ll need to change something to get to 6 figures (and beyond).

The question is: What?

I feel you. I’ve seen it (and done it) all before. The feast and famine. The lack of clarity. The throwing spaghetti at a wall approach.

It’s fun when the money is coming in and things are working, and a lot less fun when they’re not.

But after successfully running my own 6-figure online business year after year, and helping many online entrepreneurs scale from $20k/year to $100,000/year (and even $300,000+/year), I cracked the code to what really matters, and what doesn’t.

In this final part of the guide, I’ll cover the 5 advanced strategies that you can use to scale your online business to 6 figures and beyond.

Strategy #1: Layers on new list-building strategies

Once you start seeing a plateau with your audience / e-mail list growth, you need to develop new “layers” of your list-building system.

For example, if you primarily used a YouTube channel to grow your e-mail list, you might want to add a new channel like Ultimate Guides, Pinterest, or partnerships.

You can master and layer on one strategy at a time, while systematizing and delegating parts of your existing list-building strategies to make time for these new layers.

Growing your audience exponentially is a great way to get closer and closer to the 6-figure mark, and a key element you’ll always want to focus on if you want your business to keep growing.

To learn how to create new layers of your e-mail list growth, you can read my in-depth guide on advanced list-building strategies.

Strategy #2: Create your premium, flagship program

A lot of people these days recommend creating “tripwire” products, “downsells” and other types of products that you can sell at a low price point to get more customers.

However, I believe that instead of creating low priced products that might bring in a few thousand dollars, a much better approach to building a 6-7 figure online business is to focus on developing premium, flagship programs and charging $500, $1,000 or $2,000 for them.

The reasons why I’m not a huge fan of creating cheap products are:

  • They don’t add a whole lot to your bottom line
  • They usually don’t create incredible success stories
  • A lot of people buy them, but never use them
  • They attract more of your WORST customers, rather than BEST customers
  • Dealing with bad customers is a huge time suck

Instead, I recommend focusing on creating the absolute BEST online program in your industry around a certain topic (and then charging what the program is worth).

This won’t just help you add tens (or potentially hundreds) of dollars to your bottom line. It will allow you to give your full attention to your best customers, make a bigger difference in their lives, and a bigger impact in the world (that you just can’t make with a $17 e-book).

In my business, creating my first $1,000 online program was one of the best decisions I’ve ever made (and helped me earn $111,170 in less than 10 months). 

So if you’re running a 5-figure online business and aren’t thinking about creating a premium product (or a service) yet, I really encourage you to start thinking about it.

A great example of how powerful developing your flagship program comes from one of my private coaching clients.

When we started working together, they offered a combination of a $59 online course and 1on1 coaching to earn $26k over the course of 5 months with their online business. Not bad, but not quite 6 figures yet.

Later on, we developed a $997 flagship program together, and they launched it for more than $75,000 in a SINGLE launch. That’s 3x more than they earned in 5 months beforehand.

If you want to continue growing your online business, creating better, more premium products is a great way to do it.

Strategy #3: Expand Your Product Suite

Most online entrepreneurs that run 7-8 figure online businesses (with a handful of exceptions) don’t just sell one online product. They sell a product suite of different products on different topics, at different price points.

There are a few reasons why they do that:

  • They can earn additional revenue with their business every month without selling the same online program over and over again
  • They can attract new customers that they weren’t reaching with their old products
  • They can add more value to their existing customers who are hungry to learn (any buy!) more from them

If you’re selling just one core product to your audience over and over again and have an email list of thousands of email subscribers, creating your own product suite will not just help you earn more every month. 

It might even lead to your biggest launch to date since your existing happy clients can’t wait to continue working with you.

You can create your own product suite through the following 3 stages:

  • Rapid Research Cycle: Find new product ideas worth pursuing
  • BETA Testing Cycle: Test and validate your ideas with your audience
  • Product Development Cycle: Iterate to create world-class products

The simplest way to find new product ideas is to talk to your existing customers and discover what challenges they’re having so you can create new products or services that solve those problems for them. I call this the Rapid Research Cycle.

For example, over the last two weeks, I spoke to 20 of my existing clients to see which challenges they’re facing that I can solve for them.

I suggest going through the research cycle rather than fast (I do this by batching the customer research into 1-2 weeks), so you can continue with testing your ideas (just as fast).

Once you know which new products you want to create, the next step is to rapidly test your ideas through a BETA Testing Cycle.

Instead of spending 6 months creating a new product before releasing it to the world, I’ve found that a much better approach is to test your ideas at a less refined stage through BETA tests.

By launching a BETA version of your program at a slightly lower price point, you can instantly test and validate your product idea to see whether there’s demand for it or not – and then develop a world class product.

The reason why BETA tests work so well is that instead of developing a program in a vacuum, you can get real feedback on it from actual customers – AND you can get testimonials and success stories through the program that help you launch it successfully at the full price.

Once you run your product through the BETA Testing Cycle, and you’re happy with the results of the program, you can transition into the Product Development Cycle.

In this last cycle, you can buckle down, work through the feedback from your BETA program, and design a truly world class program that becomes the best online program in the industry around a certain topic. 

Once the program is designed, you can then launch it, and add it to your suite of online programs that you can continue offering to your audience for years to come.

With my private clients that already have e-mail lists of thousands of e-mail subscribers, expanding their product suite always results in more revenue and growth – it’s a strategy that can’t really fail.

Strategy #4: Monetize Every Month

The solution to the “feast and famine” cycle is incredibly simple and has worked wonders for my business.

In the past, I used to launch my programs only once every 3-4 months. This meant I would make $5k, $10k, or even $30k one month and then try to survive over the next few months as I burned through the money until I had to launch the program again.

This wasn’t fun at all. I spent a lot of time worrying what will happen if my next launch fails, and that extra stress didn’t exactly put me in the best mental space to run my online business.

Then I had this conversation with a mentor of mine and they gave me this profound insight:

“I think that if most online entrepreneurs just focused on monetizing their business every month, they’d never have money issues”.

I thought about it for a second and instantly realized how right they were.

The reality was that no matter how much I WANTED my business to grow if I only launched ONE program every 3-4 months and never gave my audience a chance to work with me in-between… They couldn’t work with me. And my business wouldn’t grow.

On the other hand, if I launched just one program every month, I’d be pretty much guaranteed to grow my business, even if not all of them are a huge success right off the bat. Plus, I’d all of a sudden have a much more stable online business as new revenue was coming in every month.

I felt a little bit stupid that I didn’t realize that myself (especially as most of the top online entrepreneurs monetize their business every month), and then focused on applying the lesson to my business.

One month, I launched an online course on creating Ultimate Guides. Another month, I launched a 1on1 coaching program. Another month, I launched a group coaching program.

All of a sudden, my business was growing faster than ever. I’ve made almost the same amount of revenue with my business over the course of 3 months than I did in the 9 months before that. It feels surreal how simple this was.

So if you want to grow your business from 5 to 6 figures, just giving your potential customers the opportunity to buy from you every month can make a HUGE difference in your business, diversify your income and help you escape the “feast and famine” cycle.

Just to be clear, monetizing every month doesn’t mean that you have to create a new online program every month – I wouldn’t recommend that.

Instead, you could:

  • Launch a new online program, or relaunch an existing program
  • Offer a 1on1 or group coaching program
  • Create a mastermind, a retreat or a live workshop

The options are limitless here – the most important thing is that you’re creating new valuable ways to help your audience, which will result in more revenue, more success stories, and more happy clients.

Strategy #5: Hire a Team

As you can imagine, developing new list-building strategies, product and services, AND launching every month takes a lot of time and energy.

At a certain point when you’re earning $30-$50k/year with your online business, you’ll likely start feeling the pain, burnout and frustration.

There will be so much you’ll want to do, but way too little time and energy to make it all happen. 

Not to mention all the admin work you’ll have to do in your business that takes time away from actually working on things that matter most, like developing or launching new programs:

  • Scheduling and rescheduling coaching or customer research calls
  • Answering customer support questions and e-mails
  • Organizing research notes
  • Formatting blog posts
  • Uploading coaching call recordings to your membership area
  • Designing powerpoint presentations for your online cousres
  • Editing YouTube videos
  • …

When you begin to feel like you’re being pulled in 10 different directions and you spend way too much time on low-impact work that isn’t growing your online business or worth your time, you should start thinking about hiring a team.

Specifically, I recommend you to first hire a Virtual Assistant at $20-$25/h to help you with all the admin work in your business (from scheduling calls to handling your e-mail and uploading course materials for you).

To get started with hiring your Virtual Assistant, you can read this in-depth guide from Frank Magnotti. 

Later on, you can start thinking about hiring a video editor, product developer or a copywriter, depending on how quickly and aggressively you want to free up your time and scale your online business – but that shouldn’t be necessary to reach 6 figures.

Strategy #6: Create a Lean Schedule

Finally, you’ll also want to reorganize your schedule to make sure you’re spending your time where it matters most in your online business.

To develop new programs, write sales copy or create new content, you’ll need big blocks of uninterrupted time, and you’ll need to remove yourself from the increasing amount of requests for your time from your clients, readers (and even team-members).

To help you get the most out of your time for your business, finish work early and enjoy guilt-free afternoons, I encourage you to create a Lean Schedule.

This way, your online business will grow faster, while you actually spend less work on it every day.

This is another strategy that I’ve used with my 6-figure clients that makes a night-and-day difference in how fast their business grows (and helps them regain control over their rapidly growing business).

Summary

In this guide, I:

  • Told you my story of how I built my 6-figure online business from scratch
  • Shared with you my step-by-step system for starting a profitable online business
  • Gave you 6 advanced strategies for scaling your online business to $100,000+/year

And I also shared with you plenty of extra guides and resources that you can use to put the principles and strategies from this guide into action.

Now of course, building a 6-figure online business doesn’t happen overnight – and you’ll likely need a few years to go through this process.

Still, you now have a clear roadmap in front of you, so you know exactly which steps to take next, and you can revisit guide whenever you lose a sense of direction.

If you’re hungry for more strategies for scaling your online business to 6 figures and beyond, you should definitely read my blog post about 6 Critical Mistakes That Stop You From Starting a 6-Figure Online Business.

Quick Favor (Before You Go)

One last thing.

I’ve spent tens of hours writing this guide and years putting together the strategies that I shared with you (which I typically only share with my private coaching clients).

I decided to give this guide away for free because I really want to help more people turn their hobbies into full-time online businesses, and I did my best to make it the most detailed guide out there on starting a 6-figure online business.

If you enjoyed reading this guide, would you mind sharing it on your Facebook wall, e-mailing it to an entrepreneurial friend, or sharing it in a community of entrepreneurs who want to grow their online businesses?

It would mean the world to me if you helped me spread the word about this guide.

To share the guide, you can simply share this page with them.

Thank you so much, and I hope to hear about your successes soon!

-Primoz


How I Wrote a $111,170 Sales Page For my Online Course

By Primoz Bozic Leave a Comment

If you ever wondered how to write a killer sales page for your e-book, online course or coaching program, you’re in the right place.

In this detailed post, I’ll take you behind the scenes of how I wrote a sales page that generated $111,170 in 10 months:

The sales from my sales page for Ultimate Guide System

You’ll learn:

  • The exact strategies I used to develop and sell a $1,997 online course from scratch
  • A detailed walkthrough of how I wrote my $111,170 sales page in 8 simple steps
  • How YOU can create a high-converting sales page for your e-book, online course or coaching program

You’ll be able to the insights from this post to write your own sales page – whether it’s for a $29 e-book, a $197 online course, or a $1997 flagship program.

Let’s dive in!

Before you start reading, I highly recommend you to download my High-Converting Sales Page Starter Kit:

(1) The PDF version of this 8562-word article (that you can print out or save for future reference

(2) The PDF with my 69-page $111,170 sales page (that you can print out and follow along with as you’re reading this article)

(3) Two plug-and-play “Perfect Sales Page Templates”, which you can use to create your own sales page for a $47 e-book or a $1997 flagship online course.

You can download your High-Converting Sales Page Starter Kit here.

How a single sales page generated $111,170 in 10 months

Before I go into the nitty-gritty details of how I wrote this sales page, let’s set some context.

When I sat down to write this sales page, I:

  • Validated my online course idea by getting 7 paying 1on1 coaching clients 
  • Had a successful online business that I started 3 years ago
  • Had an e-mail list of 5,000+ e-mail subscribers that were eager to learn (and buy) from me

I didn’t spend a single cent on paid advertising – all the revenue came directly from selling my online course to my existing e-mail subscribers through e-mail launches and webinars.

Besides the sales page, the other key element of my launch process was my sales funnel, which I broke down in this incredibly detailed post I wrote for Growthlab. 

The online course I sold through this sales page was called Ultimate Guide System – it was a 14-week live online course on growing your online business through Ultimate Guides, and I sold it for $997-$1997.

Here’s exactly how the revenue came in:

  • In April, I first opened the doors to the program, priced it at $997, and generated $36,381 in revenue
  • In July, I relaunched the program at $1,497, and generated $33,075 in revenue
  • In September, two of my existing clients joined the program at $1,497, which generated $2,994 in revenue
  • In December, I relaunched the program at $1,997, and generated $38,720 in revenue

Combined, this sales page generated $111,170 in less than 10 months. 

How I wrote a 6-figure sales page in 8 simple steps

Now you have the context, let’s dive into how I wrote this sales page – from an idea to a finished page.

Beyond the typical steps of writing the sales page (writing the headline, hook, guarantee,…), I also included the steps that took place before the actual writing (the idea, validation, research and product development).

I included these steps because they are just as crucial for writing a high-converting sales page as the actual writing.

Without a great, validated product dea that is backed up by research, you could write the best copy in the world – but if you aren’t selling a product that your audience actually wants and is willing to pay for, it will never convert well.

In this article, I won’t talk about how I started my online business or grew my e-mail list (both very important factors for successfully selling your online products).

To learn more about that, you can read my MASSIVE 447-page Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List. 

You can use this guide to get to your first 1,000 (or 10,000) e-mail subscribers, and put yourself in a position to create 5-6 figure sales pages.

Ok, let’s talk about sales pages!

Step #1: The Idea

I first got the idea to create an online program about writing Ultimate Guides WAY back in 2015 (this is a message I wrote to a friend of mine):

A message I sent to my friend about creating a product about writing Ultimate Guides

And yet… I didn’t act on it for 2 whole years.

At the time, I thought it was just a random idea, that I couldn’t create more than an e-book about it, and I definitely didn’t envision selling a $1,997 online course about Ultimate Guides.

2 years later, as I decided to open a new chapter with my online business (I was sick of talking about productivity for the last 5 years), I thought long and hard about what to talk about next.

When I looked back at the growth of my online business, I noticed that the common denominator for attracting high-quality clients were the meaty, 10,000+ word Ultimate Guides that I wrote and published online for free.

When I looked around, I noticed that many established entrepreneurs like Ramit Sethi and Neil Patel wrote Ultimate Guides as well, as did the companies like Leadpages.

Neil Patel’s Library of Ultimate Guides

I had a hunch there was “something there”, and I thought about teaching online entrepreneurs how to grow their online business through Ultimate Guides.

But before I could move forward and create an online course about Ultimate Guides, I had to thoroughly validate my idea.

Step #2: Validation

I validated my idea through 3 simple experiments.

By the time I finished these experiments, I was 99% sure that my online course would be a success – AND I had the research to back up my assumptions.

Experiment #1: Coaching 

One fall afternoon, I had a conversation with a long-time friend who also ran an online business.

I offhandedly mentioned my idea of teaching entrepreneurs how to write Ultimate Guides to him, and his response shocked me:

“That’s a great idea. Can I hire you?”

At first, I was shocked – I didn’t expect such a positive response.

Then, I said “of course”, we fleshed out the idea, and I sent him an invoice for $500 to coach him through writing his Ultimate Guide:

The invoice from my very first Ultimate Guide coaching client

This wasn’t a huge money maker for me (at the time, I’ve signed coaching clients for more than $5,000 per client) – I just wanted to see if anyone would pay me for helping them write an Ultimate Guide.

Later that afternoon, I had a conversation with another entrepreneurial friend, and mentioned my idea to her.

Her response was exactly the same:

“I’m in! Can you send me an invoice?”

In a single afternoon, I went from an idea to 2 paying clients. 

I knew there was something there.

To continue validating my idea, I asked some of my clients if they wanted me to help them write an Ultimate Guide:

A message I wrote in a community of one of my online courses

And I e-mailed my e-mail subscribers and asked them the same thing:

Part of an e-mail I sent to my e-mail subscribers, offering Ultimate Guide coaching to them

Soon, I had 7 paying clients for 1on1 coaching on creating Ultimate Guides.

With each client, I kept increasing my rate – from $500 per guide to $1,500, $2,500, $4,000 and $5,000.

In just a few weeks, I generated $20,000+ with 1on1 coaching for Ultimate Guides through phone sales – without a sales page or even a thought of creating an online course.

Now I was certain that there was something there.

Experiment #2: Office Hours

The coaching clients I worked with were mostly my existing friends and past clients, and I wanted to make sure they didn’t buy from me just because “they knew me”.

I wanted to test my idea out with a wider audience that didn’t necessarily work with me in the past.

That’s why I created a simple post in an online community I was active in and offered to do “office hours” where I would coach entrepreneurs on a topic of their choice for free:

An “office hours” post I made in an online community I was active in

One of the possible topics was writing Ultimate Guides.

I knew that the specific community was full of my entrepreneurs that continuously invest in themselves (and not freeloaders), so I was comfortable that this experiment would give me more reliable data to validate my idea.

As it turned out, roughly 50% of the people that signed up for an office hours call with me were interested in creating Ultimate Guides and already saw the value in them. They came prepared with a list of specific questions, and I happily helped them out.

This experiment showed me that even people outside of my direct audience saw the value of Ultimate Guides, and helped me do a lot of research around the problems and concerns with creating Ultimate Guides.

Every day I worked on my idea, I was more convinced that it could become a huge hit.

Experiment #3: Free E-book

After my two initial experiments, I spent a few months focusing on serving my 1on1 clients as best as possible, noting down every question they ever asked me, and refining my process for creating Ultimate Guides.

Eventually, I turned my knowledge into a simple, step-by-step system for creating Ultimate Guides, and I wanted to share my system with the world.

I also wanted to demonstrate the value of Ultimate Guides to people that didn’t see the value in them yet.

That’s how I decided to write my Ultimate Guide Checklist, my free e-book that I shared with my e-mail subscribers, entrepreneurial friends, and my Facebook friends:

I shared my e-book on Facebook, 19 people reshared it and I got hundreds of new e-mail subscribers

The e-book took off, and within less than a week, hundreds of entrepreneurs subscribed to my e-mail list to download my e-book.

That was the final “green light” I needed to proceed with developing Ultimate Guide System – my flagship course on creating Ultimate Guides.

Step #3: Research

By the time I started writing my sales page, I had hundreds of pages of notes related to creating Ultimate Guides:

My Master Research Document for Ultimate Guide System

To collect these notes, I:

  • Took notes during my 1on1 coaching calls and office hours
  • Exchanged my e-mail subscribers about writing Ultimate Guides 
  • Talked to every person I met or connected with about Ultimate Guides

For example, when I went on an entrepreneurial mastermind in Cancun, I asked every entrepreneur in the room if they knew about Ultimate Guides and if they were interested in creating them, then grilled them about it.

I asked them why they wanted to create Ultimate Guides, what value they saw in them, why they created them (if they created them in the past), why they didn’t create them yet (if they didn’t have any), their concerns about writing Ultimate Guides, and more.

When I coached my 1on1 clients on creating Ultimate Guides, I diligently wrote down every question they ever asked me, and every interesting insight related to Ultimate Guides.

I took these notes in separate documents, and when it was time to start writing my sales page, I sat down to combine all of my notes in a single Master Research Document.

At first, it was a complete mess – I literally had hundreds of pages of disorganized notes.

I took a few days to plow through the notes and organized them into a few categories that helped me get a bird’s eye view of the data:

I organized my Master Research Document into different categories

Here are the categories I organized my research into:

  • Audiences I could help with my program
  • Problems that my audiences faced
  • Alternatives they tried in the past to solve their problems
  • Dreams that they wanted to achieve / accomplish
  • Concerns they might have about joining my program
  • Obstacles in their way

Here are a few examples from each of the categories.

Category #1: Audiences

There were a few different audiences that I could help with my program:

  • New entrepreneurs who wanted to get their online business off the ground
  • Established entrepreneurs who wanted to get more organic traffic and e-mail subscribers
  • Freelance copywriters that wanted to write Ultimate Guides for their clients

Category #2: Problems

These were the problems that entrepreneurs currently faced in their business:

  • “I’ve been working on my business for months / years, but haven’t seen much progress with it.”
  • “I see all other people growing their business so much faster than me. I feel like for the work I’m putting in, I should be getting the results that they are getting as well.”
  • “I want to launch my first online course but my e-mail list is too small and I’m not getting enough traffic to my website”

Category #3: Alternatives

This is what they have tried in the past to solve those problems (with limited success):

  • “I’ve published a few blog posts in the past, but they haven’t got me much traffic or e-mail subscribers”
  • “It’s hard to land guest posts opportunities, it takes forever to get them accepted, I often spend time just waiting on other peoples’ responses”
  • “Guest posting is not a popular thing in my industry. Very few sites allow guest posts. There’s only a few sites where I can promote my content”

Category #4: Dreams

This is what they wanted to accomplish / achieve:

  • “I want to be earning $2k/month by the end of the year”
  • “I want to get my business off the ground (launch a product my subscribers will be dying to buy, make some real money so I know I can do this and it’s not just a hobby”
  • “My #1 goal this year is to get to 1,000+ subscribers. That would allow meto make money from my blog.”

Category #5: Concerns

These were concerns that entrepreneurs had about writing guides in the first place:

  • “I’m not an expert – what can I bring to the table that others haven’t already said?”
  • “I don’t think writing a guide is that important for me right now”
  • “I don’t want to spend all these hours writing a guide that doesn’t have a financial payoff in the near future”

Category #6: Obstacles

These were obstacles that prevented entrepreneurs from writing Ultimate Guides:

  • “I get lost in too many ideas for the guide”
  • “I get lost in doing the research, lose my momentum, and end up putting it off because it takes time for me to write”
  • “I spend way too much time doing the research and designing the guide, because I’m afraid people won’t like it”

For each of these categories, I had tens of quotes from my customers (many of them were similar).

I worked through them to highlight the quotes that were the most common, the most painful, and attracted great clients. 

I would ignore the quotes that were either extremely rare (like “I want to build a business so I can work from any country because my partner is restricted by visas”), or attracted bad clients that were scattered and overwhelmed, or wanted overnight solutions (“I feel overwhelmed by everything I could be doing and haven’t done anything for my business for the last 3 months”).

Once I had my Master Research Document ready, it was time to move on to product development.

Step #4: Product Development

The final step I took before sitting down to write my sales page was to develop the actual program.

To do that, I had to develop the course curriculum, format and pricing. 

Part #1: Curriculum

First, I needed to figure out what to teach my clients – which would help me create my course curriculum.

To do that, I asked myself questions like:

  • What are all the key steps a student needs to take to successfully write an Ultimate Guide (and grow their e-mail list through it)?
  • What order should they take the steps in? What do they absolutely need to complete before moving to the next steps?
  • How long will it take my typical student to work through the steps, and how much can they accomplish each week?

As I developed my curriculum, I realized that the typical 4-week or 8-week online course framework wouldn’t cut it for this program.

There was just too much crucial information to cover to cram it all into 8 weeks or less, so I stopped paying attention to “industry standards” and focused on what would work best for my clients instead.

That’s how I decided to turn my program into a 10-week course (and later evolved it into a 14-week course).

I extended the curriculum after I went through the first cohort of my program and noticed that a few weeks were too work intense and my students started falling behind. I also realized that it took the vast majority of students roughly 14 weeks to finish their guide.

Of course there were a few exceptions of students that could write their guides in just a few weeks, and for those students I unlocked the content earlier, so they could speed through it if they wished to.

Finally, I ended up with an extremely detailed course curriculum, that would later help me create the “What Will I Learn?” section of my sales page:

A short passage from my course curriculum

As I designed my curriculum, I used my Ultimate Guide development process that I used with my 1on1 clients as a foundation.

I then combined this process (the steps that my students needed to go through) with the quotes from my Master Research Document (a long and draining process), to make the curriculum more forward-facing.

This combined what my audience NEEDED to do (the process) with what they WANTED (problems, dreams).

Once I completed my curriculum, I had the first starting blog of my sales page done, and I continued to develop the 2 remaining parts of my program.

Part #2: Format

Once I had a finished curriculum in my hands, I needed to figure out how to deliver the actual program.

Should I deliver the course live or record it up-front?

Should I include a community with the course?

Should there be additional Q & A sessions?

To get a clear answer to those questions, I asked myself a simple question:

How can I support my students to maximize their chances of success?

I knew that writing an Ultimate Guide was a long and intense process, and I wanted to make sure my students were fully supported throughout the process, so they could finish their guides on time and get the results they wanted.

Instead of putting my needs first (like “what’s the easiest way for me to do this” or “how do I make passive income?”) like many entrepreneurs do, I put the success of students first.

This philosophy helped me guide the development of my course format, which eventually turned into:

  • A 14-week live intensive training with live presentations and Q & A calls
  • A year of monthly alumni calls
  • A slack-based coaching platform
  • Masterclasses and Case Study interviews 

Here’s what the document with my course format looked like:

My course format (before writing the sales page)

Each element would add an additional layer of support to my program.

Through the weekly live training calls, I would coach students through every step of developing their Ultimate Guides answer their questions, and give them feedback on the work they’ve done to date.

Through the alumni calls, I would continue to support my student in writing future guides after they’ve successfully written their first guide.

Through the coaching platform, I would give my students additional feedback on parts of their guides (and help my students support each other through writing their guides).

Through the masterclasses and case study interviews, I would show my students real life examples of how to successfully write their guides, and dive deeper into topics I wasn’t an expert at with experts I knew (example: SEO masterclass).

This felt like a bulletproof support system where I would support my students from all different angles that I was happy with. 

Part #3: Pricing

Notice how until now, MONTHS into research and product development, I didn’t mention pricing even once.

The truth is that when I started out with planning Ultimate Guide System, I didn’t know I would create an online course that would sell for $997-$1997 and generate $111,170 over the course of less than a year.

I didn’t set out to create a $1,000 course or to make 6 figures with it.

Instead, I thought to myself “I know that Ultimate Guides are valuable, I know I can teach how to write them well, and I want to create the best online program on this topic out there”.

Before I nailed my course curriculum and format, I actually had no idea what I could price the program at.

I remember thinking about pricing it at $497 before I decided on the course format, but once I had the course in format in place, it started to feel more like a $997 course.

With 14 weeks of live calls (and a full year of support), $497 felt way too cheap. $997 felt better, and I knew that it could also be a $1997 course.

But since I’ve never sold a $997 course in the past, I decided to play it safe, price it at that, and try to help as many students as possible through the course (rather than trying to maximize the amount of revenue I earned through it).

Later, as I started the program, multiple students repeatedly told me that my program was “a steal” and “that I should charge more for it”:

Which later lead me to gradually increase the price of the program to $1497 and $1997, as I continued to improve it.

Throughout my pricing process, I did run into one major dilemma – should I create two tiers of the course or not?

I saw many online entrepreneurs that offered “pro tiers” of their courses that would include a few weeks of Q & A calls, and typically cost double the amount of a recorded online course.

I thought long and hard about whether to split my course into two tiers or not. I thought about offering a “content only” tier at $497 and selling a tier with the live coaching calls at $997.

Ultimately, I solved my dilemma by going back to the question of “how can I help my students succeed?”.

I knew that:

  • The recorded online courses had a WAY lower success rate than live calls (most recorded courses I saw that were 8 weeks long had a success rate of only a few %).
  • My students are far more likely to succeed if I coach them and support them through writing their guides than they are if I just throw 14 long video lessons at them

That’s how the decision became obvious – to give my students the best chances of success, I would need to offer the live coaching calls to ALL of my students.

And that’s how I removed the cheaper, “self-study” tier from my program, and locked my pricing ($997 for the full program) in place.

Now that I had a fully developed course curriculum, a course format with a bulletproof support system and the right price chosen, there was one final step I needed to complete before I started writing the sales page – the narrative.

Step #5: Positioning

In order to sell my program successfully and write a clear and compelling sales page, I needed to have a clear positioning for the sales page.

This positioning (my position in the market) had to communicate with my audience that my unique program can help them solve their problems and reach their dreams.

Some people like to call this  “the big idea”, others like to call it the narrative, and yet others like to call it “the unique selling proposition” or “positioning” – which is the expression I’ll use in this post as well.

Based on the research I’ve done, my positioning was as follows:

Ultimate Guide System helps new online entrepreneurs grow their e-mail list to 1,000+ e-mail subscribers so they can launch their first online product and get their online business off the ground.

A version of this positioning would then make it into the offer introduction section of my sales page:

A version of my positioning statement on my sales page

To put together my positioning, I simply pulled the most common and painful problems and desires from my primary audience (new online entrepreneurs) and assembled them into a positioning statement which would explain my sales page in a single sentence.

While there were other audiences that could benefit from the program (like established entrepreneurs and freelance copywriters), I knew that 80% of my audience had less than 1,000 e-mail subscribers – that’s why I decided to target that audience with my sales page positioning.

Step #6: Writing

I wrote my sales page step-by-step, by writing out each element of the sales page and assembling it into the order that made sense.

The elements of the sales page I wrote were:

  • Headline: The big title on top of the sales page about the #1 problem of my audience
  • Hook: The first few paragraphs of the sales page, designed to “hook” the reader in
  • Twist The Knife: An emotional, painful summary of the biggest problems of my audience
  • Common Myths: The biggest myths in my niche (and reasons why my readers were facing the problems they were facing)
  • Hope: A hint that a better solution exists
  • Paint The Dream: A vivid summary of the biggest desires of my audience
  • Introduce The Solution: The reveal of a “better approach” to solve their problems, and what the approach is
  • My Story: The first layer of proof that my approach works: my personal experience
  • Expert Examples: The second layer of proof: case studies from other experts
  • Relatable Examples: The third layer of proof: examples from new entrepreneurs
  • Data: The final layer of proof: data behind why my approach works
  • The Danger of Doing it Yourself: The cost and drawbacks of implementing my strategy without my guidance
  • The Background Story: The story of how I developed my approach and online program
  • Address Concerns: Addressing any final concerns why my approach wouldn’t work for the reader
  • Introduce The Offer: A brief introduction of the course with course positioning
  • How it Works: A detailed overview of the course format
  • What You’ll Learn: The course curriculum
  • Is This Program Right For You: Qualifying to make sure I’m attracting the right students
  • Money-Back Guarantee: Removing the rick of joining the course
  • Buy Buttons: A quick summary of the course format, countdown time and buy buttons
  • Close: The final argument for joining the course (to help the readers on the fence make the right decision)

The one element that I didn’t include (but I typically do) is the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) section that answers any additional questions my readers would have about the program (like “when are the times of coaching calls?” and “what if I can’t attend the coaching calls?” and “can I join the program even if…?”).

I decided not to include this section with this specific sales page because I felt like the other sections answered those questions well enough, and I answered those questions in detail in a dedicated FAQ e-mail that I sent out on the last day of my launch.

Writing this sales page was a messy process, and I reorganized and rewrote the sales page during the editing phase a number of times (which I’ll talk about in the editing part of this post).

I didn’t write my elements in this exact order, and I find that with every sales page I write, my process is slightly different.

Therefore, rather than trying to write a sales page in a fixed order, I always allow myself to write different elements of my sales page as they come to me, and then reorder them in the order that makes sense (which will likely be different with every sales page I write).

The key is to have all the key elements included in your sales page, and organize them in the order that makes sense to you.

Ok, let’s dive into the elements and look through them one by one!

NOTE: Since my sales page is wider than this blog post, some sections might prove to be hard to read.

To help you with that, you can download the PDF with my 65-page $111,170 sales page (that you can print out and follow along with as you’re reading this article) here.

Element #1: Headline

Your headline is the very first line on your sales page – it’s typically in big font, with bold letters, and in your face:

The Headline and Subheadline

The headline often also includes the subheadline, which strengthens the headline.

Here’s why I wrote my headlines as I did:

  • I knew that hitting 1,000+ e-mail subscribers was a big dream of my audience (as was “getting their business off the ground”, an expression I’ve seen in my research over and over again
  • In a few of my customer research calls, I got a great reaction to “not worrying about doing everything and just focusing on one thing”, which I worked into the second part of my headline
  • Finally, I knew that my audience wanted to build their e-mail list FAST (and I knew I could deliver on that claim), so I made that idea more specific by talking about months instead of years

With the headline in place, let’s move to the immediate next step of the sales page: the hook.

Element #2: Hook

The Hook

The sole purpose of the first part of your sales page is to “hook” your readers and get them to keep reading.

Ideally, you want your readers to think “oh, that’s interesting – tell me more!” and scroll down your sales page.

That’s why the part right after your headline is called the hook (it can also be called your “lead”).

There’s no right or wrong way to write your hook – there are many different variations of hooks you can use, from personal stories to talking about a specific problem of your audience.

To write my hook, I decided to talk about a journey that I noticed in many online entrepreneurs:

  • They started building an online business
  • They set a goal of getting 1,000 e-mail subscribers
  • They did everything they were supposed to do
  • Unfortunately, they only got a handful of new e-mail subscribers each week 
  • They wondered what they were doing wrong

And I intentionally included a graph of steady e-mail list growth that every entrepreneur desired.

This hook wasn’t particularly “creative”, but based on all the research I did, I knew that this was the exact journey many entrepreneurs went through – so I simply talked about what they were already going through to “hook them” and get their attention. 

Learn more about finding the right hook / lead for your sales page.

Element #3: Twist The Knife

Twisting the Knife

From my hook, I quickly transitioned into “twisting the knife” (I focused on the pain of my audience, and showed them that I understood it).

I did that by talking about all the different problems of my audience I uncovered during research:

  • They were putting in the work, but their e-mail list wasn’t growing
  • They were doing everything they were “supposed to” (blogging, guest posting, going on podcasts), but not getting e-mail subscribers
  • They saw their friends going their businesses, while they felt stuck in the same place frustrated that their business wasn’t growing

As I did that, I talked about the emotions and frustrations they were feeling as this happened to them – I wanted them to feel the pain as they were reading.

Learn more about Twisting the Knife.

Element #4: Common Myths

Next, I told my audience that it wasn’t their fault that their online business wasn’t growing:

Transition to the Common Myths section

And I explained why that is through the “3 myths of the online business world that nobody talks about”:

The Common Myths

In this section, I addressed the strategies my readers typically used to grow their e-mail lists, and broke down why they didn’t work.

I talked about:

  • Why guest posting isn’t necessarily the fastest way to get to 1,000 e-mail subscribers
  • Why you don’t have to spend hours and hours writing blog posts and promoting them
  • Why your business doesn’t have to become your second job if it takes off

For each of the myths I talked about, I did the following.

First, I talked about a counterintuitive myth and explained why the myth exists:

Explanation of the myth

Then I explained why it is in fact a myth (and offered a solution what to do instead):

What to do instead (the truth)

For example, I mentioned that many people consider guest posting to be the “holy grail” of e-mail list growth, but explained why you might struggle with landing guest posts when you’re just starting out, and concluded that guest posting is a better strategy to pursue once you already have some traction and visibility in your niche.

I shared these myths to show my readers that what “they were supposed to be doing” wasn’t necessarily the best approach to growing your e-mail list, and I explained why what they were doing wasn’t getting them the results they wanted.

Element #5: Hope

I begin to hint at a “better solution” and give my readers hope

After I established the myths, I hinted that “there was a better way” of doing things – without focusing on 100 things at the same time – and by doing just ONE thing at a time.

I gave my audience hope that they can grow their e-mail list a lot faster than they’re growing it now, while simplifying their lives and focusing on just one key strategy for growing their e-mail list.

At this point, I didn’t yet share what the solution was – I just hinted that a solution exists.

Element #6: Paint The Dream

Next, I transitioned into Painting The Dream, the opposite of Twisting The Knife.

With Twisting The Knife, I amplified the pain around the problems my audience was facing, and with Painting The Dream, I talked about the dreams my audience had in as much detail as possible.

I painted the dream about “growing your e-mail list to 1,000 subscribers and making your first few sales with your business”.

I talked about what it would feel like to:

  • Grow your e-mail list to 1,000+ e-mail subscribers and get your first few sales with your online business
  • Have your online business grow on it’s own (even when you’re not working on it 24/7)
  • Know exactly what to do to get to 2,000, 5,000, 10,000 e-mail subscribers and beyond

At this point, I made a lot of big promises and claims – so I made sure to back them up screenshots of my own results (and later on added testimonials and quotes from my students to this section):

Finally, I acknowledged that all of the above claims MIGHT sound “too good to be true”, and quickly continued with a few sections that revealed my solution and included undeniable proof that my solution worked.

Element #7: Introduce The Solution

At this point, I:

  • Hooked in my audience through my Hook and Headline
  • Acknowledged their pain through Twisting The Knife
  • Explained that it’s not their fault that they’re feeling the pain through Common Myths
  • Hinted that there’s a solution to their problems and gave my audience Hope
  • Built anticipation about the solution by Painting The Dream

And now, it was time to introduce my solution and prove that it works.

I briefly mentioned that the solution to the problems of my audience was creating Ultimate Guides – which would help them grow their e-mail lists to 1,000+ e-mail subscribers and get their online business off the ground:

Then, I provided different layers of proof to prove that Ultimate Guides really are one of the best ways to grow your e-mail list (and that this strategy will work for my readers).

Element #8: My Story

The first layer of proof was my own story of how I grew my online business through Ultimate Guides – from getting traffic to my website, to growing my e-mail list, to selling my online courses.

I filled this section with screenshots to prove my claims:

Then, I continued to tell my story and worked in elements of Painting The Dream. 

I talked about how building an online business through Ultimate Guides helped me do things like speak at conferences, connect with influential mentors, and get guest post opportunities that would help me continue growing my e-mail list.

Element #9: Expert Examples

With the second layer of proof (Expert Examples), I wanted to show my readers that Ultimate Guides weren’t just a strategy that worked for me – they were a strategy that many top online entrepreneurs used to grow their e-mail lists.

I shared a few examples of experts that my audience was likely familiar with and showed how they grew their online businesses through Ultimate Guides.

Element #10: Relatable Examples

The third layer of proof were examples from new online entrepreneurs that successfully grew their online businesses through Ultimate Guides (from growing their e-mail lists to getting paying consulting and freelance clients).

Initially, I included a few examples from my friends in there, which I later replaced with examples from the students that went through Ultimate Guide System.

This layer showed my readers that Ultimate Guides didn’t just work for me OR for established entrepreneurs – they would also work for them.

Element #11: Data

The final layer of proof was cold hard data that Ultimate Guides got more traffic and shares than regular blog posts, which I pulled from a few credible blog posts online.

At this point, I bombarded my readers with proof from different sources and angles that Ultimate Guides work – and backed up my claims that I made earlier.

To wrap up this section of my sales page, I quickly Painted The Dream again and showed my audience how Ultimate Guides could help them get more e-mail subscribers with less work:

As well as how Ultimate Guides could make everything else in their online business 10x easier:

Element #12: The Danger of Doing it Yourself

At this point, I knew that some of my readers might buy into the idea of Ultimate Guides, but wouldn’t necessarily think that they need help with creating Ultimate Guides.

Why wouldn’t they just create the guides by themselves? Why would they need my help?

To address this, I talked about the danger of writing an Ultimate Guide by yourself.

I talked about all the different places where you could “mess up”, and showed how that would cost you months of work you could never get back.

As an alternative approach, I suggested writing an Ultimate Guide under my guidance – to avoid any mistakes and wasted time, and write Ultimate Guides “the right way” and make sure they would actually help them grow their online business.

Element #13: The Background Story

At this point, I shared my background story of how I learned to create Ultimate Guides, and refined my system for creating them over the past 6 years.

This is where I explained how and why I decided to create Ultimate Guide System, and softly introduced it to my readers.

But before I shifted my attention to my program, there was one final thing I needed to do – address any final concerns of my audience they had about creating Ultimate Guides.

Element #14: Address Concerns

From my research, I knew that my audience would have additional concerns about writing Ultimate Guides, like:

  • “What if I don’t have time to write an Ultimate Guide?”
  • “What if I’m not an expert?”
  • “What if I’m not a writer?”
  • “Will my audience actually read a 50+ page guide?”

I addressed each of these concerns with more proof – my personal stories and stories of my clients and students that were able to successfully grow their online business through Ultimate Guides despite having those concerns.

With this final section I wrapped up the first, more creative part of the sales page, which was designed to show my readers that I can help them grow their online businesses through Ultimate Guides.

Therefore, I transitioned to the second part of the sales page, which was all about the program I was selling, Ultimate Guide System. 

Element #15: Introduce The Offer

First, I briefly introduced the program (this is where I reused some of my Hook, as well as my Positioning) and focused on the Dreams of my audience.

The basic narrative was “I can help you reach your [dreams], even if you have [concerns]”.

Element #16: How it Works

Next, I explained how the program worked (the program format). 

First, on a high level:

And then I broke down element by element, from the course curriculum, live coaching calls, and the community that was a part of the program.

As I did that, I focused on the benefits of my program, rather than the features. 

As you can notice from my headlines, I didn’t talk about what the program included (“a community”) – I talked about how the features from my program would help my audience (“get feedback on your guide and answers to your questions”).

As I did that, I backed up each section with screenshots and testimonials to show what the program was like, and provided constant proof of how helpful the program was.

Element #17: What You’ll Learn

Next, I went over the curriculum of the program, where I talked about what we would cover during each week of the program.

Again, I focused heavily on the benefits of what we’ll cover each week (“What you should worry about and what you should NOT worry about when designing your guide (so you can design it quickly and move on to publishing it, rather than spend weeks or months on it”).

Element #18: Is This Program Right For You?

With this section of the sales page, I wanted to make sure the RIGHT people joined my program (that I would love working with, and that I knew would get results with my program).

In the “program IS right for you” section, I listed all the different types of entrepreneurs I could help: 

And in the “program IS NOT right for you” section, I listed all the types of entrepreneurs I couldn’t help (entrepreneurs without business ideas), and entrepreneurs I didn’t enjoy working with (chronic procrastinators).

This would help me filter out the entrepreneurs that were a bad fit for the program, and keep the entrepreneurs that were a good fit for it.

At this point, I could also include a FAQ section where I would answer additional questions like “when do the live coaching calls take place?” and “what if I can’t make the live calls?”, but since I sent out a detailed FAQ e-mail that addressed those questions on the last day of my product launch, I felt like that wasn’t necessary.

Element #19: Money-Back Guarantee

I backed up the program with a 120-day Money Back Guarantee, as I knew that if my students went through the whole program, they would get the results from it that they wanted.

I made the guarantee window wide enough to give my students plenty of time to work through the program.

I chose to opt-in for an “action taker guarantee” (a guarantee where you are eligible for a refund only if you put in the work) because I knew that the program was intensive, and I only wanted to have serious people in the program:

While I might be able to earn more money if I had a “no questions asked guarantee”, I know I would also get a lot of less serious people in the program that would just “take a peek” and wouldn’t be willing to do the work.

Because it’s against my values to sell a program that people don’t execute on, I decided against that, and decided to only focus on acton takers.

Element #20: Buy Buttons

In this section, I briefly summarized what my students would get access to if they joined the program:

I included the “buy buttons”, including a payment plan for the program and added a reminder and a countdown timer to let my readers know when enrolment to the program closed (so they wouldn’t miss it).

Element #21: Close

The final section of my sales page that I wrote was called the “close”.

At this point, I knew that my readers either:

  • Joined the program
  • Closed the sales page
  • Were on the fence of joining

Therefore, the focus of my “close” was to help the students that were on the fence of joining make the right decision.

In the first part of the close, I reiterated on Twisting The Knife and Painting The Dream:

I touched on the guarantee:

And as one final weapon in my arsenal, I shared what my students said when I asked them what they would say to someone considering joining the program.

That’s where I shared one final round of raving testimonials about the program:

And let my students decide if they wanted to join or not for themselves.

Finally, I included the buy buttons, offer summary and a countdown timer again:

And finished the sales page.

Woah, that was A LOT, right? 

Yes – it was, and we still have two steps to go. 

Writing a sales page for a $997-$1,997 online program is quite a beast, but if you write it one step at a time, it’s definitely manageable.

With this sales page, I included most of the key elements of every high-converting sales page (apart from the FAQ section, which I sent via e-mail), and you’ll find many of these elements in any great sales page you choose to analyze.

You might notice that these elements will be in a different order to make the sales page flow better, that the elements (like Painting The Dream) might repeat themselves multiple times throughout the same page, but the types of elements will likely stay the same.

You’ll be use these same elements to write your own high-converting sales page (more on that later, at the bottom of this article – right now, we have two steps to go!).

Step #7: Editing

When I first wrote my sales page, it was a lot messier than it is now.

As you can imagine, organizing 21 different sections of a sales page into an order that makes sense can be quite a (headache-inducing) project.

After writing my sales page, I took a few days to edit it, reorder it, and asked a few of my entrepreneurial friends to help me review it and organize it in an order that made sense.

As I was editing my sales page, I focused on 3 key rounds of the editing process:

  • Flow
  • Clarity
  • Proof

With each of these rounds, I went through the whole sales page, marked the sections I needed to edit, and edited them to take my sales page from a “shitty first draft” to a finished page.

Round #1: Flow

First, I decided to edit for flow – I tried to order my sections 1-14 (the first part of my sales page) in an order that made sense, based on the stories I included in my sales page.

This meant playing around with different types of Hooks, leading with Twisting The Knife vs Painting The Dream, figuring out where to fit the Myths and My Story… until I found an order that made sense to me.

To find that order, I read through the sales page, and whenever I noticed myself stop or lose myself, I checked if the flow was good or not – then I reordered the sales page into a different order and tried again.

It took a while to nail the exact order, but once it was there, I felt it – and I was able to move on to the next round of editing.

Round #2: Clarity

With the second round of my editing process, I mostly focused on making my sales page clear and easy to understand, to keep the attention of my readers.

My #1 goal was to edit any confusing places that would lose my readers.

I did that by reading through the sales page myself, as well as asking my friends to read through it and paying attention to parts where their reading slowed down (this way, I knew that a section was confusing).

Then, I rewrote and simplified those sections, and tried again.

Round #3: Proof

Finally, I read through my sales page and added in any missing proof.

I specifically focused on finding any “unbelievable claims”. If I made a claim (like “an Ultimate Guide will help you get more coaching clients”,), I backed it up with my own story or example or a story from one of my clients.

Then, I added specific screenshots, data or testimonials to make my claims more believable and stronger.

Throughout my editing process, I didn’t really focus on grammar or rewriting paragraphs UNLESS they were confusing.

If I tried to edit every word of this massive 65-page sales page, I could spend weeks editing it, with questionable returns on the invested time – so I decided to keep things simple and edit parts that mattered most.

After the editing, I was done with my first version of the sales page, and used it in my first product launch to generate $36,381 with my first launch of Ultimate Guide System.

Step #8: Polishing

After each cohort of students I took through the program and before I launched my program the next time, I spent some time polishing my sales page.

As you already know, I increased the price point of the program with the first few launches (from $997 to $1497 to $1997) until I found a price point I was happy with.

As I did that, I changed the offer of the program slightly (for example, I added additional templates, alumni calls and masterclasses to the program).

I also added in any new testimonials that I got from students and made some minor edits to flow, proof and clarity with a fresh set of eyes.

And that’s how I wrote my $111,170 sales page.

So how can you write yours?

How to Write YOUR High-Converting Sales Page With The “Perfect Sales Page” Templates

To help you write your own high-converting sales page, I created two “plug and play” templates for you:

  • The Essential Sales Page Template, which you can use to create a sales page for $47-$297 e-books or online courses
  • The Epic Sales Page Template, which you can use to create a sales page for your $997-$1997+ flagship programs

You can download those templates (PLUS a PDF version of this article AND my full $111,170 sales page) through the box below!

Advanced List-Building Strategies: How to Scale Beyond 10,000-20,000 Subscribers

By Primoz Bozic 2 Comments

You’re currently reading Chapter 16 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

How can you scale your e-mail list BEYOND 10,000 e-mail subscribers? What about 20,000? Or 40,000?

Sooner or later in your list-building journey, you’ll hit a plateau where your e-mail list growth will stall. Sure, your e-mail list will still grow steadily, but it won’t grow exponentially any more.

At that point, you’ll wonder “what can I do differently to grow my e-mail list 2x, 5x or 10x as fast?” and “how can I go from 10, 20 or 30 e-mail subscribers per day to 50, 100, or 150?”.

That’s exactly what we’ll cover in this post.

The good news is that if you already have 5,000 or 10,000 e-mail subscribers, you’re already doing A LOT of things right:

  • You’ve found your Profitable Online Business Idea
  • You have one or more Epic Lead Magnets
  • You’re consistently creating Remarkable Content

And your e-mail list is growing by tens of e-mail subscribers.

Nice job, give yourself a pat on the back! You’ve already made it further than 99% of online entrepreneurs.

How to Break Your List-Building Plateau

You can’t really know WHEN you’ll hit a plateau with growing your e-mail list, but one day, it will come.

Perhaps a strategy that used to work will suddenly stop working over-night. This is exactly what happened to Karen Dudek-Brannan:

“For 5 months, I created content on my blog, and hustled in Facebook groups to promote it. That got me to 2,000 subscribers. Then, one day, it stopped working. The Facebook groups got less and less engagement and other people started promoting their content as well, and I wasn’t getting the same results any more.”

Or, you’ll be in luck, and your core strategy WILL keep working well beyond 10,000 e-mail subscribers (Luke McIntosh from Become a Bassist successfully grew his e-mail list through 77 YouTube videos to over 25,000 e-mail subscribers). But even then, you’ll eventually hit a ceiling of results you can get with the time you have on your hands.

At that point, you’ll know you need to change something, as just “creating more content” won’t do the trick any more. You’ll have to go back to the drawing board and create new ways to grow your e-mail list.

WARNING: Don’t go and look for advanced list-building strategies UNTIL you hit a plateau. Instead, focus on “squeezing the lemon” out of the strategies that are working well, BEFORE moving on to other strategies. Keep doing more of what works and putting in the work – who knows, you current strategy might help you get to over 20,000 e-mail subscribers.

Ok, back to breaking the plateau.

Surprisingly enough (or not), the solution to your problem isn’t throwing money at the problem through Facebook Ads, or learning about advanced e-mail list segmenting. Those strategies might have the time and place in your online business, but they’re not the most efficient ways to continue growing your e-mail list an effective way.

Instead, the solution tends to be much simpler.

The Layering Strategy: The Simplest Way to Exponentially Grow Your E-mail List

The answer to exponentially growing your e-mail list is surprisingly simple.

Once you hit a Growth Plateau with your current list-building strategy, layer new strategies on top of existing ones.

Let’s look at a few different real-life examples of entrepreneurs that did just that to grow their e-mail lists beyond 10,000 e-mail subscribers.

This is how Karen Dudek-Brannan grew her e-mail list to over 14,000 e-mail subscribers:

“I focused on layering one thing at a time, and having one paid and one free strategy that is working at all times. Now I get about 50 new e-mail subscribers a day, and a total of 14k subscribers.

I’ll take courses about new strategies, try to look for a specific person that’s good at it, and take their course. I got Melissa Griffin’s Pinterest course, binge-watched the course for a few weeks, spent 3-4 weeks of doing little stuff, 4-6 weeks watching the course and setting everything up.

Then I was in the routine of implementing the strategies. “You need to spend this much time per week, pin this much, and use these apps”. Pin at least 30 things/day, use tailwind – schedule a lot of stuff out, batch it – 2-3 hours every couple of weeks, pins, keywords, figure out how to drive traffic to your posts, during the big batch, just pin stuff. Try a bunch of different things. See what works.

I implement one strategy at a time, and the more strategies I have working, the less risk I have. The more things I have over time, the less fear I have.”

Karen has successfully added layers like Facebook Ads, Pinterest, and now Instagram to her first layer of creating blog posts and sharing them in Facebook groups.

Next, let’s look at how Nagina Abdullah from Masala Body grew her e-mail list to over 16,000 e-mail subscribers (she cleaned her e-mail list multiple times in the process):

“When I started out, I just focused on guest posting, and grew my e-mail list to 5k subscribers. It took me 2 years of heavy guest posting to get there. Other things came out of guest posting: ideas for programs, relationships with people.

Then, I added on a layer of publicity to get extra credibility, got a FOX news interview, pitched a lot to media, a lot of business insider articles, a huffington post feature, I focused a lot on pitching.

I later layered on 6 additional strategies (Social Media, Facebook ads, Podcasts, Summits, Partnerships and SEO) which all helped me keep growing my e-mail list, and I currently focus on the last 4 strategies.”

Nagina followed a very similar approach to Karen – she created 8 different layers of list growth to continue growing her e-mail list through different channels – one at a time:

“I always learned from someone (for partnerships, I joined the partnership accelerator), and in 4 weeks, I learned all the methods (examples of partnerships, templates to pitch), got up to speed, then hired someone to do it for me.”

Finally, when I asked Christina Rebuffet from Speak English With Christina what her biggest “inflection point” in her list growth was, she said:

“It was definitely SEO. I learned about SEO, optimized my videos and blog posts, and hired an SEO manager. Since last summer, we’ve added 10k people to our e-mail list”

Take a look at any online entrepreneur with an e-mail list of 20,000, 50,000 or even 100,000+ e-mail subscribers, and you’ll find that they have one thing in common: They all have layers of list-building strategies that keep bringing new e-mail subscribers their way day after day.

Learn, Master, Systematize, Delegate

If you’ve read this far, you’re probably thinking “that’s great, but I couldn’t possibly create all the content I’m already creating, keep my business running, AND add new list-building strategies to my business. There’s just too few hours in my day!

And you’d be right.

That’s why, to make all the time and space for mastering new strategies, you need to decrease the amount of time and energy you spend on your existing strategies.

The best way to do that is by bringing on new people to your team that can support you in content creation and list-building.

For example, this is how Nagina Abdullah streamlined her list-building efforts through Podcast interviews:

“After I learned about podcasting, I created a system, and reached out to 5 podcasts/week. I later hired a virtual assistant to pitch podcasts regularly, after I did it myself for several months to see if it’s worth it. I choose one strategy at a time, get really good at it, systematize it, and hire someone else to do it for me. That way I built a system that I can manage over time.”

Once you’ve mastered a new list-building strategy that keeps bringing new e-mail subscribers to your business week after week, you can bring on team members to help you with parts of (or the whole) strategy.

The most common hires are:

  • A Virtual Assistant: To help you with things like formatting blog posts, importing them into WordPress, editing / uploading YouTube videos, organizing customer research, and pitching podcasts, guest posts or partnerships
  • A Copywriter / Copy Editor: To help you create remarkable blog posts, Ultimate Guides, lead magnets, and eventually even write sales pages and sales funnels.
  • SEO Manager: To help you with SEO research and optimization for your blog posts or YouTube videos
  • Facebook Ads Manager: To help you with paid advertising

You’ll likely want to start with a Virtual Assistant to help you take over some of the easier tasks, and later on delegate the work you don’t particularly enjoy doing that’s harder to delegate (like creating blog posts).

As you implement the Layering Strategy, you’ll typically follow the following steps:

  • Learn & Master: Take 3-6 months to learn and master a new list-building strategy (joining online courses or hiring coaches to speed up your progress helps tremendously), and get it to the point where it’s consistently bringing high-quality e-mail subscribers to your business
  • Systematize: Create a system you can execute that helps you repeatedly grow your e-mail list (like pitching 5 podcasts a week with a set of proven scripts)
  • Outsource & Delegate: Then, once you want to add a new layer of list-growth to your online business (or have money to spare for hiring), you can outsource or delegate your system to a contractor or a team member

You can go through the above steps over and over again, and scale your e-mail list well beyond 10,000 or 20,000 e-mail subscribers by adding a layer upon layer to your list-building efforts.

A Word on Cleaning Your E-mail List

Finally, let’s touch on a subject that you’ll need to learn about as you build your e-mail list to tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers: cleaning your e-mail list.

Over time, it’s natural that less and less e-mail subscribers will open your e-mails, click through them, and buy your products or services.

These are typically called “cold subscribers”, and are defined by e-mail subscribers that don’t open any of your e-mails over a set period (typically the last 90 days).

These “cold subscribers” lost interest in what you had to say or moved on to different things in their lives, and likely won’t buy any products or services from you in the future.

After a while, they’ll become “dead weight” that you’ll pay hundreds of dollars for every month (maintaining an e-mail list of 20,000+ people can be expensive), and it might make sense to “purge” them from your e-mail list.

This is a painful process, especially emotionally (as Vickie Gould said when we had a conversation about this topic):

“Cleaning up the list feels like stabbing you in the heart. But if people aren’t opening your e-mai list and don’t want to hear from you, then remove them”.

But like Danny Margulies said, going through the pain is worth it:

“I had an e-mail list of 40k subscribers, and cleaned it to 20k. It was heart-braking but it saved me over $1k/year in fees, the open rates of my e-mails are higher, and the deliverability is better”

When your e-mail open rates start dropping way below where you want them to be (for example, you used to get 30-35% open rates, and they drop to 15-20%), it’s time to clean up your list.

To learn how to do that, you can read the detailed tutorials from your e-mail providers (here’s an example from ConvertKit).

It hurts to clean your e-mail list and it might feel like taking a step back, but you’ll soon see that it’s much better to have an e-mail list that’s actually interested in hearing from you, than to keep the people who aren’t.

Summary: How to Scale Your E-mail List Beyond 10,000 E-mail Subscribers

As we discussed in this post, scaling your e-mail list beyond 10,000 e-mail subscribers is surprisingly simple:

  • Use the Layering Strategy to add new list-building strategies to your online business
  • Learn, Master, Systematize and Delegate existing strategies to create time and space for adding new strategies to your business

That’s all really need to know (on a high level) to continue growing your e-mail list to tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers.

Congratulations! You’ve made it to the FINAL chapter of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List!

Congratulations!

You’ve made it to the very end of this 440+ page guide :).

I hope you enjoyed reading it just as much as I enjoyed writing it, and that it will help you grow your e­mail list by thousands of new e­mail subscribers.
It’s been one hell of a journey, that’s for sure!

Now if you enjoyed reading the guide, I’d like to ask you for a quick favor.
I know a lot of entrepreneurs struggle with growing their e­mail list, and I’d really like this guide to reach as many of them as possible.

If you enjoyed the guide, I’d love for you to share this link to the guide with your entrepreneurial friends:

https://primozbozic.com/list­-building-­guide/

You can e­mail it to your friends, send them a Facebook message about it, share it through your Twitter, LinkedIn or Facebook, or share it in online communities you’re part of.

It would mean the world to me to spread the word about this guide and reach as many people as possible.

And if you REALLY enjoyed the guide and wanted to let me know about it, please do leave a comment here. I read all the comments.

Thank you in advance ­- you rock.

Until next guide,

-Primoz

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit

A Step-by-Step Guide to Creating a Content Strategy for Your Online Business

By Primoz Bozic Leave a Comment

You’re currently reading Chapter 15 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

As an online entrepreneur, you know you need to consistently create remarkable content to get more traffic, e-mail subscribers, and customers for your online business.

What you might not know is:

  • Which pieces of content you should create first
  • How often you should create and publish your content
  • How much time you should spend “engaging” your audience, how much time you should spend growing it, and how much time you should spend selling

That’s exactly what you’ll learn in this step-by-step guide to creating a content strategy for your online business.

What is a Content Strategy and why do you need one?

Your Content Strategy is a strategic plan for creating new content for your online business.

It typically includes:

  • WHAT you’ll be creating content about (from lead magnets to blog posts to blog post series)
  • WHEN we’ll be creating the content (a rough or fixed timeline)
  • WHY we’ll be creating it (how it helps our business)

A clear Content Strategy will help you:

  • Get more clear on what content to create and when to create it
  • Create content with your business strategy in mind
  • Build SEO on your website and grow your audience
  • Strategically launch new online programs
  • Work with a team more easily
  • Keep your audience engaged
  • Balance growth, engagement and launching

The final Content Strategy can take shape in the form of an Editorial Calendar or Content Calendar, which I’ll also show you how to create at the end of this guide.

When should you create your Content Strategy?

When you’re just starting out with creating remarkable content and you only have a few hundred e-mail subscribers, you don’t really need a clearly-defined Content Strategy.

In fact, when your focus is learning how to create remarkable content (and how to do it consistently), creating a clear Content Strategy can be counter-productive (as it can lead to too much thinking and planning, and too little creating).

Most established entrepreneurs didn’t start out by having a clear content strategy. They just created content that their audience wanted.

For example, this is how Sam Gavis-Hughson from Byte by Byte started growing his e-mail list (that’s now at 10,000+ e-mail subscribers):

“I wasn’t very strategic with it. I just created a TON of content that people actually WANTED.”

Geraldine Lepere from Comme un Francaise said a similar thing:

“I had no content strategy for YouTube – I just recorded videos I wanted to see. I created new videos every week consistently for 7 weeks. The consistency is very important for my audience.”

Once you know how to create remarkable content and how to do it consistently (you’ve been publishing content consistently for a few months), then it makes sense to become more strategic with the content you publish.

At that point, you’ll notice that publishing “random”, unrelated content isn’t the best way to grow your business, and you’ll want to have a clearer idea of what exactly to publish when.

And when you start developing launching online programs, you’ll need to learn how to balance growing your audience with engaging it and launching your products and services – a new challenge you didn’t face before.

And that is when you know you need to develop a clearer content strategy for your business.

A High-Level Overview of Your Content Strategy

Before we go through the exact steps that will help you create your Content Strategy, let’s first look at it at a high level.

At a high level, your Content Strategy will help you:

  • Fill in the Content Gaps and attract new audiences to your business (as well as solve new Problems Worth Solving for your existing audience)
  • Turn your website into a “wikipedia page” for your audience where they can learn everything they need to know about the topic you’re teaching them
  • Smoothly transition from growing your audience to engaging them and offering your products and services to them

Your Content Strategy will also help you turn your website into an “online textbook” for your audience – the go-to place to find help with your topic of expertise.

When you have a clear Content Strategy, growing your online business becomes as easy as “putting in the work”, and you no longer need to worry about “what to do next”. You can just put your head down and execute.

To create your Content Strategy, you need to:

  • Know where the Content Gaps in your industry / website are (so you can strategically fill them)
  • Understand the differences between Engagement, Growth and Launch Content (and which type of content to create when)
  • Have the right tools to create a clear Content Strategy (Content Seasons, Content Stacking and Content Calendar)

Once you’re familiar with all of those, creating your Content Strategy becomes a piece of cake.

So let’s look at each of those in detail!

Content Matrix: How to Find (and Fill) Content Gaps

The foundation of your Content Strategy should always be Content Gaps, which are based on Problems Worth Solving of your audience.

As a quick reminder, Content Gaps are Problems Worth Solving that your audience has, that nobody is solving well for them.

That’s where you, as an online entrepreneur, step in, fill those gaps, and attract avid readers and customers to your website (through both free content like blog posts and paid content like online courses).

For example, if you notice a lot of men ask you questions how to buy a great leather jacket each fall, and a quick Google search reveals there’s no remarkable content on that topic yet, you might want to write The Ultimate Guide to Buying a Leather Jacket.

That’s exactly what Peter Nguyen from The Essential Man did to successfully find (and fill) a Content Gap, and attract 1,000+ e-mail subscribers to his website in under 30 days.

You can fill the Content Gaps you discovered during the customer research phase of coming up with your Remarkable Content Ideas and while Finding Problems Worth Solving with paid and free content:

  • Your Free Remarkable Content (blog posts, YouTube videos, epic lead magnets, etc.) will help you attract more potential customers to your business
  • Your Paid Content (online courses, coaching services, workshops, e-books…) will help you turn your e-mail subscribers into paying customers

To help you visualize what filling the Content Gaps looks like in action, I analyzed the paid content strategy of Renaissance Periodization, a multi-million dollar company that sells online coaching and e-books about science-based weight loss and sports performance.

The reason why I share their example (even though it only includes paid content) is because I think they do such a great job of filling the gaps in the market.

In the Content Matrix below, I organized their e-books by Content Themes (nutrition, training, cooking, and other), and specific Problems Worth Solving:

You’ll notice that for every common Problem Worth Solving of their audience, they created a paid e-book that they sell to their audience.

Initially, they offered a few foundational products:

  • The Renaissance Diet: This is an e-book about “scientific approach to losing fat and building muscle”, something that a lot of people in their audience want help with
  • Scientific Principles of Strength Training: This is an e-book about the “scientific approach to strength training”. Similar to the diet e-book, but about training, not nutrition.
  • The Renaissance Kitchen: This is a cookbook with recipes that fit into “The Renaissance Diet”

Later on, they also started selling additional products about smaller, more subtle problems:

  • Recovering From Training: That’s an e-book about the science of recovery
  • How Much Should I Train: What science says about frequency of training
  • Big Flavor, Zero Fat: How to cook flavourful meals that fit within the Renaissance Diet, but don’t include any fat

This is only a fraction of their product suite (they also offer coaching services, “diet templates”, specific diet plans for Vegans, endurance athletes, etc.), and they do a really phenomenal job of filling gaps in the market that each address a Problem Worth Solving that nobody is solving well.

Let’s look at another example of a Content Matrix by analyzing some of the free content from Danny Margulies from Freelance to Win:

You’ll see that Danny’s content falls into a couple of main Content Themes (freelancing, upwork, copywriting, and “random” articles), and that he writes dedicated articles about different Problems Worth Solving.

You can use the Content Matrix to begin outlining your Content Strategy, or to analyze the Content Strategy of any online entrepreneur or company our there. Simply go through 5-10 pages of their recent content, organize their content into different themes, and voila, you’ll see exactly how they’re finning the Content Gaps in their industry.

You can create your own Content Matrix through 3 simple steps:

  • Step #1: Identify Problems Worth Solving and Content Gaps in your industry
  • Step #2: Organize these into Content Themes (different columns in the matrix)
  • Step #3: For each of the Problems Worth Solving / Content Gaps, create a piece of free (or paid) content

If you’ve gone through my guide on creating Remarkable Content, you already have two thirds of this matrix made (you went over steps 1 & 2 in the Sticky Idea Matrix exercise).

The final step simply comes down to creating a dedicated piece of content to solve the Problems Worth Solving (that’s how you fill the gaps).

When you’re creating your Content Matrix, don’t worry too much about when you should publish your content, in which order you should publish it, or if you should charge for it vs. give it away for free.

We’ll cover all of these shortly as we flesh out your full Content Strategy.

The 3 Types of Content You Need in Your Content Strategy

To begin fleshing out your Content Strategy, let’s first make a clear distinction between 3 different types of content:

  • Growth Content: Content that helps us get more readers and customers
  • Engagement Content: Content that helps us build trust with our readers and keep them engaged
  • Launch Content: Content that helps us launch new products and services

It’s important to make a distinction between these 3 types of content because each of these types of content helps us work towards a different objective in our business.

If we create the wrong content for the objective we want to achieve, we’ll likely end up disappointed.

A great example is a common mistake I see among many online entrepreneurs. They spend a lot of time creating Engagement Content rather than Growth Content, and their e-mail list naturally doesn’t grow, because they aren’t attracting any new readers (we talked about this when we talked about the biggest mistakes that prevent entrepreneurs from getting 1,000+ e-mail subscribers).

By understanding the subtle differences between these 3 Content Types and how to use each of them to strategically grow your online business, you’ll be able to become a lot more strategic with the content you publish.

Growth Content

Growth Content is arguably the most important type of content in your business (besides Launch Content). When we talk about creating Remarkable Content to grow your e-mail list, we’re typically talking about Growth Content.

Growth Content helps you grow your audience, get a fresh flood of new buyers to your online business, and build your SEO (it’s often SEO-optimized, so that potential readers can find it through Google).

The formula for creating Growth Content is fairly simple: Create Content that solves Problems Worth Solving.

Growth Content can include lead magnets, blog posts, YouTube videos, blog post series and Ultimate Guides – all the different types of free content that you publish on your blog to attract more readers over time.

When you’re creating Growth Content, it’s crucial that you always create a piece of content around a Problem Worth Solving (otherwise, you’re typically creating Engagement Content).

Here are some examples of Growth Content ideas, together with Problems Worth Solving (in brackets):

  • The Ultimate Guide to Buying a Leather Jacket (how to buy a leather jacket)
  • The History of Gin & Tonic (gin tonic history)
  • 5 Steps to Writing Your First Song (how to write a song)
  • The Complete Guide to Launching Your First Online Course (how to launch an online course)
  • How to Make Perfect Pasta From Scratch (how to make pasta)

Notice there’s very little “thought leadership” involved – most Growth Content simply answers a question your audience already has.

Engagement Content

Engagement Content is content that helps you build trust with your readers and keep them “engaged” so you stay “top of mind” as a go-to expert on the topic you teach.

Engagement Content is less important than Growth & Launch content for your business, and it’s a lot less important than most people think (though there are a handful of situations when creating it makes sense).

The Engagement Content typically doesn’t solve a core Problem Worth Solving of our audience, or fills a Content Gap, and therefore typically doesn’t do much for our website traffic / SEO in the long run.

Instead, Engagement Content involves more “thought leadership” and sharing views and opinions we want to share, stories from our personal life so our readers get to know us better, etc.

It’s usually more fun and light content, and easier to consume. It’s great for mixing things up, having fun while writing, and sharing your personality (and sometimes doing Customer Research).

Most of your Engagement Content will either be Engagement E-mails or Blog Posts (many of the Engagement E-mails you send will not get published on your website).

Here are some examples of Engagement Content:

  • “LOL at this avocado toast advice from a millionaire”
  • “3 of my favorite fashion trends this fall”
  • “It’s official – she’s pregnant and I’m gonna be a dad”
  • “Why I love butter”
  • “The 3 TV shows I absolutely HATE (but everyone else loves)”

Notice how none of this content is about a specific Problem Worth Solving – it’s really more about sharing opinions, life updates, and your personality.

Perhaps the most useful aspect of creating Engagement Content is using it for customer research purposes.

For example, if you wrote an article or an e-mail to your e-mail subscribers about your biggest YouTube pet peeves (probably not something that will help you grow your business), you could ask your readers what their pet peeves are, take notes, use the data to improve your own videos in the future, and indirectly grow your online business through this type of content.

Launch Content

The final type of Content you’ll use in your business is Launch Content (content that helps you launch new products and services).

Launch Content is very important for bringing in revenue to your business (you can’t run a business if you don’t sell your products and services), and usually takes form of sales e-mails, sales funnels, and sales pages.

Launch Content CAN include some Engagement Content or Growth Content as well, especially in the e-mails and blog posts leading up to a product launch.

Here are some examples of Launch Content:

  • Introducing The Essential Wardrobe (sales page)
  • “Is Write More Every Day right for me?” (sales email)
  • “3 secrets to making perfect pizza dough every time” (engagement email leading up to a launch)

While this type of content typically won’t help you grow your e-mail list, it’s important that we cover it here because it does fit into the Content Strategy puzzle.

The Blurred Lines Between Content Types

In theory, we have just 3 different Content Types, and in an ideal world, you’d create Growth Content when you want to grow your audience, Engagement Content when you want to engage with your readers, and Launch Content when you want to sell a product or a service.

In reality, things are a little more complicated:

  • Launch Content can serve as Growth Content and Engagement Content: For example, if you wrote an Ultimate Guide to Songwriting and used it in the beginning of your product launch, you’d be able to attract new readers and engage existing readers
  • Growth Content can serve as Engagement Content: Every piece of growth content you create with the intention to grow your audience will typically engage your existing readers as well
  • Pure Engagement Content usually doesn’t serve as Growth Content or Launch Content: If you had this random idea to write an article about why you love butter, that article probably won’t help you grow your e-mail list or launch a new product or a service  

Now you can see why Engagement Content is the least valuable to your online business – because it does little more for your business than “engages” your audience, or serves as a way to collect customer research.

Multipurpose Content

Because of these blurred lines, you should try to create content that serves more than one purpose as often as you can. I call this type of content Multipurpose Content.

For example, you should focus on creating Growth Content that always doubles as Engagement Content (rather than creating pure Engagement Content).

A guide on “How to Buy a Leather Jacket” will engage your audience just as well as “my 3 favorite fashion trends this fall”, and likely do a lot more for the growth of your online business in the long run.

And when you’re writing the “engagement” part of a sales sequence (the part before you open the cart and send out sales e-mails), create Launch Content content that will also serve as Growth Content.

Don’t just write a few “engagement e-mails” that only your e-mail subscribers ever see – instead, create Growth Content that you can tie into the launch sequence, to both attract new readers and add value to existing ones.

You should only use Engagement Content sparingly when…

  • You need it for customer research
  • You really feel like writing something fun
  • You’re bored of talking about your expertise


As a benchmark, you should spend 80-90% of your time creating Growth / Launch Content, and only 10-20% of your time on Engagement Content.

Debunking the myth of “audience engagement”

At this point, it makes sense to address a common myth of “audience engagement”. There’s a big myth in the industry that you should e-mail your audience and send them new content every 1-2 weeks to keep them “engaged”.

From my experience, you don’t really need to do that. For example, I’ve had times in my business when I didn’t e-mail my list for more than a month because I was working on other parts of my business behind the scenes, and nothing really changed (my e-mail open rates, click-through rates and sales essentially stayed the same).

In other worlds, the world won’t end if you don’t e-mail your audience every SINGLE week, and your audience won’t hate you or forget about you overnight.

Now of course, this CAN become an issue in two cases.

The first case is if you’re REALLY inconsistent with content creation (and have times when you create a few blog posts, then disappear for months at a time). In that case, the lack of consistency will not just disappoint your readers, it also won’t help you bring many new readers to your website.

The second case is if you only e-mail your audience when you have something to sell to them (only sending Launch Content without any Growth Content or Engagement Content). In that case, your readers will sooner or later get bored of a sales pitch after sales pitch and stop opening your e-mails or unsubscribe from your e-mail list.

But in general, your readers will care a lot more about getting quality advice or interesting content from you regularly than to hear from you every single day or week.

For example, no-one will hate you if you spend a few weeks writing an Ultimate Guide for your readers about a major Problem Worth Solving. The opposite – they’ll be excited when you do share it with them, and they’ll understand it took you longer to create than a typical piece of content.

Great content takes time to create, and if you focus on e-mailing your readers all the time, you might rush content creation (or create content that’s not as remarkable as it could be), and hurt yourself more in the long run than help yourself.

You also shouldn’t worry about sending “engagement e-mails” during the times when you’re working on a big project (or taking a vacation) – instead, focus on the things you ARE working on in the moment to avoid slowing down your progress.

Think about it. With the experts from different industries you follow, do you spend time thinking each day why they aren’t e-mailing you? Probably not, but you’re happy when you do receive an e-mail from them.

Content Schedule: How often should you publish new content?

So if you shouldn’t worry about sending e-mails or creating new content for your audience every single week, how often SHOULD you publish new content?

Unfortunately, there’s no one definitive answer to this question, though there are guidelines you can follow that can help you find a Content Schedule that works for you.

  • How many e-mail subscribers do you currently have? If you have less than 1,000 e-mail subscribers, your main focus should be creating as much Growth Content as you can, and you shouldn’t worry about Engagement Content at all (there’s not enough people to “engage)
  • Do you run your online business full-time or on the side? The more time you have for your online business each week, the more content you can create. You might be able to publish a remarkable piece of content 2-4x/month if you run your business full time, while you might only publish new content 1-2x/month if you run your business on the side.
  • Do you have a team to support you with content creation? If you have a team to help you create or edit content, you’ll be able to create more content in less time (that’s how 7-8 figure entrepreneurs create so much content – they have a team of copywriters creating content FOR them).
  • Are you currently launching a product or a service? During your product launches, you’ll typically e-mail your audience 3-5 times a week (a lot more frequently than when you’re not launching anything)
  • Is your priority to grow your e-mail list right now? If yes, you should publish as much content as you can humanly create. The more content you create, the more your e-mail list will grow.
  • How long does it take you to create content? If you’re writing 2,000-3,000 word blog posts, you might be able to publish up to 1-2 a week. If you’re writing 10,000-20,000 word guides, you’ll likely be able to publish 1-2/month. The more time you spend researching / editing your content, the less you’ll be able to create.
  • What kind of content do your readers love most? If your readers love quick and easy to digest content, you’ll create more content in shorter periods of time. If your readers love in-depth, thorough, well-researched content, your content will take you longer to create.
  • Are you running a blog or a YouTube channel? Consistently publishing a piece of content every WEEK seems to be crucial for YouTube list-building, while it’s not as important for blogging.
  • How much time do you spend promoting your content? If promoting your content comes easy for you / works well, you’ll spend less time creating it. If you hate content promotion, you’ll spend more time creating content instead.

As you can see, there are A LOT of factors that come into play when it comes to figuring out your ideal publishing schedule.

For a part-time entrepreneur that writes really long, detailed guides, publishing one guide a month will work great – while a full-time entrepreneur with a copywriter might want to publish one remarkable piece of content every week.

Instead of trying to fit into a mold, create a Content Schedule that works for you. Create a schedule that:

  • Stretches You: You shouldn’t feel like you’re slacking or coasting with content creation
  • You Can Keep Up With: 80% of the time, you should be able to create all the content you want to create in a week
  • You Can Get Ahead Of: Through intense periods of content creation, you should be able to get ahead of your schedule, so you can create content weeks (or months) in advance for times when you’re developing products or taking time off from your business

For example, if you have roughly 10 hours a week available for content creation (that’s roughly 2-3 days), and each piece of content takes you 5-10 hours to create, that means that:

  • You’ll need to put in the work regularly (otherwise you’ll break the consistency)
  • You’ll be able to keep up with your content schedule on most weeks
  • On some weeks, you’ll be able to create more content than planned and get ahead with content creation

I recommend trying out a Content Schedule that you THINK will work for you, giving it a shot for a month, and then tweaking it.

If it’s too hard for you to keep up with it, change it to a less frequent schedule. If it seems to be too easy to keep up with it, change it to a more frequent schedule.

Ideally, you’ll be able to create a backlog of 1-2 months of content in advance (to plan for time off and product development), and THEN take the pedal off the metal and spend less time on content creation.

To help you with finding the frequency that works for you, here are a few additional guidelines you can keep in mind:

  • Create the MOST content you can create: More content is always better (as long as you keep the quality high).
  • Stay top of mind: Rather than “engaging” your audience, focus on staying “top of mind” for them. Publishing an incredible piece of content 1x/month will definitely help you do that.
  • Quality over quantity: You should never sacrifice quality for quantity (or rush a piece of content just to get it done on a certain day). Always make remarkable content first, THEN focus on creating MORE of it.
  • Don’t get lost in small details: Don’t worry about sending out your content at a “perfect time” or “perfect day” until you have thousands of e-mail subscribers. These small details won’t matter nearly as much as creating remarkable content consistently.
  • Don’t engage when there’s no-one to engage: Don’t worry about sending “weekly e-mails” to your audience when you have 143 e-mail subscribers. Create Growth Content instead and grow your e-mail list (which will automatically engage your audience as well)
  • Ignore cookie cutter advice: Ignore anyone who says you should e-mail your list 1x/week or 2x/week. Staying top of mind matters, but your frequency depends on so many factors that it doesn’t make sense to follow this generic advice.
  • Tweak your frequency to your current business goal: When you’re launching a products, service, or a new lead magnet, you’ll send more e-mails than when you’re just creating content, and that’s ok.

Again, use these guidelines to create a working version of your Content Schedule, then iterate through it to find a schedule that works for you.

Finally, feel free to experiment with different types of content and different schedules over time, like Peter Nguyen from The Essential Man:

“I spent a few months publishing 1 EPIC piece of content a month, and then thought I should create content more frequently. I switched to posting shorter content 1x/week, and compared my results. After a few months, the EPIC content was a clear winner as it kept bringing in new readers over time (rather than just creating small spikes in traffic”.

Ultimately, you can only find a schedule that works for you by experimenting with different schedules, so feel free to do that after a few months (and then continue with your “winning” schedule).

3 Steps to Creating a Bulletproof Content Strategy

So far, we’ve covered what kind of content you should create, the types of content you should create, how often you should create your content.

Now, let’s start putting the pieces together to create an actual Content Strategy.

We’ll do that through the following steps:

  • Step #1: Create Content Seasons
  • Step #2: Use Content Stacking
  • Step #3: Create your Editorial Calendar

Using these 3 steps, you’ll always be able to create a clear Content Strategy for your online business.

Step #1: Content Seasons

The first tool you can use to create your Content Strategy are what I call “Content Seasons”.

Rather than creating “random content”, it’s better to create congruent content that fits into a similar Content Theme (that you already have defined from your Content Matrix).

For example, if you’re a stylist, instead of writing about leather jackets one day, chino pants the next day, and dressing for weddings the next day, you could create 5-10 pieces of content that all talk about fall style.

Then, when spring comes around, you’d create a new Content Season around spring style, or, if you realized a lot of your readers are asking you how to dress for weddings or conferences, you could create Content Seasons around those topics.

As you might have noticed, my current Content Season is all about list building, while in the future, I might to another Content Season around creating online courses, another one around launching, etc.

That’s how you can eventually fill out the Content Gaps in your Content Matrix, end up with a Content Portfolio like the example we shared earlier from Danny Margulies from Freelance to Win:

Content Seasons help you teach your audience about one topic at a time and keep them hyper-engaged, and is also great for SEO as you’re creating content libraries for different topics on your website
 (and building out your Online Textbook / Wikipedia one theme at a time).

Content Seasons could last anywhere from a few weeks to up to a year.

The length of your Content Seasons will depend on how broad the topic you’re covering is, how much you have to say about a certain topic, and how long your audience will stay interested ina  certain topic.

It will also depend on the actual seasons of the year:

  • As a stylist, you might want to have dedicated seasons for spring, fall, etc.
  • As an English teacher, you might want to have different seasons about certain events, like Valentine’s day, or New Year’s Eve
  • As a weight-loss coach, you might create different seasons around “getting ready for summer”, or “surviving thanksgiving”.

Remember, the Content Seasons will always come out of Content Themes, which will come from Problems Worth Solving of your audience.

To begin creating your Content Strategy, simply choose a collection of 5-10 big Problems Worth Solving within a Content Theme, and put them in an order that makes sense (start with basics, then move on to advanced topics).

Once you have your Content Season outlined, combine it with your Content Schedule, and you’ll already have a much clearer idea of which content to publish when.

Step #2: Content Stacking

The second step of creating your Content Strategy will help you balance Growth Content (to attract new potential customers to your website) with Launch Content (to sell your products and services).

You’ll do that through the principle of Content Stacking, which means stacking Launch Content on top of Growth Content.

After you spend a few weeks (or months) talking about a certain Content Theme, you can create an online product or a service (like an online course) for your readers that want more support with their Problems Worth Solving.

This way, you’ll start your Content Season with new Growth Content, grow your audience (and engage your existing audience), and then monetize your business through Launch Content in the second half of your Content Season to sell your product or service to new and old readers.

Here’s how Christina Rebuffet from Speak English in Christina does that in her business:

“We have seasons of content (american english month, etc.). Every month is dedicated to a specific program we are selling. Every course video is a subject related to the program (so is the lead magnet). Subjects we talk about always correlate to the big programs.”

Christina creates Growth Content (YouTube videos about American English), which lead to her Relevant Lead Magnet (American English Survival Kit) to help her build an e-mail list, and she finishes her Content Seasons through Launch Content (selling her Master Real American English online course).

Every element, from Growth Content to an Epic Lead Magnet to Launch Content stacks on top of each other, and helps her turn first-time readers into paying customers.

Danny Margulies from Freelance to Win stacks his content in a similar way:

“On my website, I teach people how to become copywriters, then how they can get more clients for their copy business, then how to write copy better. Some people learn how to write copy for free, then get courses for other topics. Free content is so good, that people join the paid courses too.”

When you look at your Content Strategy through the lenses of Content Seasons and Content Stacking, it all starts to make sense (and you’ll notice these concept with any online business you choose to study).

In terms of your own Content Strategy, your next step is simple. Once you create a new Content Season and grow your e-mail list by hundreds (or thousands) of e-mail subscribers, create and sell a new product or a service (or sell one of your existing products or services) to wrap up the Content Season – then move on to the next one.

This way, you’ll turn your online business into a well-oiled machine. You’ll continue to get more and more website visitors that will convert into e-mail subscribers and paying customers.

NOTE: You don’t ALWAYS have to finish your Content Seasons with Launch Content. If you’d prefer to end the season early, create another Content Season around a different topic to grow your audience more, you should by all means do that!

What should you charge for, and what should you give away for free?

At this point, I know you’ll have this question on your mind.

You might also have the concern of “am I giving away too much?”.

We had a detailed conversation around these 2 topics with Danny Margulies when I interviewed him about how he built an e-mail list of 40,000+ e-mail subscribers.

Here’s what he said:

“You want to be generous with your content. I’ve heard a lot of people say “If I put too much out there, there will be nothing else for my coaching / courses”.

My experience is the OPPOSITE.

For example, there’s a site I subscribe to, that charges $60 per seminar. There are lots of old seminars available online for free. They get better at them every year though, so even though there are hundreds of hours of old content online free, I still buy new content from them. You can also always include MORE in a course than in free content (community / coaching / personal access / other resources that don’t make sense to release free).”

I couldn’t agree with Danny more. Your goal should always be to create the BEST free AND paid content out there, and be generous with your content.

When you’re creating remarkable content, don’t hold anything back (like I’m not holding anything back with this guide). Create the best free content you can possible create, as it will help you fuel your business for years to come.

Then, when you finish creating your free content, think about how you can make your coaching or online course even better.

Know that people don’t buy online programs just for “information” – many of them will want personal access to you, feedback on their unique situations and challenges, a community of like-minded people, additional support and accountability…

And these things will be hard for you to provide through free content.

For example, even though I held nothing back as I wrote my list-building guide to over 100,000 words, I still tens of hours of interviews with established online entrepreneurs saved that I could include in an online course.

No matter how long or detailed I make this guide, there’s no way I could pull out all the knowledge from those interviews (or the guide would be 2-3x longer), or bring the same experience to you through it.

I also can’t really coach you on list-building through this guide (even though I could look at your website and tell you within 10 minutes how to optimize it to collect more e-mail subscribers), or give you a community of like-minded entrepreneurs that help you grow your online business.

There will always be more that you can include in an online course, so be generous with the content that you give away and hold nothing back!

Step #3: Editorial Calendar

The final step of creating your Content Strategy is to create your Content Calendar or Editorial Calendar.

Your Editorial Calendar will help you keep your Content Strategy in one place, so you always know what content you’re creating, when you’ll publish it, etc.

Over time, once you hire a team to help you create new content, your Editorial Calendar will become an invaluable tool in your online business.

With an Editorial Calendar, you can create a Content Strategy for your next month (or even 3, 6 or 12 months).

With your Editorial Calendar, the key is to know WHAT content you’ll be creating (and publishing) and WHEN, so you know what content you’ll be creating next every month
.

There are many different ways to create your own Editorial Calendar, and you have to find an approach that works for you.

For example, you could create a “nerdy” spreadsheet like Luke McIntosh from Become a Bassist that includes your new content, Relevant Lead Magnets (opt-in bonuses) and a checklist of all the things you need to do to publish a piece of content:

Or, you could keep things a lot simpler, and simply create a list of topics you want to cover in a notepad or a Google Document.

For example, let’s say you were a food blogger, your simple Editorial Calendar could look like this:

  • October: Cheese & Wine Season, Halloween Season
  • November: Thanksgiving Foods Season
  • December: Christmas and New Years Food Season
  • January: Winter Remedies Season
  • …

You can get as nerdy or as simplistic with your Editorial Calendar as possible. As long as you create your Remarkable Content Ideas through Problems Worth Solving, and apply the principles of Content Seasons and Content Stacking to your calendar, you’ll be fine.

Note that you can also be as strict or as flexible with this calendar, based on how you function:

  • If you love structure and sticking with a pre-planned schedule, then be strict with exact dates for creating and publishing your content
  • If you’re more of a rebel and usually don’t stick with what you plan, write out the calendar but feel free to keep it flexible and allow yourself to change seasons around along the way

There’s no right or wrong way to create your Editorial Calendar. Follow the principles outlined in this guide, have fun with it, and create it in a way that works for you!

This concludes the final step of creating your Content Strategy for your online business. If you followed the steps above, you’ll now have a clear idea exactly what content to create (and when to create it).

You now also know everything you need to know to use Remarkable Content to build an e-mail list of 5,000+ e-mail subscribers – now it’s up to you to go and put in the work to make it happen :).

In the final chapter of this guide, we’ll touch on Advanced List-Building Strategies, which you’ll be able to use to grow your e-mail list to 10,000-20,000 e-mail subscribers (and beyond).

Continue to Chapter 16: Advanced List-Building Strategies

Your Turn: How did you create your content strategy / editorial calendar?

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit

The Complete Guide to Consistently Creating Remarkable Content

By Primoz Bozic Leave a Comment

You’re currently reading Chapter 14 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

If you’re reading this, you probably know that consistently creating remarkable content is one of the most important things in your business.

The more remarkable content you can consistently create, the more traffic you’ll get to your website, the faster your e-mail list will grow, and the more sales you’ll get for your online courses, coaching services, and other online products you offer.

But how do you CONSISTENTLY create remarkable content week after week, month after month, while juggling all the other things you need to do in your online business (research, product development, product launches…), and without burning out?

Knowing that is important because without consistent content creation, your business will sooner or later plateau (or worse, start falling apart).

Creating content consistently is the foundation that brings a stream of new potential customers to your business every week, and if that foundation breaks, so can your business.

That’s why, in this guide, I’ll teach you how to create content consistently, once and for all.

NOTE: If you don’t know how to create Remarkable Content yet, you should read my Complete Guide to Creating Remarkable Content first.

Why is it so hard to consistently create remarkable content?

If you know how important it is to create remarkable content, then why is it so hard to create it consistently?

In a nutshell, it’s because 3 things get between you and content creation.

  • Your business get in the way: You get busy with developing and launching a new online course or a coaching program, you run out of time and energy to create content, and put it on the back burner
  • Your life gets in the way: You move to a different city, your wife has a baby, you get sick,… and slowly but surely stop creating content consistently
  • You get in your own way: You sometimes just don’t feel like writing – maybe you’re too tired, too bored, or simply don’t feel like it

Once you manage to get a good handle on all of those roadblocks and obstacles and build the skill of creating content consistently (regardless of what life, business or you throw your way), you’ll emerge out of the content creation as a victor, not the victim.

Build consistency first, THEN increase volume

The default strategy for creating more content seems to be “just buckle down and work harder”. And as you probably know, that doesn’t work well for very long.

It usually results in going on a content creation rampage, spending a few days vigorously creating content, quickly burning yourself out, and not creating any content consistently for weeks (or months).

It’s very similar to going to the gym consistently – a lot of people hit the gym hard every January, and only a few % of them keep going after 2-3 weeks.

So what’s the secret to consistently create new content for your online business every week?

It’s to focus on consistency BEFORE volume.

This means that you should focus on creating content every week, rather than focusing on how much content you create.

That’s because ONCE you’re in a habit of creating consistently, and it becomes natural for you to create content every week (and perhaps even harder NOT to create it), you can easily ramp up the volume and write twice as much every week or record twice as many videos every week.

But if you haven’t built that consistency yet, you can try ANY strategy to create more content, and it’s likely not going to stick. Instead, you’ll enter a vicious cycle of intense content creation, followed by burnout, dry spells of content creation and frustration.

How to develop consistency: Lessons from my fitness transformation

I used to be a fat entrepreneur. I ate out at fancy restaurants multiple times a week where I consumed bottles of wine alongside tasty tasting menus.

In the meanwhile, I stopped doing any sort of sports and spent most of my days in front of my computer.

I quickly got into the absolute worst shape of my life, where my belly fat literally fell over my shorts, and I couldn’t button most of my shirts (photo on the left):

I knew that I had to do something about it, and in January, I decided to do something I dreaded, but just saw no other option anymore:

I joined a gym.

I hated the idea of joining a gym because I didn’t want to become one of those meatheads with lots of muscles that acted like idiots.

But since going to the gym was the most convenient thing for me to do, I gave it a shot anyway.

From past experience, I knew what didn’t work for me:

  • Finding a “perfect” workout plan (I would spend more time finding a plan than working out)
  • Doing intense workouts every day (I would get so sore after a week I would stop working out)
  • Going on a crazy diet (I would stick with it for a few weeks, then start binge-eating all the sweets and junk food I would see and make it all back and more)

So this time, I took a different approach.

I hired a personal trainer, told him about my goals (I wanted a six pack in the summer), and let him guide me.

I was fortunate enough to find an amazing personal trainer that I got along with really well, and all of a sudden, my workouts weren’t a chore anymore. They were something I looked forward to every day.

During my workouts, we focused on doing exercises I enjoyed and was good at (heavy bench presses), and didn’t do exercises I hated or I was bad at (lunges or treadmill).

Because I had the extra accountability and I enjoyed working out with my trainer, I rarely skipped a workout, even if I felt sore, didn’t feel like working out, or had a workout at 7am. I always showed up, regardless of how I felt.

That’s how I managed to get my summer six pack (on the right above), but I didn’t stop there.

I built such a strong workout habit that I continue to work out 4 times a week (often for 2-3 hours a day), and I haven’t missed a workout in years (I work out even when I’m traveling or on vacation).

I even began to enjoy working out so much that I’ve won multiple gold medals at Powerlifting National Championships.

None of this would have happened if I didn’t actually ENJOY working out and built a habit that was easy for me to stick with. It wouldn’t have happened if I tried a crazy workout regimen right from the start.

But because I built consistency first, and enjoyed my workouts, I could gradually increase the weight I lifted, how hard the workouts were, how long the workouts were, and how strong I ultimately became.

Now I can bench press 350+lbs and squat 500+lbs, but to do that, I had to start with just showing up in the gym, enjoying my workouts, week after week.

When I set on a mission to crack the code to consistent content creation last year (where I also worked with 20 online entrepreneurs closely to help them create more content than they ever created before), I realized that creating content consistently works in the exact same way as going to the gym consistently.

Here’s what I’ve found you DON’T NEED to worry about (until you are creating content consistently):

  • Coming up with a perfect content calendar
  • Nailing your writing and editing process
  • Creating the perfect outline
  • Going from 0-10,000 words a week overnight
  • Knowing if your writing is “good enough”

None of those things matter.

You can figure them out ONCE you learn how to consistently create remarkable content, but if you focus on them before nailing consistency first, these techniques will work for a while until you hit another dry spell of content creation.

First, you need to make content creation fun, exciting, and easy to do, and get to a place where it’s harder for you not to create content every week than it is to create it.

How to make content creation exciting (rather than a chore)

Sometimes, creating content can feel like a chore, or you’ll feel an insane amount of pressure around it, that will drain you more than the actual content creation itself.

This might happen when you’re just starting out with content creation and you aren’t used to it yet, or at a certain point when you build a large enough following and you all of a sudden feel like people have these huge expectations around every piece of content you publish.

Having been there plenty of times myself, here are the strategies that helped me cope with the pressure and make content creation fun and exciting (rather than a chore).

Strategy #1: Just get to the coffee shop

When I started out with creating content, I thought that setting goals and benchmarks like “writing 1,000 words every day” would help me stay on track with my content.

It didn’t. That approach might work for some people, but it never worked for me.

There’s something else that did work FAR better than any other trick or hack, and it’s deceivingly simple:

Just get to the coffee shop!

For me, coffee shops are the place where I get 99% of my writing done.

Maybe it’s the because I get out of the house (and don’t get distracted by laying in bed or finding all sorts of things to clean or move around in my apartment).

Maybe it’s that there are other people around me and I don’t want to “slack off”.

Maybe it’s the endless supply of delicious coffee that keeps me going.

Maybe it’s all of the above.

What I do know is that whenever I get to the coffee shop, I get writing done, and writing is my main source of content creation.

When I’m at the coffee shop, I’m focused, I’m writing, and write thousands of words every day.

Focusing on getting to the coffee shop whenever I want to create content has ironically worked way better (and often helps me write 4,000+ words a day) than setting a goal of writing 1,000 words.

This simple strategy has worked for a lot of my clients as well – as long as they got to the coffee shop (or the library / coworking space for some entrepreneurs), the content would automatically get created.

Try it out and see how it works for you. And even if you want to create YouTube videos, you can use the same strategy to write scripts for them ;).

Strategy #2: Create content you WANT to create (not “should” create)

Whenever I look at any of my content creation dry-spells, the culprit behind them is almost always the same.

I focused on creating content that I felt like I “should” be creating (that my clients or coaches told me to create), rather than content I really WANTED to create.

As soon as I gave myself permission to create content around things I wanted to write about, all the pressure seemed to disappear, and I found myself making the extra time to create content, EVEN when I was tired.

As we already touched on in the guide on creating remarkable content, you should always start by creating content you’re most excited to create.

You’ll likely never create 80% of the content you have ideas to create (because you’ll have more ideas for content than time to create all the content), so you might as well spend your time and energy on the 20% of ideas that DO excite you than the ones that don’t.

Strategy #3: Create content in your Zone of Genius

Similarly to the topics you want to create around, you should also choose the formats or content types that are in your Zone of Genius:

  • You should create content in a way that’s FUN for you to create (if you love writing, write; if you love talking, make videos)
  • You should create content that you’re GOOD at creating (if you’re good at writing long guides and bad at writing short blog posts, write long guides and don’t write short blog posts)

I can’t stress this enough – choose the content type and platform that suits you, and creating content will be SO much more fun and exciting.

At the end of the day, you can make a choice:

  • You can create the content you “should” be creating in a way you “should” create it (and likely spend more time procrastinating than actually creating content)
  • Or, you can create content that you WANT to create in a way you LOVE creating content

By taking the first approach, you won’t please anyone, and you’ll waste weeks or months feeling frustrated.

By taking the second approach, you’ll create A LOT more content, help a lot more people, and even if not all of it is “perfect”, you’ll feel like you spent your time a lot better than you would by trying to “get” yourself to create content.

Strategy #4: Focus on solving problems, not numbers

When you’re creating content, it’s easy to get lost in numbers (from daily traffic to page views to bounce rate to new e-mail subscribers every day) and spend hours and hours refreshing your analytics.

While you’ll likely go through this phase, the sooner that you can get out of it, the better.

Analytics are a great way to analyze which of your content is resonating and which isn’t (in fact, I recommended looking through your statistics by doing a Channel Audit in a previous chapter of this guide).

However, obsessively checking your numbers multiple times a day won’t do much for your business.

To prevent yourself from doing this all the time, I suggest doing two things.

First, check your analytics once a week. I like to check them every Monday morning, during my 2-minute weekly review.

Second, focus on solving problems, not numbers.

Instead of becoming obsessed with analytics like many internet marketers, become obsessed with solving people’s problems.

That’s what I focus on when I’m writing. I’m not thinking “I want to get X traffic this week”. I’m thinking “I want to write this post as soon as possible so I can help people with advice in my head”.

Try taking on this mentality, and see how it goes!

Strategy #5: Shoot for clarity over perfection

When you’re just starting out with content creation, it’s easy to pressure yourself into creating “perfect” content, which can kill any chances of you creating content consistently.

I asked Luke McIntosh who has created weekly YouTube videos for more than a year to grow an e-mail list of 25,000+ e-mail subscribers how he deals with this issue:

“Your first few YouTube videos / blog posts will suck. Make as many as you can, get better over time. Shoot for clarity over perfection, shoot for not being misunderstood. “

This is a great mindset to take on, and when you look back at your content 6 months from now, you’ll probably cringe at what you created, regardless of how “perfect” you try to make it.

The only way to create the “perfect” content is by creating more content, and getting better at creating content over time.

To get better at creating content, you need to get in the practice, trial and error, create hundreds of pieces of content, and get better with every piece of content you create.

It’s just like practicing basketball. You won’t become a great basketball by waiting to make one perfect shot for 10 hours. You’ll become a great basketball player by making 10,000 shots, having a coach watch you, and improve with every shot that you make.

After 10,000 shots, you’ll shoot the basketball a lot better than after 1 shot.

When you’re just starting out with creating remarkable content, focus on making your content clear and remarkable, and creating it around problems worth solving.

Create 10 or 20 pieces of content, listen to the feedback you get, and make changes with future content you create to get better and better at creating content (and get more and more traffic and e-mail subscribers).

The 5 reasons why you aren’t creating content consistently (and how to fix them)

To create content consistently, it’s not enough to just “start creating conent”, as your life, your business, and you will keep getting in your way.

Instead, we need to strategically prepare for battles with our enemies that stand in the way of creating content consistently.

There are 5 “horsemen of content creation apocalypse” that will stand in the way of you and creating remarkable content consistently:

  • Time
  • Energy
  • Distractions
  • Thoughts
  • Boredom

In this guide, I’ll share with you the exact weapons you can use to defeat these horsemen and build a bulletproof content creation habit.

By having these weapons in your arsenal, you’ll be able to keep creating content EVEN when your life, business, or you get in your way.

How to Find Time to Create Remarkable Content

Finding the time to consistently create content can be rough, especially when life or business gets in the way.

Whether you’re working on creating and launching a new online course, you’re doing an intense week of customer research calls, or you’re laying sick in bed, barely able to move, there’s always something that life will throw your way that cuts into your precious content creation time.

If you don’t create and protect the time and space to get your content creation sessions in, it’s very unlikely you’ll build a consistent content creation habit, as content creation will quickly move over to the back burner.

This is one of the main reasons why most entrepreneurs fail with consistent content creation – they just try to “create more content”, on top of everything else they’re doing in their business (though they of course do make time to check e-mail and social media daily).

When more urgent work comes in-between or we “don’t feel like it”, we quickly drop the ball on content creation.

Luckily, there are a quite a few weapons we can use to fight this horseman and ALWAYS make the time to create content.

Strategy #1: The Lean Schedule

The very first thing we can do to create more time for content creation is to create a Lean Schedule, a concept I wrote a detailed blog post about that I highly recommend you to read.

Creating a Lean Schedule consists of 3 simple strategies:

  • High-Impact Work Audit: Take a deep, hard look at which tasks in your business actually move your business forward, and which tasks you’re doing just because you “should” be doing them or you’re used to doing them, even though they don’t do much for your business
  • Time Purge: Purge all of your Low-Impact work out of your business, to create more time for High-Impact Work (like Content Creation)
  • Schedule Overhaul: Reorganize your schedule, meetings, errands and client calls to completely free up big blocks of time in your calendar for Content Creation (and ideally block off a few days when ALL you do is create new content)

This way, you’ll be able to turn a cluttered schedule that allows for very little content creation:

Into a lean schedule that gives you plenty of time and space to create content every week:

For example, when I had a cluttered schedule, I only had a couple of “pockets of time” to create content – now I have Mondays, Tuesdays and Fridays blocked off to exclusively focus on content creation.

And even if I’m creating or launching an online course and I choose to spend 1-2 full days on that, I can still have a full day left to consistently create new content.

Creating a lean schedule is the SINGLE most effective strategy for creating more time to create content that works over and over again, so I highly suggest you to read my detailed article about it, follow the steps step-by-step, and implement it in your business.

NOTE: My example above is from running my business full time. Even if you run your business on the side, you can use the Lean Schedule strategy to create uninterrupted afternoons, mornings, or days to create content for your business over the weekend by using the exact same principles and techniques.

Strategy #2: Protect Your Time

Just as it’s important to MAKE time for content creation by creating a Lean Schedule, it’s just as important to PROTECT that time.

As you suddenly find yourself with hours and hours of free time just to create content, it’s easy to distract yourself with everything else – from grocery shopping, getting a haircut appointment, going hiking, or messing around on your computer (been there, done all of that).

It’s natural that when you find yourself with so much free time, you need to create new habits and routines that help you cope with it and actually use the time effectively to create as much content as possible.

To make that happen, you can follow these two rules:

  • Only allow yourself to create content, or do NOTHING during your content creation days / blocks
  • Protect your time and don’t let anyone steal it away from you

The first of these rules is pretty self-explanatory. When the only possible alternative to creating content is staring at a wall and doing nothing, creating content becomes a lot easier.

The second might need a bit more explanation.

Once you experience huge chunks of uninterrupted time, you’ll have to fight the urge to do all sorts of things during this time:

  • Client calls and meetings
  • Errands, coffees and lunches
  • Fun activities, exercise and hobbies
  • Sleeping in
  • New projects that could grow your business

You’ll have to develop the discipline to say no to yourself, as well as others, and protect your time.

The way to fight that urge is by creating meeting days (for me, that’s Thursdays and every other Wednesday) where you take all client calls, meetings, and do all of your errands. These might be 1-2 intense days where you’ll feel exhausted by the end of the day, BUT in exchange you’ll have 3-4 days when you can focus just on creating content.

I intentionally schedule my meeting days for Wednesdays and Thursdays so I can create content when I’m the most recovered from my weekend (MON+TUE), and I like to hae the flexibility to take longer weekend trips to recharge on Fridays (if I’m not recharging, I’m creating content, like I am today).

At first, this might be tough, but over the course of a few weeks, you’ll get better at it, and sooner or later, only creating content on your content creating days will become a routine for you.

What you’ll soon discover as you take on this new routine in place is that you can create A LOT of content in 2-4 hours a day, allow yourself to wrap up work earlier (by 2pm or 4pm), and have the whole afternoon guilt-free to do whatever you want – so you’ll be more productive AND have more free time than ever.

Strategy #3: Outsource, automate and delegate Low-Impact Work

Once you’re consistently bringing in thousands of dollars with your business every month, you’ll be able to get rid of certain low-impact tasks that have to get done, but you don’t enjoy and might not be the best use of your time.

At this point, you can think about how to create a few extra hours every week by:

  • Hiring a Virtual Assistant to help you with answering e-mails, scheduling client calls, organizing research, designing online course presentations, formatting your blog posts, accounting, doing taxes, or other tasks that aren’t worth your time.
  • Hiring a cleaning lady that cleans your apartment, does your laundry, or even cooks for you
  • Paying your neighbor’s son to mow your lawn
  • Have someone pick up and wash the car for you (or change the tires to winter tires)
  • Use a healthy meal delivery service instead of meal prepping
  • Paying for software like Calendly to automate scheduling your coaching calls
  • Paying for software like Zapier to automate other mundane tasks in your business

This might feel uncomfortable at first, especially if you’re used to doing everything yourself, so you don’t need to do all of these things right away.

Start by outsourcing, delegating or automating ONE task that you absolutely hate and drains your energy, try it out for a week, and see how you like it. If you love it, tackle another one next week (and another one the week after…).

Strategy #4: Develop a Professional Attitude

The final thing you can do to stick with your new schedule is to change the way you think about creating content.

Instead of thinking about it as “just another task on your to-do list”, think of it as the life and blood of your business. The more remarkable content you create, the faster your online business will grow.

You can think of your content creation sessions as a professional athlete treats their training sessions:

  • Get into the mindset of a professional, not an amateur
  • NEVER skip a content creation session
  • Don’t sleep in (if you do, you’re off the team!)
  • On bad days, create less content, or focus on creating content that’s more fun to create, rather than skipping your session
  • An athlete wouldn’t schedule meetings over their training (or go to a haircut instead), and neither should you for your content creation sessions

Getting into the professional mindset and treating your content creation sessions as training can make a HUGE difference in how much content you end up creating.

Strategy #5: Create Content Weeks (or Months) in Advance

What about when you’re spending all of your energy creating or launching a new online course, or when you’re having an intense rapid research week and do 20 customer research interviews within a single week?

During those times, it’s ok not to create content (but with a twist).

Instead of falling off the wagon and creating a dry-spell in your content (which means a wasted opportunity in growing your e-mail list), you can create content in advance, and schedule it to get published while you’re focusing on other things in your business.

If you followed the Lean Schedule strategy and created a few content creation days in your business, you now have more than enough time to create enough remarkable content every week.

In fact, you’ll be able to create more content than you might want to publish.

To take advantage of this time, you can use these content creation sprints to create content that you’ll publish a few weeks (or months) in advance.

For example, if you can write 2 remarkable blog posts a week but you only want to publish one blog post a week, you can create 8 pieces of remarkable content in 4 weeks, which means you could take 4 weeks “off” from content creation to focus on developing or launching a new online course (or even taking a well-deserved vacation).

That’s exactly what Luke McIntosh from Become a Bassist did when we worked together on creating more content consistently:

“I wrote 9 weeks of content in advance so I could take a 6-week holiday in Brasil while my business kept growing. Even though I haven’t been ‘working’ on my holiday apart from responding to emails and things like that, I’ve still brought in just under 2,500 new subscribers.”

Once you get used to creating content weeks or months in advance, it becomes surprisingly easy to keep up with all the other work in your business.

By freeing up the content-creation days, you can then use those days for research, course development or writing sales copy – while knowing that your business is growing in the background through all the content you already created.

How to Find The Energy to Create Content (Even When You’re Tired or Don’t Feel Like Working)

Having the TIME to create content is one thing.

But feeling like creating content is another. There will be days when you’re distracted. There will be days when you’re tired. There will be days when you’re laying sick in bed. There will be days when you just don’t “feel” like creating content.

Before we get into specific strategies for finding more energy for creating content, we need to get one big myth out of the way:

“I can’t create content when I’m tired / don’t feel like it”.

I used to believe the same thing – but through my research (and writing 10,000+ words week after week), here’s what I realized:

It’s not impossible to write when you “don’t feel like it”, or when you’re tired.

For example, as I’m writing this guide, I’m tracking all of my writing sessions in my writing tracker.

And while I have some weeks when I’m bursting with energy, there’s plenty of weeks, days, and sessions when I’m tired and don’t really feel like writing.

For example, this Monday and Tuesday, I was pretty tired (my energy levels were around 3 on a scale of 1-5 most of the time, which is fairly tired, but not dead tired), and I still wrote for 3+ hours and 4,400+ words every day to create my Remarkable Content Guide:

What’s surprising is that even though I was tired (and it was definitely harder for me to sit down and write), I was pretty focused while working most of the time (my focus was a 4-5 on a scale of 1-5).

This is a trend I’ve seen over and over again in my own content creation, as well as by working with other entrepreneurs to help them create more content:

  • If you’re dead tired (1-2 energy), it is indeed difficult to create content
  • If you’re tired (3 energy), it’s harder to sit down to create content, but once you get started, you can get in the flow, forget about time and create A LOT of content
  • If you’re fresh (4-5 energy), it’s the easiest to create content, BUT only 20-30% of your content creation sessions will be a 4 or a 5

This means that if I only created content when I was super fresh and all the stars aligned, I’d only create content roughly 30% of the time, which means I’d only write 2,700 words (rather than 9,100 words) this Monday and Tuesday.

This means that in order to create a lot of content, you need to know that most of the time you WON’T feel super energized and it might be harder for you to sit down and start, but ONCE you start, you’ll often catch the flow and momentum, and it will be a lot easier to keep going.

Just knowing that can help you make a BIG mindset shift from “I’m too tired to create content” to “I know I’m tired and starting will be harder, but when I start, it’ll get easier”.

Now as I mentioned earlier, there WILL be times when you’re dead tired (energy 1-2), and at those times, it will be ridiculously hard for you to focus or create content for longer periods of time.

In this section, we’ll therefore cover the strategies that will help you minimize the times when your energy is 1-2, and maximize the times when your energy is 4-5, to make content creation easier.

Strategy #1: Find Your Optimal Content Creation Times

A big mistake that prevents a lot of entrepreneurs from creating content consistently is that they put it off and decide to do it “later in the day”. They put it off so much that they’re dead tired from all the other work, then push it off to the next day, the day after… And quickly hit a dry-spell of content creation.

As we’ve seen, it’s the easiest to create content when you’re fresh and energized. The fresher you are, the easier it will be for you to sit down and create content, and the more focused you’ll stay while creating content.

That’s why it’s important for you to find the days and times when you’re the freshest, and schedule your content creation sessions during those times.

For example, I know that my “prime time” for content creation are Monday and Tuesday mornings and early afternoons – that’s when I get most of my writing done.

An awesome tool to help you quickly identify your content prime time is my writing tracker (you can use it for writing, or even for creating videos). It will help you clearly see when you’re at your best within a few days or weeks.

Here are some guidelines that can help you find your optimal content creation times:

  • You’ll be more energized before client work, meetings or coaching calls (or your 9-5 if you’re running your business on the side)
  • If you can, create content first thing in the morning (the earlier the better)
  • There are exceptions (night owls…) – the rule of thumb is to create content when you’re at your freshest
  • If you’re not sure when you’re at your freshest, try creating content at different times of the day and pay attention to your “energy” tab in the writing tracker
  • You’ll typically be fresher earlier in the week, after the weekend, and before your meeting days

Experiment with different content creation times, see how energized you are, find the times that work best for you, and use those times to create content in the future.

Strategy #2: Use Energy Boosters

Despite your best intentions to create content when you’re at your freshest, there will always be times when you’re more tired than you’d like to be.

Maybe you didn’t sleep well because of the summer heat, a loud neighbor, or because your kids woke you up in the middle of the night. Maybe you caught a cold. Maybe you’re tired or jetlagged from a business trip, or you had a tough workout the day before.

In these situations, you can use energy boosters to quickly boost your energy and make yourself energized enough to create content.

Here are some examples that I’ve seen work well over and over again:

  • Coffee: Probably the simplest way to get a quick boost of energy (tea and energy drinks work too)
  • Power Naps: Napping for 20 minutes when you can barely keep your eyes open can give you back an insane amount of energy (and feel like you’re getting 2 days in 1)
  • Cold Showers: If you’re up for the challenge, these are a great way to refresh yourself when you’re tired
  • Walks: Talking a walk in the sun / nature can not only energize you, it can also spark new ideas for content to create (which instantly makes you feel less tired)
  • Meditation: You might find that meditating energizes you (if it puts you to sleep, this might not be the best fit for you)
  • Music: Putting on your favorite / upbeat music when you’re writing can be surprisingly effective for giving you an instant burst of energy

I personally use coffee and music every time I create content, walk during my content creation breaks (to deal with the fatigue that accumulates over time), and take power naps as a last resort when I’m feeling dead tired.

You can experiment with these energy boosters whenever you need to wake yourself up and create content (or you can think of other ways to do it – from doing push ups to dancing in your apartment – whatever works for you).

Strategy #3: Extreme Recovery

Finally, there will be times when even the energy boosters don’t seem to be working, and you’re tired ALL the time.

This is likely because you’re burned out physically, mentally or emotionally, and the LAST thing you want to do is create content.

When I notice that I hate the idea of creating content and just want to lay in bed all day and do nothing, or that I’m tired all the time, I know I’m in need of a RESET.

When that happens, I prioritize Extreme Recovery.

I do that in a few ways:

  • Sleep: I’ll sleep in for a few days, wake up without an alarm and just let my body get back to normal through the rest that it needs (and I regularly try to get 7-9 hours of sleep a night)
  • Nutrition: I avoid junk food that makes you tired, overeating and sugary drinks. Veggies, greens, fruits and lots of water usually make me feel great.
  • Disconnect: Having regular breaks away from my computer screen and phone does wonders for your energy levels, so I try to go into the nature or do activities that take all of my attention (like board games).
  • Time Off: I take frequent time off from work (I usually take weekends off, and have a vacation every 3-6 months). This makes a huge difference in my day-to day energy levels (especially if I work really hard for long periods of time).
  • Extreme Recovery Rituals: I go into spas, massages, saunas, baths, or swim for 2-4 hours to instantly recover. I also try to go into the nature for 1-3 days whenever I feel like I really need to recharge and idsconnect.

The more of these you do on a regular basis, the better.

But whenever you’re severely burned out (your energy levels are consistently 1-2 and you just can’t focus), taking some time off, letting yourself sleep in, disconnecting from technology and work and going into a spa for a few hours (or into nature for a few days) can be huge for getting back to normal.

How to Stop Getting Distracted by Outside Distractions (and Stay in The Flow for Hours)

Even when you have the time AND energy to create content, there’s a chance that your content creation sessions will be far less productive than they could be.

For example, I’ve had writing sessions where I wrote 250 words/hour and sessions where I wrote 2,000 words/hour, even though my energy levels were the same.

That’s because I’d sometimes sit down to write, but then get distracted by everything else – from browsing the internet, to checking e-mail, to responding to text messages – and wouldn’t end up creating much content.

Think of it as “busy” work vs “productive” work. When you’re sitting down to create content, you want to actually create content (not mess around on your phone/computer).

To make sure that actually happens, you need to create an environment that helps you eliminate distractions extremely effectively.

Strategy #1: The Cabin

When I create content, I like to create an environment that’s as similar to a mountain cabin as possible – where it’s peaceful, quiet, and it’s just me and my thoughts.

That’s why one of my favorite places to create content is an upper floor of a coffee shop 3 minutes from my apartment whenre I spend most of my time writing without any interruptions.

There’s wi-fi, plenty of outlets, great coffee, and even healthy lunches I can order to stay focused on creating content. On top of that, there’s a peaceful park across the street that I can escape to to get a well-needed break from my laptop screen, and either walk around or read a book at.

One of the very first things you should do if you find yourself constantly getting distracted when you want to create content is to find your Cabin to create content at.

Your best bet usually won’t be a home office (unless you have a “do not disturb sign” that actually works).

It’s usually best to physically remove yourself from as many distractions as possible (your girlfriend/wife/roommate/kids, the TV, the dishes,..) to minimize the chances of getting distracted by outside factors in the first place.

Here are some of the places I’ve seen work well:

  • Coffee shops (my favorite)
  • Coworking spaces
  • Buses, trains or planes (if you commute to work daily)
  • Libraries
  • Home office or study (as long as you’re actually uninterrupted there)
  • Conference rooms
  • Parks
  • Beaches
  • Book stores
  • Hotel lobbies
  • Recording studios
  • …

Try to find a place that’s close to you that you can access at any time (I have back up coffee shops for weekends when my go-to coffee shop doesn’t work), and feel free to experiment with a few places until you find one that works best for you.

You could even try going on a coffee shop tour and mixing up the different Cabins if you’re the type of person that prefers working from a different environment every day.

Strategy #2: Minimalism

The more things you bring to your Cabin with you, the more likely you are to get distracted by them.

Ideally, you’d only bring your laptop with you (and perhaps a book to read during your content creation breaks).

I notice that I’m a lot more productive when I have my phone out of sight (and even more productive when I don’t have access to it), as I don’t feel the constant need to check something, or get interrupted by text messages and phone calls all the time.

If you can, leave your phone (the worst of all distractions) at home, in the car, or at least in your laptop bag.

I know that won’t always be possible (especially if you’re waiting for an important phone call), but the further you can keep your phone away from yourself, the more productive you’ll be.

Try it out – next time you set out to create content, leave your phone as far away from you as possible – and see what happens.

Strategy #3: Block Distracting Websites

If you find yourself constantly browsing news, e-mail, YouTube or social media instead of creating content, you might want to consider getting a website blocker to help you stay 100% focused on content creation.

You can use website blockers to block websites that steal your attention during your content creation sessions. Especially if you’re separating the creating and editing process (which I highly recommend), there will be practically no need to browse the internet while you create content.

I personally use an app called Freedom to do that, and Cold Turkey is another great alternative you can try out.

Strategy #4: Turn off Notifications

One of the WORST ways to stay focused on content creation is to constantly have your phone or laptop beep with alerts and notifications.

Not only are the sounds of notifications distracting, you’ll also typically check your notifications (or think about them), then realize you have to “take care of something”, and all of a sudden, 30 minutes later, you haven’t created any more content than before.

To fix this issue, here are a couple of things you can do:

  • Turn off your notifications on your laptop: Disable “desktop alerts” for your e-mail and other apps, disable the Facebook notification sounds, turn off Slack when you’re creating content, until you have zero notifications going off
  • Keep your phone away from you: If it’s not next to you, the beeping can’t distract you. This is the best solution by far.
  • Alternatively, disable notifications on your phone. If you don’t want to leave your phone at home, at least delete the social media apps from your phone, or at least disable notifications for all the apps, so your phone isn’t constantly beeping. Then, either keep your phone in airplane mode, or (worse option), keep it in silent or “do not disturb” mode.

I know putting this into practice is hard if you’re used to be available and up to speed all the time, but at the end of the day, you need to decide what’s more important to you – creating content that fuels your business, or being notified when your friend posts a new dog photo on Instagram?

The choice is yours. The fewer notifications you get, the more content you’ll create.

Strategy #5: Drown Out the Noise

If you tend to work from noisier spaces (like coffee shops or coworking spaces), other people talking might distract you from creating content.

To combat that, there are 2 great solutions:

  • Music: Listening to music with earbuds on can help you silence out the conversations from others, and even get in the zone easier.
  • Noise cancellation headphones: These (like Bose Quiet Comfort) are a great alternative to silence out the noise without listening to music.

Even these 2 tools sometimes might not be enough though (when there are some rowdy guests at a coffee shop that have no respect for others around them, or when there’s a screaming baby nearby).

In those cases, I’ve found that the best solution is to simply move to a back-up location and save myself the frustration of being constantly distracted.

Alternatively, if you notice that even simple conversations frequently distract you, you can find yourself a quieter Cabin (like the library), where you’ll enjoy all the silence you need.

How to Stop Getting Distracted by Your Own Thoughts

How often did you stop yourself from creating content because…

  • You didn’t know if your content was any good
  • You thought nobody would read / watch the content you crated
  • You doubted if you should really talk about this topic
  • You felt like you were just wasting your time
  • You had voices in your head telling you “you can’t do this”
  • You kept coming up with other ideas what to create content about
  • You kept thinking about an argument you had with your wife

We often fight internal battles that “block” us from creating content, and our internal voices can be even more distracting than external distractions.

To combat this, “get out of your head” and actually create content, rather than thinking about creating content, you can use the following strategies.

Strategy #1: Freewriting

If you constantly find yourself worrying (or thinking about other things) when you want to be creating content instead, freewriting can help.

Freewriting is a process where you sit down for a few minutes (start with 5) with a pen and paper (or a Google Document) and write down everything that comes to mind, without any attention to grammar, spelling or anything else.

This helps you get your thoughts out of your head and onto paper, so you can free your mind up for creative writing.

For example, if the thought of “nobody will ever read this” is stopping you from writing a blog post, you can spend 5 minutes just exploring that thought on paper, to unblock yourself.

You might start exploring why you feel that way, what you can do about it, if it’s really true… and just write, write, write. After 5 minutes of furiously writing about the topic, you’ll usually clear it up in your head, unblock yourself, and allow yourself to go on and create content.  

Strategy #2: Meditation

An alternative solution to freewriting for stopping a racing mind is meditation.

Use an app like Calm or Headspace for 10 minutes to calm your thoughts and refocus yourself on the content you want to create.

Both freewriting and meditation can work (though meditating in a public place might feel weird, so freewriting might be a better fit for when you’re in public) – pick one of these approaches and try them out!

Strategy #3: Dispute Your Thoughts

Your mind will often tell you why you can’t do something.

It will tell you that you can’t create this piece of content, that nobody will read it, that you don’t know enough (and many other things).

Sometimes these thoughts are true (which is why I recommend creating content about topics you ARE confident in teaching, which helps you avoid these thoughts), while other times they’re completely false – they’re stories we make up in our minds.

Whenever your mind starts playing tricks on you and worry or self-doubt takes over, you can use

the following statements from Martin Seligman’s book Learned Optimism to dispute your thoughts:

  • “What if this wasn’t true?”
  • “What’s a more likely outcome?”
  • “That’s not completely true because…”
  • “A more accurate way of seeing this is…”
  • “If X really happens I’ll be OK because…”

I noticed that these statements help me see my thoughts in a different way, and identify false thoughts that just hold me back from creating content.

Once you dispute your thoughts, it will be way easier for you to stay focused on creating content instead.

Strategy #4: Write Down Things You Don’t Want to Forget

While you’re creating content, random ideas and thoughts will often pop up in your head.

They’ll range from “I should write an article about this as well” to “I should call my sister later today” and “I should buy toilet paper at the store”.

If you ignore these thoughts, you might feel like you’ll forget something important (and you’ll be distracted from creating content).

If you act on them instantly, you’ll break your flow and won’t create a whole lot of content (as you’ll be talking on the phone with your sister or checking an apple pie recipe on the internet instead).

The solution to this problem is simple.

Carry a notebook with you where you can write down all of the things you don’t want to forget. Then, once you’re done with creating content, feel free to go through these items and act on them.

How to Deal With Boredom and Lack of Inspiration

The final obstacle that lies in the way of you and consistent content is boredom and lack of inspiration.

There will be days when you feel like:

  • “I don’t feel inspired”
  • “I just don’t feel like creating content today”
  • “I’m not excited to create content about this topic”
  • “I’m bored”
  • “This isn’t as interesting as I thought it would be”

And you’ll want to lay in bed all day or do anything else but create content instead.

If those days happen too often, or if you rely JUST on feeling inspired to create new content, you’ll have a lot of “dry spells” of content, which will hurt your business in the long run.

That’s why it’s important for you to learn how to create content even when you feel uninspired or bored.

Luckily, the following strategies will help you do just that.

Strategy #1: Create a Content Bucket List

To make sure you don’t get bored of creating content, you can create a list of content ideas that you’re DYING to create by asking yourself questions like:

  • What are you incredibly curious about?
  • What are some pieces of content you’ve been dying to write, but never got around to?
  • If you could write about anything today, what would you write about?
  • What are you the most excited to share with your audience?
  • What are some things your audience NEEDS to know about, but nobody is talking about?

Creating content you’re excited to create in the first place (rather than creating content you “should” be creating) will take care of a lot of boredom and inspiration issues.

Still, you’ll have times when you lose excitement about a specific piece of content you’re in the middle of creating.

In that case, give yourself permission to create another piece of content from your Bucket List, or to create a different section of the same piece that’s more exciting at the moment (for example, if you’re writing an Ultimate Guide, jump to another, more exciting chapter.

The only thing you should make sure if you switch to a different piece of content is to go back and finish creating the original piece once you finish the new piece (to make sure you don’t end up with a graveyard of unfinished content ideas).

Strategy #2: Make Content Creation More Fun

If your content feels boring, consider putting your own twist or spin on it.

You can create graphics, infographics, spreadsheets, memes, gifs, funny photos… Whatever gets you excited to create content.

Let yourself have fun with creating content. Create it in a way that feels exciting in the moment. You might just create some of your best content to date.

And if something you end up doing feels like “too much”, you can always edit it out later!

Strategy #3: Time Attack

If you love a challenge, you’ll love this strategy.

Think of your writing session as a “time attack”, and try to crete as much amazing content over the next 30-60 minutes as you can.

You can also expand on this strategy to challenge yourself to create as much content as you can in a day / week / month.

With some of my clients of a content creation course I ran, we did “AMWAP” (as many words as possible) days where we challenged ourselves to write as much content as possible in a day, and it was a great way to push yourself to the limits, learn more about your content creation process, and not feel bored.

Make it a game – track your score in your writing tracker, and try to improve it each time!

Strategy #4: Go With The Flow

Some of your best content will come from sporadic moments of genius, when you randomly get an idea and create content around it.

When inspiration strikes (you get an incredible idea in the middle of the day), follow it!

Start writing the same day, as soon as you can.

Even better – finish the content on the same day, even if you have to work late into the night (so you’re not stuck with another unfinished piece of content).

This way, you can make the most out the times when the inspiration DOES strike.

Giving yourself the freedom to act on your ideas as soon as you get them will help you create A LOT of content – and even if every piece you create isn’t a homerun, you’ll keep the consistency and momentum going, which are crucial for creating content over long periods of time.

What to do if you hit a “dry spell” of content creation

Regardless of how well you plan to consistently create content, there WILL be times when you hit a “dry spell” of content creation.

Maybe you’ll go on vacation, maybe you’ll focus on launching a new online course, or you’ll catch a cold and won’t be able to create content because your brain won’t be working.

The good news is that if you focus on creating content weeks (or months) in advance, your audience (and your business) might not be affected by these dry spells, as you’ll keep publishing content you’ve already created.

Still, you’ll have to get back on track with content creation and rebuild momentum after you hit a dry spell if you don’t want to run out of content to publish.

Luckily, there’s a way to easily get back on track with content creation. I call it the Reboot Week.

The Reboot Week

Think of getting back on track with content creation as rebooting your laptop or computer.

During this week, don’t worry about following a strict content calendar, creating content for hours and hours every day, or even creating your best content.

During the Reboot Week, your only focus should be getting your momentum back (and then building on it in the following weeks).

To do that, follow 3 simple strategies.

Strategy #1: Break The Dry-Spell as Soon as You Can

When you haven’t created any new content in a long time, you’ll constantly think “oh my god, I haven’t created new content in weeks”, and feel guilty about it.

Even the thought of that (and what people might think of you for slacking off) can ironically paralyze you from creating new content.

That’s why it’s important to get rid of that thought as soon as possible and replacing it with “I just worked on creating content this morning, I can create more of it now”.

You’ll want to break the negative momentum and start creating positive momentum as soon as you can.

It doesn’t matter what kind of content you create and even how long you spend creating it (you could just spend 10 minutes outlining a new blog post or YouTube video).

As soon as you break your dry-spell, you’ll be back in the mindset of “I’m creating content now”, and it will be a lot easier for you to create new content mentally.

Whenever you hit a dry spell of content creation, you should try to get a new content creation session in as soon as possible. Don’t worry about anything else. Just stary creating content as early as you can.

Strategy #2: Get Back to The Coffee Shop!

Once you got the first content session in and you’ve broken your negative momentum, your next priority should be getting back to the coffee shop (or whichever Cabin you’re using to create content).

Don’t worry about writing a certain amount of words a day or shooting a certain amount of videos – just get to your Cabin and keep creating content.

Strategy #3: Create Content About ANYTHING You Want To

I remember the times when I didn’t work out consistently (yet).

When I’d go on vacation, it would be hard for me to get back into the gym, especially if I had a heavy squat workout coming up, from which my legs would be sore for days.

A simple trick that helped me get back to the gym a lot easier was to just get to the gym, and let myself do whatever I wanted (I’d usually just do some bench press).

This worked surprisingly well – and with the next workouts, I could handle more challenging exercises with the momentum I’d build.

One of the worst things you can do when you’re getting back on track with content creation is to try to create some hard content you don’t feel all that excited to create.

Remember, during the Reboot Week, your main goal should just be creating new content (any content) to build momentum.

That’s why I recommend you to let yourself create content about whatever excited you in the moment and build that momentum.

Then, after you’ve built the momentum again (it usually only takes a few days), feel free to become more strategic with your content creation again.

Summary: How to Consistently Create Remarkable Content

In this post, I’ve given you a thorough overviev of how you can consistently create remarkable content, together with countless strategies that you can use to create content for years to come.

Here’s a quick summary of what we covered today.

First, we talked about why it’s hard for you to consistently create content:

  • Your business get in the way: You get busy with developing and launching a new online course or a coaching program, you run out of time and energy to create content, and put it on the back burner
  • Your life gets in the way: You move to a different city, your wife has a baby, you get sick,… and slowly but surely stop creating content consistently
  • You get in your own way: You sometimes just don’t feel like writing – maybe you’re too tired, too bored, or simply don’t feel like it

I mentioned that you should focus on consistency before volume. You should build a solid content creation first, before ramping up the amount of content you create each day.

Then, I shared with you my biggest lesson from my fitness transformation, which taught me how to consistently create content as well:

You need to make content creation fun and exciting (rather than a “chore” that you should be doing).

We then went over 5 strategies for doing just that:

  • Just Get to The Coffee Shop: Rather than setting content creation goals, focus on just “showing up” regularly by going to a coffee shop to create content
  • Create Content that You WANT to Create (Not Content You “SHOULD” Create): Give yourself the freedom to create the content that excites you
  • Create Content in Your Zone of Genius: Create content in a way that’s fun for you to create, and that you’re good at creating
  • Focus on Solving Problems, Not Numbers: Focus on getting ideas out of your head and into the world, rather than the amount of traffic or e-mail subscribers you’re attracting (review these metrics weekly instead)
  • Shoot For Clarity Over Perfection: Your first few pieces of content will “suck”, so don’t worry about making them perfect. Instead, make them the best you can make them, make them clear, and move on to creating more content.

Then, we talked about 5 obstacles that stand in-between you and creating more content:

  • Time
  • Energy
  • Distractions
  • Thoughts
  • Boredom

And we went over strategies to “battle” each of them.

We first talked about how to find the time to create remarkable content consistently:

  • Create a Lean Schedule: Use the High-Impact Work Audit, Schedule Overhaul and Time Purge to create a leaner version of your schedule that allows you to create more content every week
  • Protect Your Time: Say no to projects, errands, meetings and client calls that would take away from your content creation time
  • Outsource, Delegate and Automate Low-Impact Work: Have someone else do the tasks and errands that aren’t the best use of your time to create more time to create content
  • Develop a Professional Attitude: Treat your content creation sessions like professional athletes treat their workouts.
  • Create Content Weeks (or Months) in Advance: This way, you can keep publishing content even when you’re launching a new online course or you take some well-deserved time off

We then talked about how to find the energy to create content consistently.

First, we debunked the myth that you “can’t create content when you’re tired”, and established that:

  • If you’re dead tired (1-2 energy), it is indeed difficult to create content
  • If you’re tired (3 energy), it’s harder to sit down to create content, but once you get started, you can get in the flow, forget about time and create A LOT of content
  • If you’re fresh (4-5 energy), it’s the easiest to create content, BUT only 20-30% of your content creation sessions will be a 4 or a 5

Then, we looked at specific strategies you can use to find more energy to create content:

  • Find Optimal Content Creation Times: Find “prime” times in your days / weeks when content creation comes easiest to you, and block out those times for your content creation sessions
  • Use Energy Boosters: To quickly energize yourself, use things like coffee, power naps, cold showers, walks, meditation and music
  • Extreme Recovery: When you’re tired all the time / burned out, make sure your sleep and nutrition are on point, take some time off / to disconnect, and practice extreme recovery rituals (like going to the spa for a few hours or taking a trip to the nature)

We then talked about how to prevent outside distractions from distracting you from creating content:

  • The Cabin: Find a place where you can create content without outside distractions (a coffee shop, co-working space, library,…)
  • Minimalism: Bring only your laptop with you when you create content, and leave your phone at home / in the car if you can
  • Block Distracting Websites: Use tools like Freedom to stop yourself from browsing internet all the time
  • Turn Off Notifications: Block notifications on your desktop, turn off e-mail and Slack, and remove all notifications from your phone (or at least put it into quiet / do not disturb / airplane mode)
  • Drown Out The Noise: If you get distracted by noise / conversations, turn on music or use noise cancellation headphones

And we also covered how to stop getting distracted by your own thoughts:

  • Freewrite: Get all of your thoughts out of your head and onto paper
  • Meditate: Calm your mind with tools like Calm or Headspace
  • Dispute Your Thoughts: Challenge and dispute negative thoughts in your head
  • Write Down Things You Don’t Want to Forget: Keep track of all your thoughts and ideas on a notepad / in a separate document and revisit them after you stop creating content

We talked about what to do when you’re bored or lack inspiration:

  • Create a Content Bucket List: Create a list of content ideas you’re dying to create
  • Make Content Creation Fun: Allow yourself to create content in a more fun way (through graphics, memes, spreadsheets, whatever excites you)
  • Time Attack: Challenge yourself to create as much content as you can in an hour / in a day / in a week (AMWAP days are a great alternative as well)
  • Go With The Flow: Whenever inspiration DOES strike, ride the wave, clear up your schedule, and create the content you want to create in the moment (if you can, finish it the same day)

Finally, we talked about how to recover from a dry-spell of content creation through The Reboot Week:

  • Break The Dry-Spell: Focus on getting a content creation in as soon as possible (no matter how short it is) to switch your mindset from “I haven’t created content in a long time” to “I just created content a few hours ago”
  • Get Back to The Coffee Shop! Instead of focusing on creating content, just focus on getting back to the coffee shop to automatically create content
  • Create Content About ANYTHING You Want to: Don’t worry about what you create content about until you rebuild momentum. Focus on talking about things that are easy, fun and exciting for you instead

That’s it!

Now you know both how to create remarkable content, as well as how to do that consistently.

The final piece of the puzzle when it comes to content creation that we haven’t covered yet is how to strategically create content through a long-term content calendar. That’s exactly what we’ll cover in the next chapter of this guide.

Continue to Chapter 15: How to Create Your Content Strategy

Your Turn: What’s YOUR “secret” to consistently creating remarkable content?

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit

The Complete Guide to Creating Remarkable Content

By Primoz Bozic Leave a Comment

You’re currently reading Chapter 13 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

There are few things more exciting to an online entrepreneur than seeing 10, 20, 30 or even 60 new e-mail subscribers sign up to their e-mail list every day.

And while getting there might feel like climbing a massive mountain, it’s actually very straightforward. With every piece of remarkable content you create, you’ll add another stream of e-mail subscribers to your e-mail list.

Sometimes, you’ll get 1 new e-mail subscriber per day. Sometimes 5. Sometimes 10. Over time, these streams will stack on top of each other, and your e-mail list will be growing by hundreds or thousands of e-mail subscribers every month.

Take a look at any online entrepreneur that has 10,000+ e-mail subscribers, and you’ll notice that behind their list growth are tens or hundreds of well-written articles or YouTube videos.

That’s why consistently creating remarkable content is THE #1 strategy that you can use to get to your first 5,000-10,000 e-mail subscribers (and beyond).

On the flip side, NOT creating remarkable content consistently is the easiest way to hit a list-building plateau and never break the 1,000 e-mail subscriber mark.

Remarkable content fuels your business, creates additional layers of traffic, and helps you exponentially grow your e-mail list over time. The more remarkable content you create, the more people will find you, and the faster your e-mail list will grow.

For example, this is how Sam Gavis-Hughson from Byte by Byte grew his e-mail list to over 11,000 e-mail subscribers (and now gets 30-60 new e-mail subscribers a day):

“Creating a lot of really great content is the easiest way to grow your e-mail list. Every blog post, podcast, guest post, etc. you do stacks on top of each other. Eventually, you’ll have posts that generate 10 new leads every day, and you’re getting somewhere.

My list grew because I was creating a lot of growth content, “how do I do X”, that generated a lot of traffic over time (How to crack the coding interview, how to use the book correctly, how to study data structures, 6 questions you need to know to prep for your coding interview)”

But how do you actually create remarkable content?

That’s a question that we’ll answer in this guide, in more detail than you’ll find anywhere online (and over 17,000 words).

You’ll learn:

  • What is Remarkable Content
  • How to use Remarkable Content to build an e-mail list of buyers (not freeloaders)
  • 17 Best Ways to Generate Remarkable Content Ideas
  • How to Organize Your Research into Remarkable Content Ideas
  • How to Find Your Unique Content Voice
  • 13 Proven Strategies for Creating Remarkable Content
  • 3 Elements of a Remarkable Piece of Content
  • 8 Remarkable Content Templates
  • How to Go From an Idea to a Remarkable Piece of Content in 6 Simple Steps

Plus, I’ll guide you through real-world examples for each of the strategies so you can use them in YOUR online business.

Let’s dive in!

What is Remarkable Content?

While some entrepreneurs consider Remarkable Content to be any piece of content that is 2,000-3,000 words long, I don’t believe that just length of content is enough to build an e-mail list today.

Instead, I like to define Remarkable Content as content that’s 10x better than any other piece of content out there on a specific topic.

Creating the definitive, most complete piece of content out there is important if you want to establish yourself as a go-to expert industry and if you want your readers to come back and read more.

It’s like running a restaurant – if your dishes are incredible, people will keep coming back – if not, probably not.

The actual length and depth of content will depend a lot on:

  • How broad the topic you’re writing about is
  • How much competition there is already

For example:

  • If you want to write about how to wear olive chinos, there isn’t a lot of competition, and it’s a fairly narrow topic, which means that a relatively short article like this might be the best piece of content out there.
  • If on the other hand you want to write about building an e-mail list (a lot of competition and broad topic), then it’s almost necessary to create a super in-depth guide like this one to really be able to say that you created the best piece of content out there

That means that the more competitive your industry / topic you’re writing about is, and the broader the topic there is, the more in-depth your piece of content needs to be, and the more work you need to put into it.

On the flip side, if you’re in a niche where there’s practically no competition, you can “get away” with writing less detailed content, thought be wary that someone could start a similar business to you down the line, write better content and “beat you”, so that might not be the smartest long-term strategy.

Therefore, I recommend creating the best possible content that you can create in a given moment every time you sit down to create a new piece of remarkable content.

But how do we actually define “the best content out there?”

There’s a few easy ways to see if you’re on the right track:

  • If the articles you’re getting are receiving a lot of positive comments and shares
  • If your readers are getting results from your articles (and sharing them with you)
  • If your readers are saying “I can’t believe this is free content. It’s too good to be free.”

You’ll know soon enough if your content is good enough or not.

If you write 3-5 pieces of content, and you get a lot of positive feedback, you’re on the right track. If all you hear is crickets, use the strategies in the next section to create better content.

How to use Remarkable Content to build a high-quality e-mail list of buyers (and not freeloaders)

How can you build an e-mail list of people that will be excited to buy your products and services, rather than freeloaders that will get mad at you and unsubscribe from your e-mail list the moment you try to sell them something?

That’s a question I’ve seen many entrepreneurs ask, and the answer it is surprisingly simple:

Create content that attracts your best clients, instead of content that attracts your worst clients.

This can mean:

  • Using language that your best clients use
  • Writing about problems that your best clients face
  • Writing the type of content your best clients love

That’s exactly how online entrepreneur Christina Rebuffet from Speak English With Christina comes up with ideas for her content:

“I ask myself who are my BEST clients, and what questions do THEY have? How can I create content around those questions to attract more of them? For example, I recently created videos on “how to pitch yourself casually” and “promoting your business in a very casual, conversational way”, which were exact questions from a client I enjoy working with.”

Let’s look at 3 different examples of how you can apply this philosophy in action.

Example #1: How to attract clients that are happy to pay you

Let’s say you want to write a blog post about buying a leather jacket.

  • If you write about “5 affordable leather jackets you can buy this fall”, that will likely attract an audience that SEEKS affordable clothes (hence attracting an audience that is less likely to invest a lot of money into working you).
  • On the flip side, if you write about “the difference between a $500 and $2000 leather jacket”, that will attract an audience that has enough money to spend $500-$2000 on a leather jacket (and plenty of money to work with you)

In general, you want to avoid using words like “free, affordable”, or “cheap” if you want to attract buyers – and instead, focus on words like “best” or “premium” to attract people who are willing to spend $$$ to get access to the best of the best.

Example #2: How to attract great clients that won’t seek excuses

Different clients have different problems.

For example, if we think about entrepreneurs, we typically see 2 main groups – entrepreneurs who are “overwhelmed” all the time and find more reasons NOT to work on their business than to work on their business.

And then, we have “action takers” who don’t seek excuses and typically say “just tell me what to do and how to do it and I’ll go and do it”.

These 2 groups of entrepreneurs have completely different problems. If you write about problems of overwhelmed entrepreneurs, you’ll attract more overwhelmed entrepreneurs. If you write about problems of action takers, you’ll attract more action takers.

For example, let’s say I wanted to write a blog post about productivity for online entrepreneurs:

  • If I wrote about “how to stop feeling so overwhelmed all the time”, I’d attract a lot of overwhelmed entrepreneurs that might not be great clients
  • If instead I wrote about “how to build a business on the side of a successful career”, I’m attracting people who are already successful (and more likely to build a successful business as well)

You’ll see me rarely use words like “stuck” or “overwhelmed” in my content. That’s very intentional. I want to attract clients that are more interested in “how do I do X” (like “how do I grow my e-mail list”) than clients who feel stuck and overwhelmed.  

Example #3: How to attract clients that are willing to put in the work

Finally, the type of content also determines the type of clients you attract. The more in-depth your content, the more serious clients you’ll usually attract:

  • If I wrote a 500-word blog post about “5 quick tips for building your e-mail list”, a lot of people might read it or even share it. But how many people will actually implement it, build an e-mail list of thousands of e-mail subscribers and become my clients? Not many.
  • If I instead write a 300-page guide, the readers that read my whole guide will be so much more likely to become my clients (and they’ll likely be willing to put a lot more work than people who just want a quick fix of information but aren’t willing to put in the work).

As I’m writing guides like these, I always get a few e-mails from people saying that “these are too long” and they “don’t have the time to read them”. And then I look at their websites, and they only have a handful of e-mail subscribers because they’re making all the mistakes they could avoid by reading the guide.

I never try to convince them to read my guides, because honestly, if they can’t read a guide that’s still shorter than a book about the topic that’s the life and blood of their business, they probably aren’t willing to put in the work to build a successful online business anyway.

On the flip side, my best clients happily devour what I write, put it into action and get results.

But how can you know who your “best clients” are?

If you don’t have any clients yet…

Just start paying attention.

When you’re having Casual Conversations or Welcome Calls with your clients, which of them would you be excited to work with?

Which of them put a lot of thought into the questions they ask you? Which of them take the advice from your blog posts, implement you and let you know about it? Which of them are action takers?

Start focusing on having more and more conversations with those readers, and writing remarkable content that attracts more readers like them.

If you already have a few (or more) clients…

You probably already know who they are.

You know which clients you enjoy working with the most, and which of them get the best results.

When you use the strategies from this chapter (like the Best Client Audit) for coming up with remarkable content ideas, focus specifically on the questions your Best Clients ask you, and answering them in your content.

On the flip side, resist the temptation of writing content for your worst clients (even if you get a lot of questions from them).

Create content that your best clients would love reading, and you’ll attract more of them.

It’s that simple.

17 best ways to come up with remarkable content ideas

Now that you know WHO to create your content for (your best clients), let’s look at a number of specific, proven ways with which you can generate remarkable content ideas.

I included 17 different strategies here that you can “pick and choose” and find ones that work best for you.

Think of it as a buffet dinner – pick the strategies that feel exciting to you, and don’t worry about the others.

My goal is to provide you with a handful of strategies that you can keep using to generate remarkable content ideas over and over again, and to always have a list of creative ways to generate more ideas to fall back on.

Strategy #1: Rapid Research Week

Instead of just coming up with ideas in your head, it’s wise to spend some time finding Problems Worth Solving from your audience.

Many of the strategies we’ll talk about in this section include some sort of customer research to find this Problems Worth Solving (from casual conversations with your e-mail subscribers to reading through communities and reading amazon reviews of popular books in your industry).

This research is instrumental to creating remarkable content, but there’s also a danger of unnecessarily spending TOO MUCH time in research and spinning you wheels.

I’ve found that the best way to combat this is to limit research to a short and intense period of time.

I call that approach The Rapid Research Week.

The idea is simple.

Instead of constantly doing research, you take 10-20 hours in one week and condense all of your research into it (you can apply the following strategies from this guide during this time period).

Then, after a week of intense research, you’ll have plenty of ideas for months and months of remarkable content, until you feel like you exhausted your list of ideas or start talking about a new topic.

At that point, you can simply go through the Rapid Research Week again to generate ideas for a few more months of content.

Strategy #2: Casual Conversations

In an earlier chapter of this guide about finding Problems Worth Solving, I mentioned that you should start “casual conversations” with your e-mail subscribers that respond to your welcome e-mails after they sign up to your e-mail list.

These casual conversations can be a gold mine of new ideas to write content about, as you can start creating remarkable content around questions from your audience.

That’s actually how I came up with the idea for this guide. I noticed that a lot of my e-mail subscribers were asking me how to build an e-mail list or how to grow their blog audience through conversations like this one:

And some of my readers kept sending me questions about list-building:

I kept track of all of those questions, and later on used them to create the outline for this guide.

If you don’t know where to start, the questions you receive from your e-mail subscribers as a response to your Welcome E-mail will provide you with an endless stream of new remarkable content ideas.

Strategy #3: Welcome Calls

The second strategy we covered in the chapter on finding Problems Worth Solving was doing Welcome Calls with your e-mail subscribers, to get to know them better.

Gabriela Pereira from DIY MFA did exactly that to come up with her first remarkable content ideas:

“Initially I just jumped on calls with new e-mail subscribers. I asked them what they were up to, what they were doing. I built a lot of great connections and got a lot of research done that way.”

Doing “things that don’t scale” and taking the time to meet your e-mail subscribers can be great for creating raving fans that help you spread the word about your business, while getting access to a massive bank of Problems Worth Solving that you can create remarkable content about.

If you want to learn more about Welcome Calls, make sure you read my article about Problems Worth Solving where I cover how to schedule these calls, and the exact questions to ask during them in a lot more detail.

Strategy #4: Welcome Survey

Once you start getting tens of e-mail subscribers every day and receiving more responses to your welcome e-mails than you can handle, you might consider switching the “what are you struggling with?” question with a welcome survey.

This is exactly what Rusty Gray from Rusty Animator does in his welcome e-mail:

He takes his readers to a survey:

And asks them the following questions:

  • What animation level would you say you are at right now?
  • What do you need the most help with in animation – right now?
  • Why do you need the most help with it?
  • What has your #1 challenge been in improving your animation skills?

This survey easily helps him extract the Problems Worth Solving from his audience that he can then create remarkable content around.

Strategy #5: Blog Comments

Once you start getting some comments on your blog on the content you publish, you can start using the questions from those comments as ideas for your remarkable content.

Here’s a recent example from my blog:

This question from my reader Laury is what sparked the idea for the first section of this very chapter of my guide.

Don’t worry if you’re not getting many comments on your blog once you’re still building up your website traffic.

Until then, you can use the other strategies to come up with remarkable content ideas – and once the comments do start coming in, you’ll just have an additional way of collecting ideas for your content.

Strategy #6: Research Survey

Every time I start talking about a new topic on my blog, one of the first things I do to gauge interest and get a solid foundation of Problems Worth Solving is send out a survey to my existing e-mail subscribers.

That’s exactly what I did to write this very guide.

I sent out this simple and short e-mail to my e-mail subscribers:

That included a link to this survey:

In the survey, I asked the following questions:

  • How important is growing your e-mail list in your business on a scale of 1-10?
  • How big is your e-mail list right now?
  • Why is growing your e-mail list important for your business?
  • What is the HARDEST thing about growing your e-mail list?
  • How do you FEEL about growing your e-mail list right now?
  • How did you try growing your e-mail list in the past? What worked and what didn’t?
  • What kind of a resource would make growing your e-mail list 10x easier?

This is a very thorough survey, and I’m ok with trading less responses for higher quality and depth of responses.

If your e-mail list is smaller than 1,000 e-mail subscribers, I might opt for a shorter survey and just focus on 2-3 most relevant questions (I’d probably focus on questions 3,4 and 6 from the questions above).

Sending out a survey like this can get you a lot of detailed responses to help you come up with targeted remarkable content ideas around a single topic (as well as discover industry “myths” if you ask questions like “what worked and what didn’t work” and see patterns there).

Strategy #7: What do you want to learn about?

An incredible simple and effective strategy comes from Luke McIntosh from Become a Bassist:

“I went into reddit and production forums, and said “I’ve been playing bass guitar for 20 years, what do you want to learn?”. People LOVE telling you what they have a problem with.”

While places like reddit might not be ideal for promoting your content, they can be an amazing place to do customer research.

Asking a simple question like Luke did in online communities within your industry can be a phenomenal way of generating a flood of remarkable content ideas.

Strategy #8: Hot Topics in Online Communities and Q & A Sites

Another great thing you can do in online communities and Q & A sites like Facebook groups, forums, Reddit and Quora is to look for popular questions and “hot topics”, and create content around those.

In Reddit, there are often “there are no stupid questions” threads that you can search through for remarkable content ideas:

And you can create content around “Hot Topics” that create a big EMOTIONAL response from your readers. If there is a lot of confusion or frustration around a certain topic, that might be a great opportunity for you to create a new piece of remarkable content and take that frustration away.

A great example is a topic of “modes and scales” in learning bass guitar:

This is a hot, frustrating topic for many bass guitar players (if you search for similar threads on reddit, you’ll find a lot of confusion and frustration like “I can’t wrap my head around this topic!”), as well as lengthy discussions around these topics, which are great indicators of Hot Topics and Content Gaps.

Luke McIntosh took advantage of this frustration and created one of his most effective lead magnets around that exact topic.

Working through topics on Quora can be another great way to come up with questions to answer (here’s an example of recent questions about freelancing):

And as a nice added bonus, once you create remarkable content around a topic you found on Quora, you can go back to the question and promote it through a detailed answer (as mentioned in the content promotion chapter of this guide).

If you’re a part of Facebook groups or forums in your industry, you can always keep an eye for questions that get a lot of “I have that same problem too!” comments to find remarkable content ideas.

Strategy #9: The Content Gap

Sara Kirsch from Marketing is Not Selling does a lot of her research through Facebook groups, and uses them to come up with remarkable content ideas:

“I look at questions that are being asked, and people aren’t giving great answers to / there are a lot of conflicting answers. That’s where the content gap is.”

Finding the “Content Gap” of questions that aren’t getting great responses is a great way to come up with remarkable content ideas.

Another great way to find the Content Gap is to pay attention to what you think someone “should” create (and then go ahead and create it).

This is exactly what Karen Dudek-Brannan did to come up with her remarkable content ideas:

“I noticed that a lot of speech pathologists had trouble with teaching kids with language disorders like having a hard time with reading or spelling. It’s one of the areas where the advice was really confusing, there was no one way to do it, and everyone was saying a different thing. That’s what I wrote blog posts about.”

The more people that have the same question (and the less high-quality answers), the bigger the opportunity it is for you to create a piece of content that will help you attract more readers to your website.

Strategy #10: Follow Up Questions

Another thing Sara Kirsch does while she looks for questions through Facebook communities is that she follows up with the people who ask questions individually:

“I reach out to people personally who ask questions I can help with. I tell them that if they have any extra questions, to shoot me an e-mail and I’ll happily answer them for them.”

This can be another great way to start a Casual Conversation with new potential readers (or even an alternative way to schedule Welcome Calls with them).

There’s no better way of coming up with remarkable content ideas than to directly talk to people you’d love working with in the future and seeing which questions you can answer for them.

Strategy #11: Common Myths

As you’re looking through different online communities for popular questions, you might notice some questions where people give bad advice as their answers.

That’s how you can spot common “industry myths” that you can then address in your content.

For example, through my research for this guide I found that a lot of people say that “it doesn’t matter how detailed your lead magnet is” – and I debunked that myth in the chapter on creating an EPIC Lead Magnet. I could also write a dedicated post about “why a simple checklist isn’t a good enough lead magnet” on my website.

Another great place to spot industry myths is in surveys you send out to your audience. By asking a question like “what have you tried doing to solve this problem in the past, what worked and what didn’t?”, you can spot additional myths (and find proof for them) that you can create remarkable content around.

For example, when I surveyed my e-mail subscribers around how they tried growing their e-mail list in the past, I got plenty of responses like this:

Having been on many podcast myself, I know that podcasting CAN be very hit or miss, and that there are nuances to finding podcasts that will actually help you grow your e-mail list.

That’s something I could address in a future chapter of this guide about using podcasts to grow your e-mail list.

You can also spend some time thinking about common myths and misconceptions you’ve heard in your industry (or myths you believed in, but later realized were just myths) – like “you can’t lose fat if you eat a lot of carbs / fat in the fitness world).

Debunking myths can be a great way to create remarkable content, as we’ll discover later on in this guide when we talk about different types of remarkable content.

Strategy #12: Unfollow the Experts

If you’re trying to create unique, original content, closely following the other experts in your industry can be one of the biggest traps in your way.

That’s exactly what happened to Peter Nguyen from Essential Man:

“I used to read about what everyone else is doing, follow them on Instagram, etc. The problem is that instead of creating original content I wrote about stuff everyone was writing. Instead I unsubscribed from their newsletters and social media. I looked at the unsolved problems of my audience / content gaps.”

Browsing and consuming what other people are saying won’t help you come up with unique, original content.

Instead, focus on finding the “content gaps” in what the experts are NOT saying (and that your potential customers are struggling with). Spend more time talking to your potential readers, analyzing your research notes, and taking long walks to find and fill new content gaps.

Strategy #13: Content Audit

Once you already created 10-20 pieces of content, you can do an audit of all the content on your blog or YouTube channel to find out which content performed best, and how you can create more of it.

For example, Luke McIntosh does this regularly:

“I regularly do a channel audit on my YouTube channel: I check my videos for most views, top retention, and longest watch times to analyze what’s working best. I do the same for my blog – I look at blog posts with most traffic, most time on page, and highest converting opt-ins.”

You can look through your existing content to find:

  • Hot Topics: Do some topics attract more readers than others? If yes, how could you create more content around them?
  • Hot Formats: Do certain types of content do better than others? For example, do guides do better than blog posts, or does a specific type of a YouTube video work best?

It makes sense to do a content audit every quarter or so to get closer and closer to knowing what REALLY makes your audience tick.

Strategy #14: Best Client Audit

An amazing strategy I learned from my friend Marc Aarons is creating content that will attract more of your best clients.

A great way to generate new remarkable content ideas, especially once you’re already working with your clients regularly, is to do a “Client Audit” for your best clients.

You can create a list of all the questions they ever asked you through:

  • E-mail exchanges
  • Facebook messenger or Whatsapp
  • Online courses
  • Coaching calls
  • Customer Research Calls

To get a clear idea of what kind of content to attract to get more clients like them.

For example, I run a 6-month coaching program for 5-6 figure entrepreneurs called The Top Performer, and I love working with my clients in the program.

For each of the weekly calls, we have an “agenda” document where my clients write down their burning questions they have that week.

To create a new content strategy for my business, I simply went through a few months of agendas and collected a vault of questions from my best clients.

You can do the same in your business – pick a few of your best clients, review your past interactions with them, and use these to create new ideas for your remarkable content.

Strategy #15: What am I nerding out on right now?

When I talked to Christina Rebuffet from Speak English With Christina about how she keeps coming up with content ideas that she loves creating YouTube videos about, she said:

“I’m a big language and culture geek, never get bored with topics”

While a lot of the strategies that we shared in this chapter focus on our audience and their questions, it sometimes sense to talk about things you are extremely interested in.

If you obsessively read 20 books about a subject that interested you, if there’s something you have a unique perspective on, or if there’s something you just can’t stop talking about with your clients, you can turn that into your next remarkable piece of content.

Strategy #16: Amazon Reviews

Nagina Abdullah from Masala Body did a lot of her initial research to come up with remarkable content ideas by reading through Amazon reviews of popular books in her industry:

“I looked at amazon reviews of weight loss books, and healthy recipes. I paid attention to what people LIKED, what they wanted MORE of. I noticed that women needed STRUCTURE, telling them WHAT TO DO.”

This helped her choose a format for her remarkable content that her audience loved (super step-by-step posts and recipes that told her audience exactly what to do).

For example, if Sam Gavis-Hughson went through Amazon reviews of the book Cracking the Coding Interview (a popular book in his industry), he could find reviews like this one:

Which could help him create content that teaches you HOW to think during the coding interviews (rather than just WHAT to think).

Amazon Reviews can be great ways to identify Content Gaps in your industry – so take the time to go through a few popular books and see what else you could talk about that other experts aren’t talking about yet, or how you can talk about it differently / better than everyone else.

Strategy #17: Expert Interviews

The final strategy I’d like to share in this section of the guide is the very strategy I used to write this guide.

As you might have noticed, this guide is insanely detailed, well-researched and filled with different real-life examples of everything from content research techniques to lead magnets to opt-in copy.

I collected the majority of the research for this guide by interviewing 20 entrepreneurs with sizable e-mail lists, taking notes during their interviews (and transcribing some of them), and compiling all of their advice into this guide.

Not only did this allow me to create this guide (that’ll probably be as long as 20-30 long blog posts), it also gives me plenty of research for a year of writing about list-building (if I choose to do that).

Whenever you’d like to immerse yourself into a new topic and get more data, stories to back up your claims or sticky ideas to include in your content, you can reach out to experts in your industry, ask to interview them about a certain topic, and promise to feature them in your content.

Here’s how I did that for this guide.

First, I sent the experts I wanted to interview a quick e-mail asking them if they’d be up for the interview (I already knew many of them personally through years of building relationships):

And then, if they responded positively to this e-mail, I sent them additional details around the interview process:

This is a great strategy to pursue if you already have a sizable network of experts in your industry (or, you could even use this strategy to get on the radar or build relationships with experts you’d like to connect with).

Sticky Idea Matrix: How to organize your research into remarkable content ideas

If you use even a handful of the strategies from the previous section, you’ll likely end up with tens (or hundreds) of content ideas.

As you initially collect your ideas, I recommend just throwing them in a massive notebook / Evernote or Google Document. It will be messy, but at least you’ll have all of your ideas in one place.

Alternatively, you could have one big notebook with different notes for each of the research techniques.

That’s exactly what I did for my Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List. I created a dedicated notebook for the guide where I created a dedicated note for each of the interviews (or other research methods I used):

These notes are rather messy. They’re pages and pages long, and look something like this:

As you can see, I mainly pulled interesting quotes / points from the interviews I did, knowing they would become Building Blocks for my guide.

This step of organizing research is typically fairly easy – as it just involves correcting information.

The next step is trickier – and could make your head hurt a bit (I know I had quite a few headaches putting this guide together, mainly due to the hundreds of pages of research). The good news is that once you go through the next step, you’ll have your ideas neatly organized and you can use them to create remarkable content for months, or even a whole year.

As a next step to really organize my research, I like to:

  • Organize my ideas by topic
  • Turn them into sticky ideas
  • Connect them to Problems Worth Solving

I like to do that by going through all of my research notes and organizing them into one massive spreadsheet, which I call the Sticky Idea Matrix.

Here’s what a Sticky Idea Matrix looks like:

You’ll notice that each row is organized into:

  • The Sticky Idea: A simple “name” for the idea (the name here isn’t final)
  • “What it is”: This is where I copy paste the research / quotes from my notes
  • Problem it solves: Here, I’ll write specific Problems Worth Solving
  • Credit: This is optional – but it allows me to quickly pull notes if I need more context on these ideas

Finally, I’ll organize these ideas by topics:

For example, in my spreadsheet:

  • Rows 3-40 were “Business Idea Validation”
  • Rows 41-57 were “Moments of Traction”
  • Rows 58-79 were “Customer Research”
  • Etc.

As you can see, these align pretty well with the chapters of this guide – so when I was writing a specific chapter, I would just pull the ideas from this matrix to combine them into a detailed outline for the chapter.

I’ve found that this system worked extremely well for me, though you could use a different system as well:

  • Paper notebooks
  • OneNote
  • Trello
  • Paper Mind Maps
  • Evernote
  • …

There are a million different systems out there for organizing research out there. I suggest trying a few of them and creating a custom system for yourself that works for YOU.

What’s important is that:

  • You create Sticky Ideas for your remarkable content: This will help your readers remember and share your content
  • You connect your Sticky Ideas with Problems Worth Solving: This will help you create content that connects with your audience.

Here’s a simple example:

  • Problem Worth Solving: “How do I organize my research notes?”
  • Sticky Idea: Sticky Idea Matrix

And voila, this chapter of this guide was born (which could just as well be a separate piece of content).

How to find your unique Content Voice

There’s no “one proven way” to create Remarkable Content.

That’s because we’re all so different, have different strengths and interests, different industries… And an approach that might work for me might not work for you.

For example:

  • I love writing 50,000+ word guides like this one as I love the challenge (but you might hate the idea of writing as much content)
  • James Altucher is amazing at sharing vulnerable stories in his content (that many people would never dare sharing)
  • Jenni Waldrop uses a lot of dramatic and entertaining storytelling in her content, which makes her content stand out from everything else in her industry

The general rule for finding your “content voice” is:

  • Find out which content is in your Genius Zone: Try out the following strategies and see which of them you’re good at and you really enjoy doing
  • Create an amplified version of yourself: If you tend to make jokes, go over the top with how many jokes you make. If you like writing long stuff, go to the extremes and write REALLY long guides like this one

We love following extremes that stand out from the crowd, so when you find your “thing”, try to use it as much as possible in your content.

Another great example of finding a unique angle is Nagina Abdullah, who uses spices as her way to differentiate herself from all other weight-loss bloggers:

“I got to the idea of spices by putting my message in the world and experimenting. I heavily guest posted in the beginning, from articles to smaller blogs to larger publications, and pitched an article to Mind Body Green about “These 5 spices helped me lose 40lbs”..  After they accepted it, I got 1500 new e-mail subscribers in 48 hours. After I worked so hard for 10-20 subscribers with every post I wrote, this finally paid off.

That’s when i had a lightbulb moment, that this was an interesting topic. People LOVED the spice idea – I later got featured in FOX news, and everyone started talking about spices which were really interesting to people. It was just PART of my method before, not the HIGHLIGHT of the method. After this happened, I started talking about spices more and more and more.

Just like Nagina, you can experiment with different approaches and angles until you find one that catches traction, and then stick with it.

13 proven strategies for creating Remarkable Content

Now, let’s look at 13 strategies for creating remarkable content that you can experiment with.

Strategy #1: Avoid the “Content Pet Peeves”

When I talked to Will Darling from EDMtips about how he creates his YouTube videos that helped him get to over 10,000 e-mail subscribers, he shared a brilliant strategy for creating remarkable content with me:

“I would look at other YouTube videos with lots of views, look at the comments, and take notes how to make my videos on the same topic better. I would answer any unanswered questions, but make my answers short and concise.

I would cut out all the fluff from my videos because I noticed a lot of people on reddit / YouTube say “the content starts at 1 minute”, “this guy rambles too much”, etc. – that told me to be concise in the videos. I would speed edit and reduce rambling to a minimum. I just focused on great content. “How can you give people the MOST value in 5 minutes?”

Based on my research, the biggest pet peeves were that “people just ramble and beat around the bush, and don’t get to the point quick enough”. This lead me to fast edits and cutting out the unnecessary time between phrases. Keep in mind that an audience of 20 year olds loves “action movie” type YouTube videos, but if your audience is in the 60s they might be more chill, so you’ll have to listen to their feedback.”

Places like YouTube comments and blog comments can be great places to study the existing comments, while places like Reddit or even asking your e-mail list are great places to ask questions like “what are your biggest pet peeves when it comes to electronic music tutorials?”. The “amazon reviews” strategy from the previous section of this guide is also a great way to find the pet peeves of your audience.

For example, this thread on Reddit has 800+ comments about what people hate on YouTube, and it’s well worth reading for anyone that wants to build their e-mail list through YouTube.

Take note of the biggest pet peeves, and then create content in a way that addresses the pet peeves.

If people hate short content without examples, add in a lot of examples into your content. If they hate rambling, religiously edit your content to cut out all the rambling (and just keep the “action-packed” parts).

Strategy #2: Draw inspiration from Nachos Recipes

Peter Nguyen draws his inspiration for creating remarkable content from well-written recipes:

“I noticed that many experts in my industry aren’t necessarily great teachers. I decided to get better at teaching to gain an advantage. I use great recipes for cooking as an inspiration for my content, as they give me ideas how to teach well.”

Studying great teachers and applying their methods to creating your content can be a great way to learn how to write better content.

For example, I love this nachos recipe as it addresses questions like “how to avoid soggy nachos” and “which chips are best for nachos”, which most recipes typically don’t address.

I also really liked this poached eggs recipe that breaks down all the common approaches for making poached eggs, common mistakes people usually make, definitively answers questions like “should I put vinegar in the water”, and tells you what REALLY matters (like having fresh eggs from a farm).

Take a look at some of your favorite teachers (it could be bloggers, authors, public speakers, YouTubers… ), study how they teach, and apply their teaching methods to your content to make it remarkable.

Strategy #3: How can I teach this to my younger brother?

Another proven strategy for creating remarkable content is to think about how you would explain your idea to your younger brother (like Peter Nguyen from Essential Man):

“There are a lot of articles in my industry even I can’t understand as a stylist. If I can explain my content to my younger brother I’m already winning.”

Or by thinking about how you could teach a certain subject in 4 days (like Danny Margulies from Freelance to Win):

“If a family member asked me “teach me how to write copy in 4 days”, how would I do it? What would I tell them? I write out the exact steps, and turn them into a blog post. When someone approaches me with a new problem, I think about how to solve this problem, and write it down.”

Thinking about how to teach your content in the most granular, easy to understand way will give you a huge advantage over experts that just “share their knowledge” in articles full of jargon, that few people can understand.

The more people that understand your content, the more people can benefit from it, and the more likely they are to share it with their friends.

Strategy #4: Create content that can’t be copied

Another great way to create remarkable content is by creating content that’s so good and unique that it can’t be copied.

A great example of such content is Peter Nguyen’s blog post about what a mean should wear on a first date, which is one of the most popular posts on his website:

“What worked best for me for list-building is posts that were long and epic AND had a narrative or a story that couldn’t be copied. An example is my dating post. I talked to women at a party about what they thought a man should wear on a first date, and got a great response. I then surveyed 100+ of my friends and readers about what they thought and wrote a post about it. The winning combination seems to be STORY + QUALITY + DEPTH.”

If you ever get a crazy idea (like “I should interview 20 experts to write a guide about list-building”, or “I should interview 100 womens about what a man should wear on a first date”), make it happen!

Content that’s unique, different, and requires a lot of effort will perform better than an article that you put together in just a few hours.

If you think about a piece of content and think to yourself “wow, this would be super interesting, but would require a ton of work to do it right”… you’re on the right track to creating a truly remarkable piece of content.

Strategy #5: The Buzzfeed Strategy

Another great content creation strategy from Peter Nguyen is The Buzzfeed Strategy:

“When I want to create interesting content, I start looking for clickbait. For example, Buzzfeed creates great videos that capture your attention, and while their headlines are “clickbait”, they always deliver on the promise. For example, I saw an accent coach for films break down 42 accents from actors, and explain why some of the accents work and why others don’t. Then I thought about how to apply that to my content.”

This is a great strategy to come up with interesting content. I personally love their “Worth it” videos that compare things like $1 sushi with $133 sushi. Now that’s interesting.

You could think about how to apply similar ideas to your content:

  • If you’re a skiing coach, you can compare $200 skis with $1,000 skis
  • If you’re a stylist, you can compare a $500 leather jacket with a $2,000 leather jacket
  • If you’re a guitar coach, you can compare a $200 guitar with a $2,000 guitar

… and those are just ideas based on ONE type of Buzzfeed’s videos.

Be warned as you use this strategy though – there is a danger of going down the rabbit hole and binging on their content for hours and hours on end… So this might be a strategy best employed AFTER you’ve done your work for the day ;).

Strategy #6: Create content that’s never been done before

Danny Margulies shared another interesting content creation strategy with me:

“A lot of people in my industry are just copying each other, if I read the top 5 blog posts on the subject, they all sound the same. When I create my content, I use my imagination and ask myself, how can I do things in a way that hasn’t been done before?”

This is the exact strategy I used to write this guide.

When I looked at existing content on list-building, I saw a lot of content that shared “5 steps to growing your e-mail list” or “how to get to 1,000 e-mail subscribers”. These articles were typically super broad / surface level, and I knew that they weren’t enough to really get the results they promise (most people that read the articles probably won’t actually succeed in building an e-mail list).

I saw a lot of articles that talked about lead magnets and opt-in copy and why “they’re important and you should have them”, but very few of them actually went into a lot of detail on HOW to write great opt-in copy or create a killer lead magnet. If there were examples, nobody really explained WHY they worked and the principles behind them.

Finally, there were articles about “73 ways to grow your e-mail list”, which I thought were cute. Sure, there were a lot of “ideas” in the articles, but there was practically zero implementation instructions. “Go on Instagram” or “Go on Pinterest” isn’t exactly advice that will help you build an e-mail list of 10,000+ e-mail subscribers.

Even though there is a lot of content out there on list-building, I didn’t think that much of it would actually work. I couldn’t find even one piece of content that:

  • Would talk about EVERY key step of list-building (including finding a profitable business idea, which is something that everyone seems to be ignore, but is a foundational step of building your e-mail list)
  • Would go DEEP on each of the subjects (like how to create an epic lead magnet or write opt-in copy)
  • Would be backed on REAL data and examples of online entrepreneurs (rather than just “ideas” for list-building)

That’s why I decided to interview 20 entrepreneurs about list-building for 60 minutes each, spent 2 months collecting and organizing research, and another 2 months writing this guide – so I could create the absolute best research that’s backed by data, insanely comprehensive, and by far the most useful piece of content on list-building out there.

Of course you don’t have to approach your content with the same rigour as I do – but you should always think about ways in which you can present the same content in a different, better way than everyone else.

For example, you can look at:

  • Danny Margulies’s blog post about “top 8 Upwork mistakes”: It’s filled with screenshots, scripts and examples
  • Peter Nguyen’s Essential Fall Style Guide: It includes outfit ideas, exact clothing items to wear, and detailed explanations behind why you should wear cashmere sweaters
  • Nagina Abdullah’s healthy frozen meals for weight loss: Even the topic of this blog post is different than most fitness blogs – but the way Nagina delivers on it is even better – she works through each of the meals, gives specific brand recommendations, and breaks down the nutrition facts behind each of the meals

There’s no “one rule” for creating content that’s unique and different – and no wrong way of doing it. Whenever you get an idea for writing something different, test it out and see how your audience resonates with it. If they like it, write more of it!

Strategy #7: Tell Powerful Stories

Another great strategy for creating remarkable content comes from Vickie Gould is to create content that moves your readers:

“Whenever I write something for my audience, I focus on EDUCATION + MOTIVATION + INSPIRATION. I give people something for their head (useful frameworks) and for their heart (powerful stories).”

When you create content for your readers, focus on more than just the “how to”. The content that will really move your readers and connect them with you is content that will make them FEEL something and trigger emotions in them.

Specifically, when you create your content, focus on:

  • The Tangible Outcomes for your readers (and their dreams and aspirations)
  • The Problems Worth Solving (and the pain surrounding them)

The best way you can do that is through telling powerful stories. It could be your own stories, stories from your clients, or other stories you’ve heard.

If you share a powerful story with your audience, they won’t just learn a new framework, they’ll also have a reason to implement it.

Here’s a great example from Peter Nguyen’s article about what to wear on a first date:

As you read his story about his first date with his girlfriend, you can’t help yourself but think “I want that too!” and start feeling all warm and fuzzy.

Especially if you consider yourself a great storyteller (or people tell you that you are one), you should sprinkle your stories throughout your content to make it resonate better with your readers.

Strategy #8: The Action Movie Strategy

Another great strategy we briefly touched on earlier is the “Action Movie Strategy” from Will Darling:

I would cut out all the fluff from my videos because I noticed a lot of people on reddit / YouTube say “the content starts at 1 minute”, “this guy rambles too much”, etc. – that told me to be concise in the videos. I would speed edit and reduce rambling to a minimum. I just focused on great content. “How can you give people the MOST value in 5 minutes?”. My videos then became almost like action movies.”

Here’s a great example of one of his videos on “How to rearrange your music in under 5 minutes” – he focuses on keeping the most important information in his video while cutting out everything else.

You’ll notice that a lot of popular YouTubers use this strategy to create YouTube videos that are interesting from the first to the very last second. They edit out all the fluff and just leave in the most interesting parts (often with a lot of overexaggerations and interruptions that keep you paying attention).

If you’re using YouTube to create your content and you target a younger audience, this fast-paced type of content will be a great content type to try out.

If you’re writing blog posts instead, you can also experiment with making your blog posts extremely tight (but still valuable), like Cal Newport or Seth Godin.

Be warned though – while creating shorter and punchier content might be good for YouTube, there is a lot more short blog posts written – so you might have a lot of competition there.

You should also think about your Zone of Genius here – are you better at creating succinct or ultra-deep content? Pick the type that works better for you (for me, it’s 100x easier to write a 50,000+ word guide than a 500-word “to the point artile”).

Strategy #9: Content Binges

Another great way to create remarkable content is to create content that you audience can “binge” on, like Luke McIntosh:

“I like creating grouped content of series people will binge on, so they keep watching it for hours and hours”.

For example, you’ll notice that Luke organizes his content into playlists on his YouTube channel:

He has different content around improvisation, music theory, bass lines… So anyone that’s interested in any of those topics can “binge” on 10+ videos to deepen their understanding of a specific topic, rather than binging on Game of Thrones.

Another great example of binge-worthy content are Jenni Waldrop’s “six-minute makeovers” of Etsy Shops:

Jenni created tens of 6-minute videos that each teach her followers a lesson on growing their Etsy shop (together with a “real-world” example of an Etsy Shop).

As you’re thinking about creating remarkable content, think about different “content binges” you could create for your audience that they’ll love watching and reading for hours on end.

You can also combine this strategy with the “Buzzfeed Strategy”, and look at Buzzfeed’s binge-worthy series (there are plenty of them):

Strategy #10: BIG Ideas

Sam Gavis-Hughson likes to build his content around big ideas:

“Every time I create an e-book or an online product, I try to come up with one core IDEA. For example, my e-book about dynamic programming includes the “FAST” framework which I reference all the time”.

Here’s an example of his FAST framework:

When you’re creating content, don’t just share “advice” or “solutions” – you’ll be missing out on ways for people to remember you and your ideas, and share your content content with their friends.

Instead, go the extra mile and include Sticky Ideas in your content (you should always have at least one sticky idea in every piece of content you create if possible).

Strategy #11: Quick Wins

One of the best ways to create remarkable content that people share with others is to create content that gets your readers results, like Danny Margulies:

“I want people to read a blog post and get a WIN. It could be inspiration, confidence, a result, or knowing how to do something.”

If you can bring your audience Tangible Results with your content, they’ll happily keep coming back (and will more likely buy your products or services).

A great example that comes to mind are Ramit Sethi’s scripts for negotiating credit card fees – you can get on the phone with a bank and save yourself hundreds of dollars within minutes by just following his advice from free blog posts.

If you include scripts, tips or techniques in your content that can bring your readers tangible results within a few minutes (or a reasonably short period of time), you’ll quickly build rapport with your new readers and turn them into Raving Fans as they’ll think “wow, this really works! What else can I learn from him/her?”.

Strategy #12: Power Ups

We can take the idea of Quick Wins even further through the concept of “Power Ups”.

If you ever played super mario kart (or any arcade racing video game), you might be familiar with Power Ups you can pick up throughout the tracks and make your racer stronger:

In Mario Kart’s example, this might be anything from bananas you can place on the floor to make your opponents spin to mushrooms you can pick up to make you go faster.

The idea behind these power ups is simple. They make your racer more powerful.

You can apply the idea of Power Ups to your content as well, and make your content 10x better.

You can do that by making sure you attach a Power Up to every lesson that you teach in your blog post or YouTube video.

A Power Up could be a:

  • Script
  • Technique
  • Spreadsheet
  • Template
  • Video tutorial
  • System
  • Formula
  • Case Study
  • Story
  • Framework
  • Screenshot
  • Graphic
  • Infographic
  • …or something else

For example:

  • Don’t just write about negotiation. Include a negotiation script.
  • Don’t just talk about what kind of leather jacket to buy. Include a shopping list.
  • Don’t just shoot a video about principles of editing music. Record yourself editing a song.

Whenever you’re not sure how to make a piece of content 10x better, including a Power Up for every lesson you teach is a bulletproof way to make your content more remarkable.

Strategy #13: Ask for Feedback

If you exhausted all the strategies above and still can’t think of ways to make a specific piece of content better, you can ask your readers for feedback.

You could do that by sending your readers an e-mail about a piece of content you recently published like I did about this guide:

Or by asking your readers / friends / clients in your target audience to jump on a Skype call with you, where you can show them your piece of content, ask them to read it, and then ask them to share ways in which you could improve it.

Asking for feedback is a great strategy to make your content better, especially when you’re not really sure HOW to make it better.

3 elements of a Remarkable Piece of Content

Before we take a deep dive into how to write (or record, if you’re planning on creating YouTube videos) a remarkable piece of content, let’s first talk about how to structure your content.

If we look at any remarkable piece of content out there that’s optimized to help you maximally grow your e-mail list, we’ll see that it has 3 key elements:

  • The hook
  • The meat
  • The CTA*

*CTA = “call to action”

The Hook

The hook are the first few words / paragraphs of your content. The sole purpose of the hook is to “hook” your readers and entice them to go through your content (rather than closing the page).

I recommend you start out with one of the two simple types of hooks:

  • The Story Hook
  • The SEO Hook

These two hooks are fairly simple to write, and over time, you can find out which types of hooks you prefer using.

The Story Hook is a bit more creative and fun, but can also be harder to write if you don’t have a lot of experience with storytelling.

The SEO Hook is more formulaic (and potentially better for SEO, which might benefit you down the line), but can feel a bit dryer to write.

The Story Hook

The Story Hook boils down to sharing a short story (either your personal story, a story of one of your clients, an anecdote, or even a story behind certain research…) that’s related to the content you’ll be writing.

For example, here’s a story hook from Peter Nguyen’s article about what to wear on the first date that we already saw earlier:

This one is easy – it’s a story from Peter’s first date, in an article about what to wear at a first date.

Danny Margulies takes a more difficult approach in his blog post about “8 upwork proposal mistakes”:

Instead of talking about a story when he made a horrible mistake in his proposal (which would be a perfectly fine approach), he starts off with a story of a competitive hot-dog eater, and makes a case for “working smarter, not harder”, which is a theme he maintains throughout his article.

The final example comes from Nagina Abdullah’s article about “best coffee creamer for weight loss”, where she shares a personal story about a French vanilla coffee creamer, and then ties it into weight loss:

Nagina often uses short personal stories that are just 1-2 paragraphs long to connect with her readers in her blog posts, and you can use a similar approach to hook your readers as well.

“But how do you tell a great story?”

The main purpose of a great story is to make your readers feel like they’re there with you.

And while storytelling is something that takes years to master, here are 6 quick questions you can use to tell better stories.

When you think of a specific story you want to tell, think about…

  • What did you say
  • What you thought
  • How you felt
  • What you saw
  • What you smelled
  • What you heard

For example, instead of just saying “I used to drink creamers in my coffee”, Nagina said:

“I used to worship my French vanilla coffee creamer. It was an experience of sweetness and comfort, a feeling of satisfaction and decadence that I got to indulge in every single morning.”

Notice how she talks about her memories, the taste, and the feeling surrounding the coffee creamers (that many of her readers can resonate with).

If you feel like you aren’t a great storyteller, that shouldn’t be a reason not to use story hooks in your content. They might not be perfect from the start, but the only way you can get better is with practice.

The SEO Hook

The SEO Hook is a type of a hook that will benefit you in the future if you choose to use SEO as a growth strategy for your e-mail list.

While you don’t really need to learn about SEO until you have 5,000-10,000 e-mail subscribers, writing this type of a hook won’t require any sort of in-depth SEO knowledge.

Writing the SEO Hook can actually be easier to write than to write a Story Hook.

So how do you write your SEO Hook? You can use Brian Dean’s APP Method:

The APP Method stands for:

  • Agree: Talk about the Problem Worth Solving your reader has (that they’ll agree with)
  • Promise: Promise to help them solve the Problem Worth Solving with your content
  • Preview: Tell your readers exactly what they can expect from the piece of content

We can find a great example of this method in practice in Nagina Abdullah’s article about best frozen meals for weight loss.

First, Nagina gets her readers to agree with her about the Problem Worth Solving (we don’t have food available, therefore we binge on unhealthy food):

Later on in her SEO Hook, she promises to share “the most flavorsome frozen ready meals that will support your health and weight loss goals”:

Finally, she wraps up with a preview of what her readers can expect to find in her article:

Now while you COULD use advanced SEO techniques to figure out exactly how to phrase your SEO Hook, you don’t actually need to do that if you only have a few hundred (or thousand) e-mail subscribers and don’t want to spend months learning about SEO.

Instead, you can simply plug and play your Problems Worth Solving into the first paragraph of the SEO Hook.

For example, if I wrote an article about how to speak at a TEDx event, I could write the SEO Hook like this:

“You’re here because you want to speak at a TEDx event. Maybe you want to do that to promote your book, to share your ideas with thousands of people, or simply because you love speaking and that’s a new stage you’d like to conquer.

Either way – I can help. In this post, I’ll teach you exactly how I landed 3 TEDx speeches to date, as well as “secrets” I learned from 3 years of organizing my own TEDx event

You’ll learn:

-The one mistake that 99% of rejected TEDx candidates make (and how to EASILY avoid it
-The 5-step application process for TEDx events (and a secret shortcut you can use to get accepted as a speaker within 1-2 weeks
-How far in advance you should apply for TEDx events (and who you should reach out to with your application)”

If you read my guide on writing opt-in copy, you’ll notice that you can use your opt-in copy writing skills to write your “preview” part of the SEO Hook as well ;).

You don’t have to follow this script word by word, so feel free to change things up, add a paragraph, remove a paragraph…

You could even mix the SEO Hook and Story Hook together (like Nagina Abdullah does in many of her articles – she uses a Story Hook as the “Agree” part of her SEO Hook).

Unlike with sales pages, the hook isn’t the most important part of your content – your meat is.

So don’t worry about WHICH hook to use, or about getting it perfect, or even how long your hooks are (though I’d recommend keeping them under 1 page long). Instead, focus on practice, and getting the structure of your hooks right.

If you use a Story Hook or a SEO Hook to open your articles or videos, you can’t really go wrong.

The “Meat”

The “meat” of your content is where you’ll help your audience solve their Problems Worth Solving with your lessons and advice.

The “meat” will vary based on the type of content you’re creating:

  • If you’re writing a “myth busting” article where you bust the myth that you “can’t negotiate an internship salary”, you might share where the myth comes from, why you CAN negotiate the salary, examples and stories to support your claim, and specific strategies for negotiating the salary
  • If you’re writing a “how-to” article about how to answer recursion questions at a coding interview, you might cover a list of typical questions you might get at an interview, strategies for solving the questions, and sample answers
  • If you’re writing a “surprising mistakes” article about upwork proposals, you might talk about 8 surprising mistakes your readers make, and what to do instead

We’ll look at the different content types and blog post templates later on in this guide, where you’ll be able to see different ways in which you can create the “meat” of your content in action.

If we look at what ALL the different types of remarkable content have in common, we’ll notice that they:

  • Have a set number of sections (for example, 8 sections for 8 common upwork proposal mistakes)
  • Each of the sections has their own power up (a concept we covered earlier in this chapter)

If there’s ONE thing you want to include in your “meat”, it’s power ups. If you make sure that every section of your content (whether it has 3 sections or 30) has a power up with a sticky name, your content will already have more depth than most content out there.

Now if you really want to go the extra mile and make your content better than all other content out there, a great way to do is to address subtle questions and concerns.

These are questions and concerns that a lot of people have, but few bloggers answer.

A great example is or beloved nachos recipe which we looked over earlier.

Most nachos recipes just tell you how to make nachos.

But this nachos recipe goes into A LOT more depth by answering questions like which toppings are best for nachos:

Which are the best chips for nachos:

How to avoid soggy nachos:

And even shares a brief history of nachos:

There are thousands of nacho recipes out there – but this one stands out from all the noise and answers subtle questions and concerns which most other recipes ignore.

Going the extra mile and collecting, thinking about and addressing the common questions your audience might have around their Problems Worth Solving is a great way to add more depth to your content, make it easier for your readers to take action, and make your content more remarkable.

The Call to Action

After the “meat”, you might want to include a quick summary of the article (like I do in this guide), especially if it’s a length article. This part is optional, but it’s a nice touch to make your content more memorable.

After that, it’s time for the final part of your content, which is the most important for converting your readers into e-mail subscribers: The Call to Action (or CTA).

Before you write your CTA, make sure you have a Relevant Lead Magnet that you can offer to your readers as a next logical step after going through your content.

For example, if I ran a cooking blog and wrote a recipe about Nachos, I might encourage my readers to download my “10 Delicious Comfort Food Recipes for Your Next House Party” (if I knew that a lot of my readers searched for party foods online).

In your Call to Action, you should bridge the gap between your content and your Relevant Lead Magnet, and tell your audience why they can’t miss out on this amazing resource you created for them.

Here’s an example from my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks:

With this guide, I created a dedicated lead magnet (a checklist for coming up with sticky ideas) to walk my readers step by step through creating their sticky ideas.

Here’s another example of a much shorter CTA, from Nagina Abdullah’s article about coffee creamers:

Nagina’s CTA is to download a “Sweet Spice Cheat Sheet” for a way to make your coffee less sugary – but still sweet (which is a great logical next step for her readers).

It matters less HOW you write your CTA and how long it is than it does to:

  • HAVE a clear CTA at the end of your content
  • Have a relevant lead magnet to offer with it

As long as you get those two right, you’ll be on the right track to attracting thousands of new e-mail subscribers through the content you create.

8 Remarkable Content Types

Now that we covered the typical STRUCTURE of remarkable content, let’s talk about different TYPES of content you could create.

Whenever you’re creating a new piece of remarkable content, you can use these content templates to come up with a proven structure for your posts, and put a different spin on them.

Over time, you’ll find that you enjoy creating some content types more than others, and that some of them resonate with your audience more than others.

Like I always say, do more of what works, and ignore what doesn’t.

I included a thorough list of 8 different types of content I’ve seen do well which should get you started, and if you’d like to brainstorm additional content types, you can use the Buzzfeed Strategy to do that.

Content Type #1: Myth Busting

To create content that gets a lot of “buzz”, you can debunk common industry myths (which you might have uncovered during your research, or through years of experience working in your field).

The more common and the more counterintuitive the myth, the better it will likely do.

You could write content about a specific myth (like “you can’t charge premium rates without years of experience as a freelancer”), or you could write a “top myths” post like Danny Margulies’s blog post about 8 Common Upwork Myths (by the way, this one has a cool Story Hook you can check out).

Either way works, and you could even take things a step further, create separate pieces of  content around different myths like:

  • “Why you don’t need years of experience to make money on Upwork”
  • “There’s too much competition on Upwork”
  • “Take any job you can get when you’re getting started with Upwork”

And THEN create a “top 8 myths” post that rounds up all the common myths.

Content Type #2: Back to Basics

When I talked to Peter Nguyen about the biggest mistakes he made while building his e-mail list, he said:

“I learned that I should create content around basic things (like “how to buy a suit”) rather than writing about trendy, hot topics.”

Writing about trending topics like “top 3 trendy things you should wear this summer” got Peter some traction, but he found that focusing on the basics would bring him hundreds of e-mail subscribers for years to come.

Now, he spends a lot more time writing about evergreen topics like how to wear olive chinos, business casual style for men, and how your shorts should fit. These might be more “boring”, but will work far better in the long run than the “next big thing” that will be “out of style” next month.

As you’re implementing this technique, make sure that you’re only writing content around Content Gaps – unfilled gaps of content where there’s no good content around a certain subject.

For example, it might not make sense to write a blog post about “counting calories”, as there are plenty of decent articles out there. But there might be other “basic” questions that your readers or clients have that don’t have great answers.

For example, Nagina Abdullah recently created a lot of “basic” blog posts like healthy frozen meals for fat loss, best protein powder for fat loss, or best bread for weight loss.

These are all fairly basic topics, but definitely burning questions that Nagina’s readers have that they can’t solve by Googling (as they get a lot of surface level, generic advice).

The key with creating “back to basics” content is to have a clear idea how you’ll make your content 10x better than all the existing content (including power ups is a great way to do that).

A phenomenal example is Peter’s business casual style guide for men – there’s a lot of articles out there on “business casual style” out there, but Peter’s is by far most detailed and useful – it provides clear explanations, outfit ideas, and a lot more that most content out there just doesn’t offer.

Content Type #3: Experiments

When Jenni Waldrop from Fuzzy and Birch thinks of new Remarkable Content ideas, she thinks of experiments that would be fascinating to her and her audience:

“I want to see how many sales I can make this month, then write about it (“I made 100 sales in 3 weeks on etsy”), that’s fascinating.”

A great example is Jenni’s blog post about how she made $4,000 on Etsy in 30 days.

Another great example that fits into this category is Peter Nguyen’s post about how he interviewed 101 women about what a man should wear on a first date.

If there’s something fascinating or interesting you’ve done that your readers would be interested in, go ahead and write a fascinating piece of content around it!

It could be anything from an experiment you personally try, to a survey you send out to people, to an experiment you run with your clients.

As long as it’s fascinating, it counts.

Content Type #4: “How to” Content

Perhaps the simplest proven content type is classic “how to” content, that simply answers the questions of your audience in the best possible way.

That’s the main type of content that Sam Gavis-Hughson used to build his e-mail list to over 11,000 e-mail subscribers:

“My list grew because I was creating growth content, “how do I do X”, that generated a lot of traffic over time (How to crack the coding interview, how to use the book correctly, how to study data structures, 6 questions you need to know to prep for your coding interview)”

You can see that Peter’s examples that we mentioned earrlier fit into this Content Type as well (how to wear olive chinos, business casual style for men, and how your shorts should fit).

You don’t need to get fancy with your Content Types. If you find a Content Gap around a common Problem Worth Solving, you can always write a “how to” article about it.

This is as formulaic as writing an article about “How to [SOLVE PROBLEM WORTH SOLVING]”.

For example, if I ran a blog about speaking at TEDx events, I would definitely write “how to” content around questions like:

  • How to speak at tedx events
  • What makes a great tedx talk
  • What is the tedx application process like

The key to making this type of content Remarkable is to study other content that talks about the same topic, think about how you can make your content better, then fill it with power ups and answers to subtle questions and concerns, which we talked about earlier.

Content Type #5: Surprising Mistakes

While you could definitely create content around “common mistakes”, an even better approach is talking about surprising mistakes, like Danny Margulies does in his post about “8 surprising upwork mistakes I see every day”.

This is how Danny wrote this blog post:

“Upwork proposals are a big problem. It’s where the rubber meets the road. A lot of people write 10 proposals, but hear nothing back. I could write how to write proposals, but that would be a 200 page book. It wasn’t the best format. Instead I wrote about the 8-9 counterintuitive mistakes (like charging too little). I didn’t teach people how to write proposals from scratch, but with these tips they can write a lot better proposals than they are writing right now.”

When you’re using the “surprising mistakes” content type, you should keep three things in mind.

First, you should write about BIG Problems Worth Solving.

Notice how Danny mentioned that Upwork proposals are a big problem for his audience (which is why his blog post got over 330 comments).

If he instead wrote an article about a less common or smaller problem that people don’t care about as much (like 8 common mistakes you can make when e-mailing your upwork clients), he wouldn’t get such a response because there wouldn’t be any major fear or anxiety associated with the problem.

You should write “surprising mistakes” posts about big problems and high stakes situations of your audience when they won’t want to mess up (like negotiating for a job, sending an upwork proposal or performing at a competition).

Second, your mistakes should be counterintuitive and surprising

When someone sees your content, it should blow their mind and help them see the world in a new way.

It’s not enough to just share obvious mistakes that everyone knows about already. You should talk about mistakes that most people miss, but are clear to you as the expert.

For example, Danny talks about surprising mistakes like:

  • “Thinking you can’t charge higher than the client’s budget”
  • “Focusing on years of experience”
  • “Bidding too cheap”

To someone who’s just getting started with freelancing (and is probably thinking that they should “start small, charge low, and take any job they can get”), these mistakes open their eyes and help them see the Upwork game in a way they haven’t seen before.

Third, you should offer practical solutions to these mistakes

Knowing you’re making a mistake is good. Knowing how to fix it is even better.

In his article, Danny shares specific guidelines and solutions to mistakes, and includes screenshots and examples (Power ups!):

And even an audio file of one of his clients explaining why he hired Danny for $135/hr:

While “surprising mistakes” content won’t make up the majority of your Content Portfolio, it’s definitely worth creating content like this around high-stakes situations and major Problems Worth Solving where your clients typically make big mistakes.

Content Type #6: Ultimate Guides

As you could guess by reading this 70,000+ word guide, Ultimate Guides are my absolute favorite Content Type.

That’s because they are one of the most effective ways to build your e-mail list, get thousands of website visitors to your website every month, and rank on the first page of Google.

They’re also a great way to make your readers fall in love with your content and become excited to work with you through your products and services.

By Ultimate Guides, I mean the most comprehensive pieces of content around a certain topic online.

No, a regular 2,000 word article isn’t an Ultimate Guide. A guide like this is an Ultimate Guide, or my shorter (but still thorough) Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks.

What I love about Ultimate Guides is that their depth automatically makes them remarkable. By writing something that’s more detailed and comprehensive than any other piece of content on a similar topic out there, you’re doing remarkable work.

Plus, Ultimate Guides make AMAZING Lead Magnets, so you’re often hitting two birds with one stone.

Many entrepreneurs I interviewed created their own Ultimate Guides and attracted hundreds or thousands of e-mail subscribers to their websites:

  • Peter Nguyen recently published his Ultimate Guide to Business Casual Style for Men
  • Danny Margulies wrote a detailed Ultimate Guide to Finding Your First (or Next) Freelance Job
  • Rusty Gray wrote an Ultimate Guide to Best Animation Schools

Ultimate Guides are a subject that I could talk about for hours on and, and I wrote an insanely detailed guide about, which you can check out to see my step-by-step process for creating guides like these.

Content Type #7: Valuable Listicles

While I’m not a big fan of creating “listicles”, like “top 5 ways to lose weight this summer!” as most of them tend to be short and useless (as they aren’t detailed enough for people to actually take action), there ARE ways in which you can incorporate listicles into your Content Strategy.

The way you can do that is by creating “Valuable Listicles”, which share a series of tips / mistakes / phrases / example, accompanied by power ups.

A great example is Danny Margulies’s post about specific phrases that ruin Upwork proposals (with a GREAT Story Hook):

In his article, he talks about specific phrases that ruin Upwork proposals, like:

  • “I am motivated / creative / organized / dedicated / other adjective.”
  • “I meet deadlines / my work is 100% original / etc.”
  • “Feel free to check out my portfolio.”

And then he breaks down WHY those phrases ruin Upwork proposals, and what to do instead:

When you’re writing a Valuable Listicle, make sure that:

  • It’s about a BIG Problem Worth Solving (remember how we said upwork proposals were a major sticking point for Danny’s audience)
  • Every item on the list has their own power up that makes it useful and easy to implement
  • (BONUS POINTS): There’s something counterintuitive about it (so you can change the way people see the world)

Content Type #8: Touchy Subjects

The final Content Type we’ll cover in this post is talking about touchy subjects.

This might not be your cup of tea, but if you’re up for it, talking about Problems Worth Solving that your audience has and revolve around touchy subjects and taboos can be a great way to fill Content Gaps.

Geraldine Lepere has a rule of “no taboos” when it comes to content creation, and creates videos about everything, including how to buy tampons and towels in France:

You can think about touchy subjects, taboos, or problems that many people experience but no other experts talk about (like “what to do when you get fired from your Upwork client”, or “how do deal with refunds for your online courses”) and create content around them.

How to go from an idea to a Remarkable Piece of Content in 6 simple steps

Now that we covered the different content types, there’s just one more thing for us to go over: how to actually write a remarkable piece of content from start to finish.

In this section, I’ll share with you my exact process that you can use to create any piece of Remarkable Content – from a 2,000 word blog post to a 50,000+ word guide like this.

Step #1: Idea

When you’re just starting out with content creation, don’t worry about having a rigid content strategy to get started. Instead, just create the content you want to create, and worry about content strategy later (we’ll cover that in the next chapter of this guide).

Most entrepreneurs that I interviewed didn’t have a clear content strategy when they were starting out.

Sam Gavis-Hughson just focused on creating content people actually wanted:

“I wasn’t very strategic with it. I just created a TON of content that people actually WANTED”

Geraldine Lepere also didn’t have a fleshed out content strategy:

“I had no content strategy for YouTube – I just made videos. It was more important to just create new videos every week.”

Pick any idea from your sticky idea matrix that you’d like to create a piece of content (you should have a clear Problem Worth Solving in mind).

For example, for this guide, the idea was simple: I’ll write The Ultimate Guide to List-Building.

Step #2: Bulletproof Outline

After you have a clear Problem Worth Solving in mind, create a Bulletproof Outline for your idea. The outline will help you stop staring at a blank page, organize your thoughts and ideas in a nice flow, and save you a lot of editing time down the line.

The length of an outline might vary – for a simple blog post or a short YouTube video, the outline might be just a few lines long.

For example, for this section of this guide, I have a quick & dirty outline written:

For a longer piece of content, like a 50,000+ word Ultimate Guide, you might want to create a more detailed outline.

For this whole guide, I had 42-page outline that helped me organize the flow of the guide:

Below, I’ll share with you my step-by-step system for bulletproof outlining that will make your remarkable content insanely easy to create.

You might implement some or all of your steps, depending on:

  • How long, detailed and research-backed your content is
  • How much of an outline you NEED to be able to create content

Some entrepreneurs need to create ultra-rigid outlines to write well – others put together a quick and dirty outline and create their content from it.

So how do you know when you’ve done ENOUGH outlining?

I’ve found that when I:

  • Feel like I’m not making significant progress on my outline
  • Start procrastinating on the outline
  • Feel the urge to just start writing

I’ve done enough outlining to move on to writing. That seems to be a good rule to follow. For a quick blog post, I might create an outline in a few minutes, while for a detailed guide like this it took me about a week to put it together as I worked through 400+ sticky ideas.

Here’s how you can create your Bulletproof Outline in 6 simple steps:

  • Shitty First Draft: I ALWAYS start with a shitty first draft of my outline. I just do a brain dump of what I want to teach, without worrying about flow, grammar, or anything else.
  • Research: Then, I combine my SFD with research from my Sticky Idea Matrix (I add any relevant examples, stories and data to my outline).
  • Clarity: Next, I make my outline CLEAR and easy to understand. This means organizing it into a flow that makes sense and using language that my audience would understand.
  • Feedback: If I’m working on a super deep piece of content and I want to make sure it’s the best piece of content I can create, I ask my readers or clients for feedback on the outline (to see if I’m missing something or if something is confusing).
  • Power Ups: I then go through each of the sections and add power ups to my content to make it remarkable.
  • Copy: Finally, I come up with catchy headlines and titles for my content, as well as sticky names for my power ups.

I don’t always go through all the steps (for most of the content I write, I don’t ask for feedback), and sometimes, I go through the power ups and copy steps as I’m writing.

I always go through the steps 1 (SFD) and 3 (clarity) to create a “quick and dirty” outline, and with content that requires a lot of research, I go through step 2 (research) as well.

If you’re ever stuck staring at a blank page, don’t feel like your content is flowing well or find yourself over-editing your content, better outlining will help you out.

Step #3: Shitty First Draft

Once I have an outline writing, I just start writing, and I let myself write shittily. I’m not shooting perfection, I just want to get the words onto paper and finish the content as soon as I can.

This seems to be the best solution to writer’s block (which usually comes from overthinking or trying to make my first draft perfect).

As I write, I like to stick with the zero editing rule.

I don’t let myself pull additional research, examples, screenshots, exact data, links or photos as I’m writing.

Instead, I treat writing and editing as separate, sequential processes.

That’s because I notice that if I DO try to pull a link or a screenshot while I’m writing:

  • I often break my flow, and have to remember what I was thinking when I pick up the writing
  • I sometimes get frustrated if I can’t find what I’m looking for, and break my writing momentum
  • I might get distracted while looking for links or screenshots

That’s why I save the editing for AFTER I’m done with writing my SFD.

To make sure I remember to include the photos, screenshots, examples or data during the editing phase, I simply write something like this:

TODO – INSERT PHOTO FAST METHOD SAM

Which helps me remember what I need to add in (in this care, it would be a screen shot of Sam’s FAST framework which I referenced a few times throughout this guide).

Once you have an outline done, just WRITE (or, if you’re recording YouTube videos, just shoot the video), finish creating the piece of content as soon as you can, and edit it later.

Step #4: Editing

Here’s what you DON’T worry about while editing:

  • Grammar & Typos (you can use a tool like Grammarly, but you really don’t need more than that. If you create amazing content, your buyers won’t really care about a typo here and there)
  • Rewriting (the easiest way to get stuck in the “editing spiral of doom” is to try and rewrite 3 paragraphs into 2 paragraphs, or say something in a better way. You’ll waste hours doing that, but unfortunately you won’t get any more e-mail subscribers)

I don’t recommend spending time on grammar, typos and rewriting while creating content because you won’t build an e-mail list by creating grammatically correct (or perfect) content.

You’ll build an e-mail list by consistently creating a lot of remarkable content that your readers actually want.

Anything that doesn’t help you produce content faster or make it 10x more remarkable should be cut from your writing process.

You’ll build an e-mail list much faster if you write 4 great pieces of content a month than by writing 1 grammatically perfect piece of content.

So when it comes to editing, what SHOULD you actually edit?

With most of your content, it will be as simple as filling the blanks. You can go through your TODOs, add in all the links, screenshots and examples, and finish your piece of content.

That’s it.

As you’re doing this, make sure you touch things once. This means that you only do one editing pass where you go through all of your TODOs, wrap up the editing phase, and publish your content.

Over time, you might want to employ some advanced editing techniques, like:

  • Proof: If your content is unrealistic and lacks proof to back up your claims, add in the proof
  • Confusion: If there’s something that’s super confusing, rewrite it to make it clearer what you’re trying to say
  • Boredom: If there’s a part that’s just dry and boring, add in interesting stories or examples to make it interesting

NOTE: I wouldn’t worry about using these techniques when you’re just starting out, as it’s a lot more efficient to create a lot of content, and you really don’t want to get stuck in editing.

Then, once you have the skill of creating remarkable content quickly, feel free to sprinkle in more editing to make your content more polished.

Step #5: Title

Once you have your article written and edited, the last step before publishing is picking a great title for your content.

Here, make sure you don’t get stuck in the fancy titles trap – and using fancy language like “5 ways to start living your best life”, which none of readers would ever ask a question about.

People don’t ask questions like “how do I live my best life” or “how do I get my guitar to the next level” – they say things like “how do I stop being distracted by Facebook while working” or “I don’t understand modes and scales for bass guitar”.

Focus on making your titles clear and real before making them fancy.

You don’t NEED fancy content titles to build an e-mail list of 10,000+ e-mail subscribers. Let me prove it to you. Here are some titles from Christina Rebuffet’s most popular YouTube videos, who has tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers:

Most of her titles are incredibly simple, like:

  • How to start a conversation in English with anyone
  • How to order food in an American restaurant
  • Understanding the cashier at the supermarket
  • How to introduce yourself
  • How to answer “how are you?” in English

As you create your titles, make sure that every title you come up with:

  • Is short and simple (you don’t want it to be a mouthful)
  • Includes REAL language of your audience (something they would actually say or ask you)
  • Talks about a Problem Worth Solving (how to talk to a cashier, how to get through customs…)

In most cases, you could just copy paste the Problems Worth Solving from your research, and use the “How-To Content” to come up with a great title for your article.

“How to answer recursion questions at a coding interview” or “How to ace your Google interview” are clear enough titles to be clicked by people who have those problems.

Once you create your first 10-20 pieces of content and use clear & simple titles, you might want to start experimenting with fancier titles – but make sure all of your titles still stay simple and clear.

To learn how to do that, here are a few advanced strategies from Jenni Waldrop from Fuzzy and Birch, who is amazing at coming up with sexy titles like:

  • How to find Etsy Tags that sell like hotcakes
  • Copy and paste Etsy Convo scripts to save your sanity
  • Mistakes that TANK etsy shops

Notice how these are still clear, short and simple, and talk about Problems Worth Solving (etsy tags, etsy convos, etc.), they just include a little bit of extra flair (hotcakes, save your sanity).

Here’s how Jenni comes up with her titles:

  • What’s Fascinating? “I want to see how many sales I can make this month, then write about it (“I made 100 sales in 3 weeks on etsy”), that’s fascinating.”
  • Copy Paste: “I use THEIR worlds exactly (just copy paste them!)”
  • The Buzzfeed Strategy: “I search for popular content on Pinterest and YouTube, see what are others saying, and think about how can I say this for my content.”
  • Crowdsource: “I make a post in my Facebook Group and ask my clients how they would describe this / title this / what would they want to see? Like what do you guys want to know about running an e-mail list on etsy? Then I use their responses to create my headlines”

You can experiment with some of these techniques to make your titles more fun, as long as you always keep them simple, clear, real, and around Problems Worth Solving.

Step #6: Publish & Promote

Once you’ve chosen your title, it’s time to hit that publish button and promote your content to your existing e-mail subscribers, as well as new audiences.

With every piece of content you publish, you’ll want to:

  • E-mail your existing e-mail subscribers about it
  • Update any old content and HUB pages with links to your new content
  • Promote your content to new audiences through sharing on social media, in online communities, etc.

The basic rule of thumb is: The more time you spent creating the content and the better you are at promoting it, the more time you should spend promoting it.

For example, I might share a simple article that I wrote in a few hours with my e-mail list and update my HUB pages and old content.

But with a guide like this that I spent well over 100 hours creating, I’ll also e-mail it to everyone in my network, and go the extra mile to talk about it in podcast and guest posts, create partnerships around it, etc.

If you haven’t yet, you should definitely read my guide on content promotion that will give you an in-depth overview into all the different ways in which you can promote your content.

Summary: The Complete Guide to Creating Remarkable Content

Since this was a LONG guide, here’s a quick summary of what you need to know, and what we covered.

First, we defined Remarkable Content by saying that a piece of Remarkable Content is the best piece of content in your industry around a specific topic.

The broader the topic, the most in-depth the content typically has to be.

Then, we talked about signs that tell you that your content is remarkable:

  • If the articles you’re getting are receiving a lot of positive comments and shares
  • If your readers are getting results from your articles (and sharing them with you)
  • If your readers are saying “I can’t believe this is free content. It’s too good to be free.”

And that to build an e-mail list of buyers (rather than freeloaders), you need to create the content that attracts your best clients.

To attract more of your best clients, you should:

  • Use language that your best clients use
  • Write about problems that your best clients face
  • Write the type of content your best clients love

We then went over 17 different strategies for coming up with Remarkable Content Ideas:

  • Rapid Research Week: Condense all of your research into one intense week
  • Casual Conversations: Talk to your brand new (and old) e-mail subscribers via e-mail after they respond to your Welcome E-mail
  • Welcome Calls: Find new Problems Worth Solving through Skype calls with your subscribers
  • Welcome Survey: Once you have more welcome e-mail responses than you can handle, switch to a Welcome Survey
  • Blog Comments: Once you start receiving comments on your blog, use them to discover new subtle questions and concerns to create content around
  • Research Survey: Send out a survey about a specific topic to your existing subscribers
  • What do you want to learn about?: Ask people in online communities what they’d like to learn from you about your topic of expertise
  • Hot Topics in Online Communities and Q & A Sites: Pay close attention to topics that get a lot of attention
  • The Content Gap: Find gaps in existing content where a lot of people have a certain question, but there is no good content out there to answer it
  • Follow Up Questions: Follow up with people from online communities to find additional Problems Worth Solving
  • Common Myths: Find questions that get a lot of “bad advice” in online communities to discover common industry myths
  • Unfollow the Experts: To avoid saying the same thing everyone else is saying, unfollow the experts in your industry on Facebook, e-mail and Instagram – and create your own original content instead
  • Content Audit: Take a look at your best-performing content (or best-performing content of other people in your industry) to find hot topics or good ways of creating remarkable content
  • Best Client Audit: Go over all the questions your best clients ever asked you and create content around them
  • What am I nerding out on right now?: Create content that you’ve spent hours and horus learning about and researching
  • Amazon Reviews: Find content gaps by reading Amazon reviews of popular books in your industry
  • Expert Interviews: Interview experts in your industry about a specific topic to create in-depth content like Ultimate Guides

To help you organize all of your research and ideas, I shared with you my Sticky Idea Matrix which you can use together with my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks.

We then touched on how to find your unique content voice (find your “Genius Zone” and then use an amplified version of yourself in your content).

And went over 13 proven strategies for creating remarkable content:

  • Avoid the “Content Pet Peeves”: Find out what NOT to do by studying comments on YouTube, blogs, Amazon Reviews or asking questions in online communities
  • Draw inspiration from Nachos Recipes: Use food recipes to learn how to teach well, and answer subtle questions and concerns of your audience
  • How can I teach this to my younger brother? Use this question to create your content in a simple, easy to understand way
  • Create content that can’t be copied: Go the extra mile to create your content (interview 20 experts about list-building, ask 101 women what a man should wear on a first date)
  • The Buzzfeed Strategy: Study how Buzzfeed and similar sites create Clickbait content that delivers – and use their formats as inspiration for your content
  • Create content that’s never been done before: Think about how to create content in a new, unique, more helpful way that nobody else did yet
  • Tell Powerful Stories: Use personal stories, stories of your clients, or stories from your research to make your content more interesting
  • The Action Movie Strategy: Especially if you’re creating your content via YouTube, cut out all the fluff and rambling and “fast edit” your content to make it feel like an Action Movie
  • Content Binges: Create series that your audience can binge on, instead of watching Netflix (like six minute makeovers or bass improvisation series)
  • BIG Ideas: Build every piece of content around one big, sticky idea that your audience will remember
  • Quick Wins: Help your audience get quick wins through implementing your advice (so they’ll keep coming back to you)
  • Power Ups: Use techniques, examples, spreadsheets, tutorials, graphics, and other power ups in every section of your content to make it 10x better
  • Ask for Feedback: If you’re not sure how to make your content better, ask your readers what’s confusing, what’s missing, or how you could make it 10x better

We then looked at the 3 elements of every piece of remarkable content, and how to create them:

  • The Hook: Use the SEO Hook or Story Hook in the beginning of your content to “hook”  your audience and keep their attention
  • The Meat: Split your content into sections, attach a “power up” to each of the section, and make sure you answer subtle questions and concerns in your content
  • The CTA: Use a Call to Action at the end of your content to show your audience why downloading your EPIC Lead Magnet is the logical next step

We went over 8 different templates that you can use to create Remarkable Content:

  • Myth Busting: Debunk the common myths in your industry
  • Back to Basics: Fill the content gaps around basic, evergreen questions (rather than talking about hot trends)
  • Experiments: Document your experiments and share them with your audience
  • “How to” Content: Teach your audience how to solve their Problems Worth Solving
  • Surprising Mistakes: Share counterintuitive mistakes (and how to fix them) around BIG Problems Worth Solving
  • Ultimate Guides: Create the most detailed and comprehensive pieces of content around different Problems Worth Solving
  • Valuable Listicles: If you want to create listicles (like “top 8 phrases to avoid in Upwork proposals”), make them valuable by filling them with power ups
  • Touchy Subjects: Talk about touchy subjects and taboos in your industry that other experts aren’t willing to touch

Finally, we talked about how to go from an idea to a Remarkable Piece of Content in 6 easy steps:

  • Idea: Pick an idea you’re excited to create content around (don’t worry about content strategy yet)
  • Bulletproof Outline: Stop staring at a blank page and organize your content by creating your outline (shitty first draft -> research -> clarity -> feedback -> power ups -> copy)
  • Shitty First Draft: Allow yourself to write “shittily”, and separate writing from editing by using TODO
  • Editing: Fill in the blanks (TODOs) in your content, and don’t worry about rewriting to avoid getting stuck in the editing spiral of doom
  • Title: Pick a title that’s simple and clear, talks about a Problem Worth Solving, and uses real language of your audience
  • Publish & Promote: Hit that publish button and use different content promotion strategies to spread the word about your content

That’s it! Now you know everything you need to know about HOW to create Remarkable Content.

In the next chapter, I’ll go over how you can create remarkable content consistently (even when you don’t feel like creating it, or your life gets in the way).

Continue to Chapter 14: How to CONSISTENTLY Create Remarkable Content

Your Turn: What’s your favorite way of creating remarkable content?

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit

How to Grow Your E-mail List Beyond 1,000 Subscribers

By Primoz Bozic 4 Comments

You’re currently reading Chapter 12 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

If you’re reading this, you probably already have a few hundred or close to 1,000 e-mail subscribers on your e-mail list – but you want more.

You want to get to your first 1,000, 5,000 or 10,000 e-mail subscribers (and beyond).

If that’s the case, you’re in the right place. In this post, I’ll be focusing on specific ways in which you can grow your e-mail list beyond your first 1,000 e-mail subscribers (and 7 reasons why you might not have done it yet).

If you don’t have at least 500 e-mail subscribers yet…

Then I have you covered as well.

If you have less than 100 e-mail subscribers, you should read about:

  • Finding a Profitable Online Business Idea
  • Validating Your Business Idea
  • Getting Un-stuck With Your Business Idea

If you have 100-500 e-mail subscribers, you should read about:

  • Finding Problems Worth Solving
  • Creating an EPIC Lead Magnet
  • Writing Mouthwatering Opt-in Copy
  • Setting up Your E-mail List
  • Getting Over Your Fear of Putting Yourself Out There
  • Learning How to Promote Your Content
  • Creating Your High-Converting Website

These resources will help you get to your first 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers, at which point you’ll benefit the most from reading this article.

If you already have your first 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers…

You’re in a great position to launch your first product or service online and make your first few hundred dollars, OR, if you choose to do so, grow your e-mail list beyond 1,000 to 5,000 or 10,000 e-mail subscribers.

At this point, you’ve reached a turning point in your online business career:

  • Some entrepreneurs stay “stuck” at a number like 537 e-mail subscribers and never really grow their e-mail list past that magical 1,000 subscriber mark
  • Others continue to gradually grow their e-mail list beyond their first 1,000, 5,000 and even 10,000 e-mail subscribers and build a serious online business

In this post, we’ll explore the differences between these two types of entrepreneurs and why some of them succeed, while others don’t.

We’ll also outline the key list-building strategies that you can use to grow your e-mail list to 5,000-10,000 e-mail subscribers (and beyond).

Let’s dive in!

[toc]

7 Reasons Why You Can’t Get Past 1,000 E-mail Subscribers (And What to do About Them)

It’s surprisingly easy to predict why most entrepreneurs never get past the magical 1,000 subscribers mark.

Every time I receive an e-mail from one of my readers saying “I’ve been stuck at 537 e-mail subscribers for months! HELP!”, I take a look at their website, and quickly notice one or more of the following 7 reasons why their e-mail list isn’t growing.

Let’s look at these in detail (and talk about specific ways how to fix them).

Reason #1: You aren’t consistently creating new content

The great thing about creating an Epic Lead Magnet and getting a few hundred new e-mail subscribers within a few weeks is that it can help you build a lot of momentum (and grow your e-mail list quite fast).

But after that, there’s often a dip in motivation.

Instead of working HARDER to keep the momentum of your new e-mail list growth, you might be lost as what to do next.

This is easy to spot by looking at your website. When was the last blog post you published? How many new blog posts did you publish over the past 3 months?

If your last blog post is published back in June of 2018 and you wrote a whopping 2 blog posts within the whole last year, it’s no wonder that your e-mail list isn’t growing. If you aren’t consistently publishing new content, there’s no way your new readers could even be finding you or subscribing to your e-mail list.

Of course you didn’t do this intentionally.

Maybe you took a few months to develop and launch an online course. Maybe you experimented with different list-building strategies, like being a guest on podcasts.

Whatever the reason, the end result is quite similar: You have only a handful of blog posts on your website that are months old, and your monthly traffic is getting closer and closer to 0.

SOLUTION: Consistency + Volume

After you publish and promote your Epic Lead Magnet and get to your first 500-1000 e-mail subscribers, the real work begins.

That’s when you need to KEEP the momentum and turn it into explosive growth.

The best way to do that, as I observed with more or less all the entrepreneurs I interviewed that have e-mail lists of 10,000+ e-mail subscribers, is to continue consistently publishing remarkable content.

For example, Luke McIntosh said:

“Consistency & volume of publishing YouTube videos was a game-changer for me. Publishing a new video 1x/week changed everything.”

Luke only created roughly 20 videos over the course of 4 years on his YouTube channel, then decided to “buckle down” and created weekly videos for over a year now, to bring his total to 77 videos:

He now has an e-mail list of 25,000+ e-mail subscribers.

He’s not alone. Look at almost ANY entrepreneur with tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers, and you’ll notice that they’ve been consistently creating blog posts or YouTube videos to build their audience for years and year.

For example, Christina Rebuffet has created 259 weekly videos to grow her e-mail list over the past few years (that’s a lot of weeks of consistent content creation!):

It’s no wonder her e-mail list has grown by 10,000+ e-mail subscribers since last summer.

You can think of every new piece of content you create as a “layer of traffic”.

Danny Margulies described this concept brilliantly during our interview:

“Here’s how my e-mail list grew over time. In the beginning, e-mail subscribers started trickling in, and it was like a plane taking off, “up and down”. After that, I did a lot of guest posting, and more people started trickling in. Eventually, I would get to 10, 12, 15 subscribers / day. It was then that I thought to myself “good, we’re getting 15 email subs, it’s working”.”

Every piece of content that you ever publish online (whether it’s on your website or on someone else’s) will add another stream of traffic and new e-mail subscribers to your website. The more streams you create, the more your e-mail list will grow over time.

If you only have a handful of blog posts on your website, it’s time to buckle down and start consistently creating Remarkable Content. You can’t expect to grow your e-mail list to tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers if you only publish a handful of pieces of content every year.

Don’t worry though – I know that consistently creating content is HARD – so I’ll teach you exactly HOW to do it in this chapter of this guide.

Reason #2: You publish too much “thought leadership” or “engagement” content

There’s this idea of “thought leadership” in the online business space that I’m not super fond of. The idea behind thought leadership is to lead others with your thoughts and ideas and answer their burning questions related to the topic you’re teaching.

The problem I have with thought leadership is that while it’s often misinterpreted as “you should always share your ideas and lead people with them”, while completely forgetting the second, more important part of the equation – answering questions of your audience.

It’s easy to get caught in the Thought Leadership Trap where you create a lot of content that YOU care about and you think is important, but few people actually resonate with.

You might even create “engagement content” that’s interesting to the existing readers that already care about you, but won’t attract new readers to your website.

For example, let’s say you’re writing a blog about productivity and you have a few hundred e-mail subscribers.

If you start writing articles about:

  • My 5 favorite productivity tools
  • The biggest productivity lessons from my dad
  • Why I wake up at 5am every day

These posts can all be interesting to your existing readers, BUT it’s unlikely they’ll attract a lot of NEW readers to your website.

Think about it.

Would you read a post about “5 favorite productivity tools” from someone you don’t know? Probably not.

Would you read about 5 favorite productivity tools from your favorite productivity expert? Probably!

There’s nothing wrong with engagement content and thought leadership content. The only problem is that it’s intended to ENGAGE your audience (or spread your ideas ONCE you have an existing audience). It’s not meant to GROW your e-mail list.

There’s a time and place for engagement content, which we’ll explore later in the Content Startegy chapter of this guide.

But when you only have a few hundred e-mails, you shouldn’t really be wasting your time with engagement and thought leadership content.

Here’s what you can do instead.

SOLUTION: Create an Online Textbook

I recently talked to a friend of mine who gets over a million visits to his website every year.

When I asked him how he did it, he shared his Online Textbook Strategy with me:

“When I started my business, I spent a few years working closely with my clients, and created a list of 104 burning questions they had. I decided I would create an “online textbook” that answers all of these questions and write 104 articles with the best possible responses to them. It took me over 2 years to get it all done, but now I receive over a million visits to my website every year.”

I can’t promise you to attract a million visitors to your website by following the Online Textbook Strategy, but I can promise you that your business will get a lot more traction if you focus exclusively on answering questions of your audience (rather than sharing ideas YOU care about).

If you think about it, it makes sense. Whenever you seek advice online, you usually have a specific Problem Worth Solving. Maybe you want to buy a leather jacket. Or figure out how to fire your employee. Or you want to learn how to play Paradise City on your guitar.

When I talked to Sam Gavis-Hughson about how he grew an e-mail list of 10,000+ e-mail subscribers, he shared a similar experience:

“My list grew because I was creating growth content, “how do I do X”, that generated a lot of traffic over time (How to crack the coding interview, how to use the book correctly, how to study data structures, 6 questions you need to know to prep for your coding interview). I wasn’t super strategic about it, I just created a TON of content that people actually WANTED”

Even when we look at the most popular content from Christina Rebuffet’s YouTube channel, we can notice that the majority of her content is “How-to” content:

“How to order food in an American restaurant, How to introduce yourself, Understanding the cashier at a supermarket, getting through US customs…” – these are all Problems Worth Solving of Christina’s audience.

If we look back at our example of a productivity blog, better articles to write would be:

  • How to get work done when you don’t feel like working
  • How to stop procrastinating
  • How to avoid getting distracted while working

Now I’m not saying that you SHOULD start a productivity blog and write about these topics and that they would take off (I think there are far too many productivity blogs out there already, and you should validate your idea first before writing content anyway).

But when you’ve found a great business idea, and you started talking to your audience to identify their Problems Worth Solving, simply start writing content that actually answers their questions (rather than content that you care about).

Then, to take things a step further, you can think of your website as an interconnected “online textbook” that solves all the possible problems of your audience and answers all of their burning questions.

If you approach your website that way, you’ll be on the right path to further growing your e-mail list.

Reason #3: Your content isn’t unique or remarkable enough

In one of the first chapters of this guide, when we talked about finding a profitable business idea, we established that you need a unique business idea in order to successfully build an e-mail list today.

You either need to serve a unique audience, solve a unique problem, or solve the problems of an audience in a unique way.

For example, starting a business teaching bass guitar was a great idea for Luke McIntosh at a time when nobody was teaching bass guitar all that well online.

The same thing that applies to your business idea also applies to creating your content. If it “blends in” with all other content, especially if you’re in a highly competitive market, it’s unlikely your content will get noticed and that your e-mail list will grow.

That’s why I cringe every time I see another “productivity blog” with articles like “how to stop procrastinating”.

The problem with running this type of a blog or writing content like that is that we’ve seen this type of content so many times that, unless you’re reaching a brand new audience, your content will usually fall flat, UNLESS you are solving a problem in a really unique way and you have a big enough initial audience to help you spread the word about your solution.

When I look at entrepreneurs that DO create a lot of content consistently and actually talk about Problems Worth Solving, the culprit for their lack of email list growth is usually that there’s nothing new.

They are sharing a regurgitated message we’ve heard hundreds of times before, and fail to generate enough interest for their ideas.

SOLUTION: Create Unique, Remarkable Content

To win the content game today, especially if you chose to enter a more competitive market, your content needs to do one of the two (or both) things:

  • It needs to be UNIQUE and different from all other content out there
  • It needs to be the BEST content out there by a large margin

This way, your content can stand out in the sea of all other content out there, and become content that your readers will read, share, and remember for years to come.

Here’s a real-world example.

When you google “How to Buy a Leather Jacket”, you’ll find a sea of mediocre content like this post on Men’s Health:

Just reading through this piece of content makes me cringe. Not only is it impossible to read through a weird “gallery”, it also offers poor, generic advice like “you can find a good leather jacket for less than $500, and great ones for under $1,000”. UGH.

On the flip side, take Peter Nguyen’s guide to buying a leather jacket:

This guide goes into so much more detail on types of leather jackets, different leathers, zippers, and even the difference between a $500 and $2,000 leather jacket:

These two articles are literally night and day.

And for the record, the leather jacket guide brought Peter 1,000+ e-mail subscribers within the first 30 days of publishing it, still ranks on the first page of Google to this day, and brings him hundreds of new e-mail subscribers every year.

When I asked Peter about what kind of content helped him grow his e-mail list the fastest, he shared 2 interesting gems.

Gem #1: Create content that can’t be copied

“What worked best for growing my e-mail list: Posts that were long / epic AND had a narrative or a story that couldn’t be copied. A great example is my dating post (“I Asked 101 Women What a Man Should Wear on a First Date”). I started talking about this subject at a party, surveyed 100+ friends about it, and wrote a post about it. The winning combination was STORY + QUALITY + DEPTH.”

Gem #2: One EPIC post beats 4 shorter posts

“I also tested posting shorter content 1x/week vs. longer content 1x/month. The shorter posts generated an initial spike in traffic but initially died off, while longer posts kept attracting more readers for months. The 1x/month longer post won by a large margin.”

You can read more about Peter’s data behind how writing an EPIC post 1x/month helped him double his monthly traffic in a guest post he wrote for me.

A great strategy that you can follow if you want to gradually grow your e-mail list over time is to:

  • Google Problems Worth Solving for your audience, and find problems where no really good content shows up
  • Take the extra time to write the absolute best piece of content online on a specific topic

As you might have noticed, that’s exactly what I’m doing with this list-building guide (I know that list building is a problem worth solving for my audience).

Even though list-building is a topic that a lot of people already write about, I felt like I could do better and write a better, more comprehensive piece of content than everyone else.

That’s why I’m 270+ pages into writing this massive guide for you that goes through every single step of building an e-mail list into so much more detail than anything else out there – and I know that it will be a resource that will bring new readers to my website for years to come.

To learn more about how to create Remarkable Content, read this guide.

Reason #4: You’re spreading yourself too thin

For a while, “omnipresence” was a popular theme in the online entrepreneurship waters. You’re supposed to be “omnipresent”, and be everywhere all the time!

I agree that staying on top of mind is important and that playing the CONSISTENCY + VOLUME game with your content will pay off.

But here’s an important caveat – it pays off to be omnipresent on ONE major content platform. Trying to be omnipresent on multiple platforms at once, especially when you’re not yet running your business full time, only leads to a lot of burnout, mediocre results, and disappointment.

I see so many entrepreneurs try to do everything at once after they publish their Epic Lead Magnet.

They go on podcast interviews. They write guest posts. They write blog posts. They start a YouTube channel. They start an Instagram and Pinterest account. They do Facebook LIVEs. They try to take advantage of all the different outlets that they can get their hands on to spread their message.

The problem with this approach is that it quickly takes time away from creating Remarkable Content, which takes time to create.

For example, this guide that I’m writing has already taken me well over 100 hours to write, and I’m focusing on it as the only list-building strategy for my business. If I wasted my time with other list-growth tactics while writing the guide, it would probably take over a year to write (rather than a few months).

Many online entrepreneurs I interviewed spend anywhere between 10-20 hours creating every piece of content they publish, and there just isn’t enough time to do that on multiple different platforms (it’s the same with the most successful Instagrammers by the way – they spend hours and hours creating new Instagram content every day and ignore everything else).

By spreading yourself in 10 different directions, you won’t really be able to create enough Remarkable Content on a single platform to get noticed.

For example, if you look at entrepreneurs that use YouTube as their main list-building strategy (like Christina Rebuffet and Geraldine Lepere), you’ll notice that they publish a video every week.

Do the math – if they spend 10-20 hours on a single video, and they also want to create and sell online courses, talk to their customers about how to improve their products and services and to discover new Problems Worth Solving, manage their teams… The time quickly melts.

If you currently have more than one list-building strategy and you feel like none of your strategies are really moving the needle for your business, it’s time to start doing things differently.

SOLUTION: Master ONE Method

When I interviewed different entrepreneurs how they grew their e-mail lists from 1,000 to 5,000-10,000 e-mail subscribers, one pattern quickly became obvious:

They focused on just ONE key list-building strategy until it kept working, and ignored everything else. It was surprisingly simple.

For the vast majority of them, their primary list-building method was either:

  • Creating weekly YouTube videos (Christina Rebuffet, Geraldine Lepere, Luke McIntosh,…)
  • Writing regular Blog Posts or Guides (Danny Margulies, Peter Nguyen, Gabriela Pereira,…)

And then, there were a few outliers, but even they had one thing in common – they only pursued ONE list-building strategy at a time.

For example, Jenni Waldrop built a large chunk of her e-mail list through Pinterest (as her audience spends a lot of time on Pinterest), and Karen Dudek-Brannan got to over 2,000 e-mail subscribers by simply writing World-Class Blog Posts and sharing them in Facebook groups.

To further break it down, here is what their process looked like:

  • They chose ONE key content platform (like blog posts, YouTube videos or Pinterest)
  • They immersed themselves in learning and mastering the specific method
  • They consistently created Remarkable Content and distributed it through their method
  • …and they did that consistently for months or years

They doubled down on what was working, and ignored everything else.

The key pieces of the puzzle here are the CONSISTENCY + VOLUME which we already talked about earlier in this chapter, sticking with ONE method, and mastering it.

Only over time, once they mastered a specific method, they started learning about new methods and layering them on top of existing ones (we’ll cover this in Part 4 of this guide when we talk about scaling beyond 10,000 e-mail subscribers).

Karen Dudek-Brannan and I talked about how she does this in detail during our interview:

“I started growing my e-mail list by posting an article in a Facebook group and going from 0-186 e-mail subscribers. After I did this, I worried that it was beginner’s luck. So from October to Match I did the same thing in a number of Facebook groups. For 5 months, I repeated this, and got to 2,000 subscribers through hustling in the FB groups. I got the same response and over and over again, and people wanted to opt-in to my e-mail list. I’m glad I didn’t just stop after the first post, I kept doing it, knowing it’s working.

Later on, I focused on layering one strategy at a time, and I tried to always have one paid and one free strategy that was working. I now have over 14,000 e-mail subscribers, and get 50 new e-mail subscribers a day. For the next 6 months, I’ll be focusing just on Instagram, that will be another organic method I add to my system.

When I start learning about a new method I know I’ll take online courses, try to look for a specific person and take their course. I took Melissa Griffin’s Pinterest course, binge-watched it for a few weeks, spent 3-4 weeks doing small stuff, 4-6 weeks watching the course and doing a set up. Then I was in the routine of implementing the strategies. I followed advice on how much time I should spend, what to pin, which apps to use, tried a bunch of different things, and saw what worked for me.

Notice that even though Karen uses multiple list-building strategies, she always:

  • Picked a new strategy
  • Spent 6 months intensively learning about it and creating content through it
  • “Squeezed the lemon” out of it before she added a new layer

So here’s the good news: When you only have a few hundred e-mail subscribers, the data suggests that you really don’t HAVE to pursue multiple list-building strategies at once.

Instead, you could just focus on getting insanely good at ONE strategy, and getting in the CONISTENCY + VOLUME by creating Remarkable Content. That’s a proven and tested approach for growing your e-mail list to 5,000-10,000 e-mail subscribers (and beyond).

Only if you feel like you’re hitting a plateau with your strategy and you really feel you got everything you could out of it (like Karen did after a while with Facebook groups as they became more and more saturated and less effective), should you layer on a new strategy, or switch to a new one.

Reason #5: You’re not putting in enough effort

I remember having a conversation with Derek Halpern about how he grew his e-mail list to hundreds of thousands of e-mail subscribers, and he talked about something few online entrepreneurs publicly talk about:

It was a grind.

He said that period of his life was intense. He spent hours and hours writing blog posts for his website, doing research to support them, promoting them, doing website critiques for other entrepreneurs, creating his own podcast, researching the guests to record great episodes…

He said that it was hard. And that it was supposed to be.

That’s something that almost nobody in the online business talks about. Many people say that “you can start a business even if you are super busy, on only 5-10 hours a week, even if you have a full time job, 3 kids, a dog and 5 hobbies”.

Umm, not really.

While it’s true that you CAN generate some initial traction relatively quickly through list-building experiments and by creating an Epic Lead Magnet, building your e-mail list is a LONG game. It requires a lot of work to create World-Class Content consistently, promote it, and then to turn your hobby into a business you also need to create, sell and deliver online products and services…

It takes A LOT of time. And sacrifices.

Unfortunately, the stories of “building a business on 5 hours a week” are more like unicorns in the online business space. The less sexy truth is that you will need to regularly put a lot of time into your business if you want it to take off as fast as you want it to.

If it takes you 20 hours to create a World-Class Blog Post or a YouTube video and you’re only spending 3-5 hours a week doing it, you’ll move at a snail’s pace.

To get decent CONSISTENCY + VOLUME (like publishing a YouTube video every week or 1-2 Blog Posts every month), you’ll need to put in a lot more time.

If you’re not ready to put in the effort and make sacrifices to really build your e-mail list, you have an expensive hobby, not an online business.

But if you ARE ready to do it, there’s definitely a way.

SOLUTION: Go all out for 3 months

When I talked to Ryan Hildebrandt about the biggest “inflection points” in his business, he said:

“I used to work on my business here and there while traveling the world, and I did okay. But when I put in more effort and started taking it seriously and worked on it for a few hours every day – that’s when my email list started to grow”.

It’s not impossible to build an e-mail list or an online business on the side of a full-time job, if you make it a priority.

One of my favorite examples is Nagina Abdullah, who built an e-mail list of 16,000+ e-mail subscribers on the side of a full-time job and having two kids (while having plenty of time to take vacations and rest).

Nagina wrote a detailed article about how she did it, which you should definitely read.

She learned how to use her time more wisely, spent some time working on her business on weekends, and even took “staycations” from her work to work on her business.

The result? She ended up working on her business for 13 hours / week (plus a few 30-hour staycation weeks a year). Now that’s time you can really accomplish something in.

If you’re not ready to make sacrifices yet to put in 10-20 hours a week into your business yet, that’s fine – just acknowledge that that might not be enough to build an online business or an e-mail list of tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers.

If you ARE ready to put in more effort, here’s something I encourage you to do:

Go all out on your business for 3 months.

Make it your top priority. Say no to other things or hobbies in your life temporarily to make time for your business. If it’s important enough to you, you’ll find the time.

Use the time to work on your business (and this guide to guide you along the way).

EMBRACE that it’s going to be a grind, and that it will take a lot of time and energy. It definitely won’t be easy.

Then, after 3 months, reflect on how you’re doing and whether you want to keep working as hard on your business or not.

3 months is plenty of time to get some serious work in. If you spend 10-20 hours a week, that’s 140-280 hours – you could write 14-28 World-Class Pieces of content in that time (or a few less if you choose to heavily promote them).

That should be more than enough to keep the momentum and grow your e-mail list well past your first 1,000 e-mail subscribers.

Reason #6: You’re doing what you “should” be doing

Sometimes, you’ll have plenty of time working on your business, but you won’t use it as wisely as you could be.

You’ll spend a lot more time on social media, browsing the internet and watching Netflix, and procrastinate working on your business.

If that ever happens to you and you aren’t working on your business as hard as you want to (but just don’t know why), it doesn’t mean that you don’t “have what it takes”.

Instead, it could be that you’re doing things that you “should” be doing, rather than things that you “want” to be doing.

I don’t blame you.

This often happens because there are so many people teaching how to build an online business these days, and everyone has their own “system for success” that you should follow step by step.

If you follow more than one person, it’s very easy to split yourself too thin. But even if you just take advice from one person, chances are that while their advice is good, they might not be good for you.

Here’s what I mean.

Let’s say you HATE writing.

Should you then really “force yourself” to write for 20 hours a week just because you “have to” write blog posts to grow your e-mail list?

Well, you can try – but chances are you’ll spend more time THINKING about writing than actually writing. And you’ll secretly start to resent your business along the way.

Your business shouldn’t feel like fighting uphill battle. And there’s NOTHING you absolutely HAVE to do in your business.

As you might have noticed by reading this guide, there is always more than one way of getting the same result:

  • Want to validate your online business idea? You can do it by asking a question in Facebook groups, by writing a post in a Reddit community, or even by talking people about it face to face.
  • Want to promote your content? You could do it through guest posts, podcasts, online summits, media publications, Facebook groups, Quora,…
  • Want to create content? You can do it via YouTube, your blog, Pinterest…

You don’t HAVE to use a specific list-building strategy if it’s not working for you, you’re not good at it, or you simply don’t enjoy it.

Here’s a perfect example from Will Darling:

“A mentor of mine said, “you should stop doing organic stuff to grow your e-mail list, the money is in the ads”. I ended up wasting 3k pounds and over 100 hours without getting any meaningful results.”

It’s interesting. One of the main reasons why many of us start online businesses is to NOT have someone tell us “what to do”, and yet, we often accidentally get stuck in following advice of others that we don’t resonate with.

I’ve gone through periods of time like this in my own list-building journey, and they always ended in the exact same way:

With a lot of frustration, procrastination, hundreds of hours of wasted time and not many results. I would be better off doing things I enjoyed (like writing this guide) than doing what someone else wanted me to do.

If you find yourself not pushing yourself as hard as you want to be, ask yourself:

“Am I doing this because I really ENJOY it, or because I “should” be doing it?”

If the answer is the latter, I have good news for you: There is a better way.

SOLUTION: Find your Zone of Genius

As we established earlier in this chapter, growing your e-mail list beyond 5,000-10,000 e-mail subscribers requires a LOT more effort than many people care to admit.

Do the math – if Christina Rebuffet created 259 YouTube videos to grow her e-mail list to tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers and the average video took her 15 hours to make, that’s precisely 3885 hours of just recording videos.

To make sure you’re actually putting in the necessary effort, I’ve found that doing the things you actually enjoy, you want to do, and you’re good at makes ALL the difference.

I call these activities tasks in your Zone of Genius.

Tasks in your Zone of Genius are tasks that:

  • You happily work on (even when you’re tired after work)
  • You can’t stop thinking about (in a positive, productive way – like thinking about an article that you’ll write in the evening while taking an afternoon walk)
  • You could do for hours on hours on end (and the time just seems to fly by way too fast)

For me, one such task is writing – that’s why I’ve probably written 60,000+ words of this guide so far, which is more than half a solid book manuscript already.

Now it doesn’t mean that the tasks in your Zone of Genius will ALWAYS be easy to do or easy to sit down (let me assure you that there were plenty of times when I worked on this guide even when I was dead tired or didn’t feel like working on it), but MOST of the times, you’ll enjoy doing them and you’ll be happy you did them.

As you’re choosing your content platform, your content promotion strategies, the topics you write about, or even the type of content you create, always try to think about the most exciting way of doing them. Stick with those strategies, and ignore all others.

A great example comes from my interview with Danny Margulies:

“I just focus on writing some great content. All these other things, like “20% writing, 80% promoting” – I’m NOT a believer. I do almost no promotion, all my creative energy goes into WRITING, pushing the bar. Some people are great at networking and those strategies work for them, but they’re not for me.”

Danny just focuses on writing, which is in his Zone of Genius – and he has built an e-mail list of 40,000+ e-mail subscribers doing it.

If nobody else has given you permission to do what YOU want to do, I’m giving it to you right now. Even as it concerns this guide – pick the things you WANT to do, and ignore the rest.

Even if you just implement 10% of what I share in this guide, you’ll see your e-mail list take off!

Reason #7: You aren’t putting yourself out there

The final reason why your e-mail list isn’t growing is that you aren’t putting yourself out there enough (something we already touched on in the chapter about overcoming your fear of putting yourself out there).

While just focusing on creating great content CAN be a great way to grow your e-mail list (and once you hit thousands of e-mail subscribers, you can rely purely on that strategy together with some SEO knowledge, like Danny Margulies who we just talked about), just creating great content often isn’t enough to get your e-mail list over the first big hump of getting to 1,000 e-mail subscribers.

When you have too few e-mail subscribers that spread your idea and too little recurring traffic on your website, you might notice that your list growth is excruciatingly slow if you don’t promote your content or put yourself out there.

Now, when I mean “putting yourself out there”, the other element that we haven’t covered yet was the element of putting your IDEAS into the world.

There’s an interesting phenomenon I noticed with many up-and-coming entrepreneurs.

A lot of them are absolutely amazing at what they do, and when you talk to them (or hire them to coach you), you notice that they’re sitting on a wealth of information that they’ve collected over years and years of getting good at their craft.

And yet, their information is nowhere to be found online.

They don’t blog about it, create YouTube videos, or write guest posts about it. They don’t consistently create content, or promote it. The information is there – but it’s in their head, away from everyone else to see.

If they just put the information out into the world, their e-mail list would grow – but unfortunately, many of them never end up doing it.

If you feel like you fall into that bucket, you’re likely afraid to put yourself out there – and that psychological fear, NOT knowledge, is stopping you from growing your e-mail list.

So what can you do about it?

SOLUTION: Download your brain

If you notice that you’re stopping yourself psychologically from putting yourself out there, work on it. Read my chapter on 5 ways to get over your fear of putting yourself out there, and put it into practice.

Don’t use your fears as an excuse not to build your business, use it as a weakness you can work on, an opportunity for improvement.

Here’s what I wouldn’t recommend doing though: Spending months (or years) “working on your mental game”.

Because the thing is, you won’t become “mentally tough” or overcome your fears by reading books about fears and mental toughness (you’ll just get better at “understanding” mental toughness and fears).

Instead, you need to face your fears, and SEE that they’re just in your head.

The way I recommend you do that is by “downloading your brain”.

You know you have a lot of ideas in your head that your readers need to hear about. And with the help of this guide, you’ll learn exactly how you can share these ideas with the world through Remarkable Content.

Now it’s up to you to make that happen.

You can think of your blog (or YouTube channel) as a future Online Textbook or a Wikipedia page for your readers. You’ll build this interconnected wealth of knowledge by simply “downloading your brain” and putting it on the internet through the content you create.

Don’t think about list-building. Don’t focus on specific e-mail subscriber benchmarks.

Instead, just focus on downloading your brain and sharing it online through all the content you create. THAT should be your main goal.

If you succeed in doing that, the results will come as well.

That’s exactly what I’m doing with this guide.

I know I collected a wealth of information about list-building over the past few years of running my online business (and working with 1,000+ online entrepreneurs to help them do the same). I performed 20 interviews with entrepreneurs about how they built their e-mail lists to thousands of e-mail subscribers.

The sole purpose of this guide and what I think about all the time is “downloading my brain” and getting the information out of my head and into this massive guide, rather than worrying about attracting a specific number of e-mail subscribers with it.

Then, once the guide is finished, I know I will have created something truly incredible, and I won’t think twice about sharing it with everyone I know because of all the effort I put into it.

If you notice you’re stopping yourself from putting yourself and your work out there, change your focus to just downloading your brain and creating that Online Textbook – and see what happens.

Summary: 7 Reasons Why You Can’t Get Past 1,000 E-mail Subscribers (And What to do About Them)

In this chapter of the guide, we covered the 7 reasons why you can’t get past 1,000 e-mail subscribers, and what to do about them.

Here is a quick summary of each of these reasons, and solutions for them:

  • Reason #1: You aren’t consistently creating new content. If your last piece of content is from January of 2017 or you only published a handful of pieces of content last year, you need to focus on CONSISTENCY + VOLUME. To create new layers of traffic, start creating and promoting Remarkable Content on a consistent basis.
  • Reason #2: You publish too much “thought leadership” or “engagement” content. If you write about things only YOU care about (rather than answer questions of your readers), you’ll struggle with attracting new readers. Instead, focus on creating an Online Textbook that answers ALL major questions of your audience on your blog / YouTube channel.
  • Reason #3: Your content isn’t unique or remarkable enough. If your content blends in with all other content out there and isn’t different in any way, you need to step up your content game and start creating better content. Focus on creating Unique, Remarkalbe Content that’s better than all other content out there.
  • Reason #4: You’re spreading yourself too thin. Don’t focus on 10 different list-building strategies at once. Instead, Master ONE Method. Pick a strategy you enjoy, spend 6 months learning and mastering it, create a ton of content on it, and “squeeze the lemon” out of it while ignoring all other strategies.
  • Reason #5: You’re not putting in enough effort. It’s not enough to work on your business just a few hours a week. To succeed online today, you need to be in it to win it, and you need to put in the work. Go all out on your business for 3 months. Say no to other hobbies to make time for it, find 10-20 hours a week for your business and embrace the fact that it will be a hard grind initially.
  • Reason #6: You’re doing what you “should” be doing. Stop doing things you think you should be doing in your business, that others have told you to do, if you don’t enjoy them, aren’t good at them, or they aren’t bringing you the results that you want. Instead, focus on list-building strategies in your Zone of Genius that you happily work on, can’t stop thinking about, and could work on for hours on end. You’ll be a lot more productive AND happier this way.
  • Reason #7: You aren’t putting yourself out there. If your fears are stopping you, face them and work on them. Start the project of Downloading Your Brain and make it your focus to put your knowledge on the internet in the form of blog posts, guides, guest posts, YouTube videos (or your preferred strategy). That’s the best way to put your ideas out into the world.

In the next chapter of this guide, we’ll start talking about how to create Remarkable Content – from how to come up with ideas for your content, to how to structure it, to how to make it remarkable.

Continue to Chapter 13: The Complete Guide to Creating Remarkable Content

Your turn: which of these 7 reasons are you “guilty” of? Share them with us in the comments below!

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit

How to Create a High-Converting Website

By Primoz Bozic 3 Comments

You’re currently reading Chapter 11 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

In this step-by-step guide, you’ll learn how to create a High-Converting Website that will help you get to 10,000 e-mail subscribers and beyond.

We’ll look at:

  • How to design your high-converting website (the only 5 pages you need on your website)
  • Exact examples of high-converting websites that generated 10,000-25,000 e-mail subscribers
  • My best tips for creating a high-converting website (we cover EVERYTHING you really need to know).

Let’s dive in!

Don’t send your traffic to a leaky bucket!

When I interviewed Jenni Waldrop about how she initially built an e-mail list of 5,000+ e-mail subscribers within a few months (she now has 30,000+ e-mail subscribers), we had a lengthy conversation about how she created her High-Converting Website.

When Jenni initially started her online business, she decided to crack the code to generating a lot of traffic to her website (and she did). There was only one problem: Her website visitors weren’t actually converting into e-mail subscribers.

After a few months, she only had 150 e-mail subscribers, and only 1-2% of her website visitors became her e-mail subscribers. This meant that to get 1,000 new e-mail subscribers, she’d need 50,000-100,000 website visitors (which is A LOT).

That’s when she decided to fix her “leaky bucket”. There was no point in driving more traffic if they weren’t converting into e-mail subscribers.

Because the last thing you want to do is create content that really takes off (but only get a handful of e-mail subscribers), we’ll create a High-Converting Website BEFORE creating Remarkable Content.

This way, we’ll maximize the chances of your new readers becoming e-mail subscribers right from the start.

The #1 Goal of a High-Converting Website

Before we go into the trenches on how you can create your own High-Converting Website, let’s first define what a High-Converting Website even is.

To me, a High-Converting Website helps you capture the maximum amount of high-quality e-mail subscribers. That’s it.

Therefore, the main goal of your website should be to collect e-mail addresses (and everything else comes secondary).

Because of that, you’ll notice that the type of website I recommend you to create might not look the prettiest, BUT as you’ll see from the countless examples of websites of entrepreneurs with 10,000+ e-mail subscribers that I feature in this chapter, it works.

With every decision and every page on your website, ask yourself “is this helping me get more e-mail subscribers?”. If yes, add it.

If not, you probably don’t need it.

That’s why we won’t worry about things like Facebook like buttons on your website as they do virtually nothing for your e-mail list, and we’ll spend a lot of time thinking about how to make your e-mail list the front and center of your website.

We also won’t spotlight your products and services on your website (no, you DON’T need a “work with me page”), as we’ll focus on selling products and services through your e-mail list.

Instead, we’ll focus on:

  • Getting more visitors to your website (the main focus of the next chapter of this guide)
  • Converting as many visitors as possible into e-mail subscribers (the main focus of this chapter)
  • Converting e-mail subscribers into paying customers through product / services launches (a subject of one of the future guides I write)

How to measure how well your website is converting

To measure how well your website is converting, let’s get familiar with a simple metric:

The site-wide opt-in rate.

The site-wide opt-in rate tells us what % of your website visitors are becoming your e-mail subscribers (across the whole website).

To calculate it, you only need 2 other metrics, both of which you’ll easily be able to find.

First, you’ll need the unique visitors number (or “users” in Google Analytics). You’ll be able to find this number by checking a tool like Google Analytics or Jetpack (they’re both free and easy to set up).

Then, you’ll need the new e-mail subscribers number, which you’ll be able to find in your e-mail provider.

To get the site-wide opt-in rate, simply divide your new e-mail subscribers over a period of 30 days by the number of unique visitors in the same time period.

(you could use longer or shorter time periods, but they should be consistent throughout all metrics).

For example, if you got 1000 website visitors and 30 e-mail subscribers over the last 30 days, you can divide these two numbers:

Site-wide opt-in rate = 30/1000 = 3%.

And find out that your site-wide opt-in rate is 3%.

A good starting benchmark for a site-wide opt-in rate you should strive to reach is 5-10% (if you’re above 5% you should be good).

Note that this metric will vary based on how you’re getting your traffic and how “targeted” it is. If you wrote a guest post, 100 people visit your landing page and 50 people subscribe to your e-mail list, you’ll technically have a 50% opt-in rate through that landing page.

But if you’re getting a lot of traffic to one of your blog posts with a lower (let’s say 2%) opt-in rate, your opt-in rate will be a lot lower.

That’s why I recommend looking at the opt-in rate over the course of 30 days – so these highs and lows can average themselves out and you have a realistic number.

If your number is below 5%, you either need to:

  • Simplify/declutter your website
  • Put your e-mail list in the front and centre of your website
  • Improve your Epic Lead Magnet (make sure it addresses a Problem Worth Solving)
  • Write better opt-in copy
  • Get higher quality traffic through remarkable content

In this post, we’ll focus on the first two bullets. We already covered the 3rd bullet in the chapter on Epic Lead Magnets, and the 4th bullet in the chapter on writing opt-in copy. We’ll cover traffic in the chapter on creating remarkable content.

You don’t need a fancy (or expensive) website.

The good news is that you don’t actually need to spend $5,000 to create a High-Converting Website.

I remember spending $500 to have a custom website created years ago, only to get only 46 e-mail subscribers in 6 months, ans waste hundreds of hours to customize it.

Now I have a website theme I only spent $130 on that looks better, is easier to use, and has helped me start a 6-figure online business.

Most other successful entrepreneurs I know started out with simple themes as well, and only invested in a custom, premium website once they were bringing in tens or hundreds of thousands of dollars every year.

If they didn’t need a fancy website, neither do you.

Here’s an extreme example from Luke McIntosh from Become a Bassist. This is what his website looks like:

It looks like it’s straight from the 1990s.

And yet, because Luke is nailing other parts on growing his e-mails (like having a profitable online business idea using Epic Lead Magnets and creating Remarkable Content), he’s managed to build an e-mail list of 25,000+ e-mail subscribers.

Think you need a fancy website? Think again.

The only 4 tools you need to set up a functioning website

Here’s what you WILL need (on top of your e-mail provider and landing page software):

  • A website domain
  • Hosting for your website
  • A blog platform
  • A website theme

Let’s go over these one by one. I won’t go into details into how to set each of these up as there are amazing tutorials online for each of the recommended tools, and you should be able to figure them out with relative easy.

A website domain

Your domain is the “name” of your website (for my website, my domain is www.primozbozic.com).

You can purchase your domain name through websites like GoDaddy and Hover (I used both of these in the past and never had any issues with them).

You should expect to pay $10-$20/year for your domain name on most (I would not recommend spending thousands of dollars on a domain when you’re just starting out with your online business).

Your domain name doesn’t need to be perfect, or even super relevant to your business idea. For example, all 3 of these entrepreneurs run successful online businesses, even though have wildly different domain names:

  • Jenni Waldrop uses https://blog.fuzzyandbirch.com
  • Luke McIntosh uses https://becomeabassist.com
  • Christina Rebuffet uses https://christinarebuffet.com/

As you can see, your domain can be anything from your full name to a Problem Worth Solving for your audience to a combination of a few (seemingly) random words.

Your website name matters SO much less than everything else in your business (and you can always change it down the line) that I wouldn’t spend more than a day or a few hours choosing the name.   

You can brainstorm a few names, take a look at easy blog networks for inspiration, create a short-list of them, talk to your friends or First 100 Fans about them, and pick a winner.

Here are 3 guidelines I WOULD follow for choosing a great name:

  • Make it sticky / catchy / easy to remember
  • Keep it simple
  • Don’t include any complicated words or letters

The whole purpose of your website name is for people to instantly remember it (even if they only hear it once) and to be able to easily find it on google. That’s it.

You don’t need to “sell” people with your name – you’ll do that with your content. And outside of public speeches and Podcast interviews, you’ll rarely actually need to TALK about your website name. In most cases, it will be a simple link that people click when they see a guest post from you (or they’ll find it when they find one of your articles online).

So pick a name, see if it’s available for a reasonable price, and move on to the next step!

Hosting

Once you have a domain name, you’ll have to “host” it somewhere. This will help you actually put your website on the internet and make it visible to others.

You’ll find all sorts of hosting providers online, ranging anywhere from $10/month (or less) to $30+/month.

If there’s one thing I can’t say enough, it’s this:

Your hosting is the ONE thing you shouldn’t save on when setting up a website.

It’s fine to get a cheap domain name, website theme, or even an e-mail provider.

But if you get cheap hosting, it’s very easy for you to shoot yourself in the foot, like I did in the early stages of my business.

I opted for cheap hosting as I didn’t want to spend $30/month on hosting, and thought it would be ok.

That was until I was all of a sudden featured on a very popular website in my industry.

Guess what happened then?

My website crashed for 2 days. And I lost hundreds of potential e-mail subscribers, and thousands of dollars.

Since then, I switched my hosting to WPEngine (you can get 3 months off an annual plan with my affiliate link) and I’ve been extremely happy with them.

Yes, at $35+/month, it’s pricey. But since using WPEngine, my website never crashed, and their support is super responsive and helpful.

Every time I wanted to set up a new domain name or make any other changes to my website, they were extremely helpful in supporting me and guiding me through everything step-by-step.

As far as hosting goes, WPEngine would be my #1 pick. If I have to suggest an alternative, it’d be SiteGround. They arguably offer a lot more value for your money. You can read a detailed review of them on TechTage by hosting expert Rohit Palit.

Blog platform

Blog platform is the platform you’ll use to host your website / blog.

There are plenty of different platforms out there like WordPress, Square Space, Wix and others.

I personally use WordPress and have been extremely happy with it – it allows me to do everything I want to do, and with WPEngine, they automatically set it up for you.

I’ve seen other entrepreneurs use websites like Square Space, and have seen a lot more drawbacks and limitations of those website than benefits.

If you want to add a specific tool to your website (like a Table of Contents for your blog posts or a sidebar widget for collecting e-mail address), WordPress usually allows you to do it in minutes, while other tools might not have the option to do it at all.

Is WordPress a bit “harder” to learn than other softwares? Maybe. Maybe it used to be.

But nowadays, I find that for what you’ll need (creating a few website pages and blog posts), it’s pretty straightforward, and anyone can learn it in a matter of minutes or hours.

Website Theme

The final element of your website is getting a theme for your website. A theme helps you create a professional-looking website and add your own “look and feel” to it.

I personally swear by Studiopress Themes (affiliate link), which come out at around $130 for the first Theme you buy, look professional, and offer all the functionalities you would need to get to 10,000+ e-mail subscribers.

Setting up a theme is usually pretty straightforward as well, and will take from a few minutes to a few hours (based on which functionalities you’d like to set up on your blog).

Websites like Studiopress usually provide detailed step-by-step tutorials for setting up their themes, so you can quickly learn how to do all of this yourself.

Your website doesn’t need to be complicated either

The simpler your website, the better.

You don’t need 10 different pages on your website, or 10 different widgets in your sidebar.

In fact, creating a website that’s too cluttered can drastically decrease your e-mail sign up rates as the attention of your readers will be split in 100 different directions (rather than guiding them to sign up your e-mail list.

A great example of extreme simplicity that works is ZenHabits. It’s a super simple website:

And it’s also a multi-million dollar online business.

The only 5 pages you need on your website

There are really just 5 different pages you need on your website when you’re just starting out (with page #5 being optional until you’ve created at least 10+ pieces of Remarkable Content).

Page #1: Your Home Page

Your Homepage is perhaps the most important page on your website, as it’s the first page many of your website readers will see (or click to after they read one of your blog posts).

When one of your readers comes to your Homepage, they should really only have 2 options:

  • Subscribe to your e-mail list
  • Continue to your blog

Here’s a great example from Peter Nguyen:

And another great example from Sam Gavis-Hughson:

And another, more advanced example from Jenni Waldrop:

As mentioned in the chapter about Lead Magnets, Jenni follows a more advanced strategy where she links guides her website visitors to two different Lead Magnets based on how far they are in their business journeys.

If you’re thinking to yourself “why would I have this weird looking page and not my blog page as my homepage?”, the answer is simple.

These pages work (and I’ll show you how to create one later on in this guide). They typically convert 10-20% visitors into e-mail subscribers

That means that for every 1,000 people that visitor your website, you’ll get 100-200 new e-mail subscribers (rather than 10-20 you would typically get if you used your blog page instead).

To create your Home Page, you’ll usually need to create a landing page on your website (using a software like LeadPages is perfect for that), and then use it as your homepage (you can Google how to easily do that).

You’ll then use the 3-bullet copy you wrote in the opt-in copy chapter of this guide on your homepage.

Page #2: Your Blog Page

This one is pretty simple. You should have a standard blog page on your website that you link to from your blog page:

There’s no need to customize your page – you can use it as it’s set up in your theme. Here’s an example from Sam Gavis-Hughson:

Here’s another example from Will Darling:

And an example from my website:

Don’t overcomplicate this step – just create a simple blog page and move on!

Page #3: About page

Next is your about page. This is the page that many of your new readers will check out after they read some of your content.

It’s also one of the trickier parts of your website to write, which is why recommend:

  • Creating a SIMPLE about page when you’re just starting out with list-building
  • Improving your about page as you get better at copywriting

You likely won’t get thousands of e-mail subscribers from your about page for quite a long time, and the About page is far less important than your homepage, so I don’t believe it’s really worth spending hours and hours optimizing.

Instead, you can follow the guidelines below to create a simple and “good enough” about page.

The one thing to keep in mind is that your About page isn’t really about YOU (the entrepreneur). It’s about ME (the reader), and what you can do for me.

So don’t write an about page with your CV about yourself. Instead, show me how you’re like me, that you know what I feel like, and that you can help me out with solving my Problems Worth Solving.

I LOVE this example of an About page from Peter Nguyen, so let’s analyze it step by step and break down why it’s awesome:

Right from the start, we can see that the page is about the reader.

Peter “hooks” his readers by talking about the Problems Worth Solving like “my style is boring”, “nothing ever fits” and “people don’t take me seriously because of the way I dress”.

The readers who have those problems are hooked.

Next, Peter shares a BRIEF introduction about himself:

Notice that this introduction is still about the READERS (I want to help you look your absolute best).

Next, he talks about Tangible Results and Problems Worth Solving (similarly as you would in long-form opt-in copy):

Finally, he tells you what to do next (download his Epic Lead Magnets):

I love Peter’s page because it’s simple and well-written, and most importantly, helps him collect more e-mail addresses (which is the main purpose of your website!).

If we break down Peter’s page, we’ll notice that he follows a simple structure / template:

  • The Hook: He talks about the Problems Worth Solving (“my style is boring…”)
  • Credibility: He briefly introduces himself and shows you why you should trust him (“I worked 10 years as a menswear designer in NYC…”)
  • The Dream: He talks about Tangible Results (“look so good that you instantly command attention and respect of everyone in the business meeting”)
  • Call to Action: He shares his Epic Lead Magnets as a solution to your problems

You can follow a similar structure to write your own about page. Don’t worry about getting it perfect though – just make sure you’re covering the basics, and improve it over time.

Page #4: Landing page

The next type of page you’ll need on your website is the landing page.

You already know how to write this one as you learned about it in the opt-in copy chapter, and your home page will be a landing page.

But while you’ll only have one home page on your website, you’ll likely have more than one landing page.

Specifically, you’ll usually create new landing pages when:

  • You create more than one Epic Lead Magnet (you’ll create a dedicated landing page for each of them that you can then promote)
  • You promote your website through guest posting, online summits, podcast interviews, etc.  (you’ll usually create a dedicated landing page for each podcast, summit or guest post)

An example of the former option is my Ultimate Guide Checklist landing page, which you can access through the menu on my website:

For the latter, here’s an example you’re already familiar from Peter’s guest post, which leads to this dedicated landing page on Peter’s website:

You already know how to write 3-bullet copy for landing pages from the opt-in copy chapter of this guide.

However, this page will be slightly different than other landing pages on your website in the sense that it’s personalized to the specific audience (as you can see from the example above).

The main differences are:

  • You’ll usually use a “Welcome [WEBSITE] readers!” as your Catchy Headline
  • You’ll acknowledge that they listened to your podcast / read your guest post
  • You’ll talk about how your Epic Lead Magnet will help them take the logical next step

You can more or less use the same landing pages for different customized landing pages and just slightly tweak the headline and text to a specific audience.

Page #5: HUB Page

If you read my guide on content promotion, you’re already familiar with the concept of HUB pages as well. If you haven’t read that section yet, I recommend reading it now as I explain what HUB pages are and how they’ll help you grow your e-mail list.

While you won’t need to create HUB Pages when you’re just starting out with list-building, I do recommend creating them once you have at least 5-10 pieces of content written about a specific topic.

Once that happens, simply create a new HUB Page and add it to the menu on your website.

Here’s a phenomenal example of Sam Gavis-Hughson’s “Getting Started” HUB Page:

In this page, Sam guides his new readers through his best content on his website, from posts that he’s written years ago to ones he just published.

Another thing you can do if you ever decide to add a new “format” to your website (like a podcast or a YouTube channel) is create a HUB Page for the format.

Here’s a great example from Jenni Waldrop’s “six-minute makeovers” of Etsy Shops:

Jenni saw that her readers loved watching her critique different websites and created a whole section on her website dedicated to these as a HUB Page.

The only 5 pages you need on your website: A quick summary

In short, when you first set up your website, you need:

  • A homepage (a simple landing page): The first page your readers will see
  • A blog page: The page for your Remarkable Content
  • An about page: The page where your readers find out if your website is for them

That’s it!

Then, you can create additional:

  • Landing pages (for guest posts, podcasts, or new Epic Lead Magnets you create)
  • HUB pages (for organizing promoting your old content, once you have 10+ pieces of content written)

Those are really ALL the pages you need on your website. You don’t need a “work with me page” as you’ll be able to sell your products and services to your e-mail subscribers, and you don’t need a “contact me” page as you’ll be able to communicate with your readers through your e-mail list.

The Website Declutter

If you have a lot more pages on your website than mentioned (and you’re only getting a handful of e-mail subscribers through your e-mail list every month), your additional pages might be hurting your website more than they’re helping it.

If you have a sidebar with 10 different widgets, a menu with 10 different pages… and practically no e-mail subscribers, then STOP.

You don’t need all of those pages. They aren’t helping you build your e-mail list. Instead, they’re taking the attention of your readers AWAY from your e-mail list, which means you’ll get LESS e-mail subscribers.

If something on your website isn’t directly helping you get e-mail subscribers, remove it. You’ll be surprised to see your site-wide opt-in go up.

Opt-in Forms: The most important tool on your website

Ok, now that we talked about the key pages you should have on your website, let’s talk about how to further optimize your website to collect as many e-mail subscribers.

For that, we need Opt-in Forms. You’ve probably already seen a few of these on my website, like this form inside of the guide:

Or this pop up:

pop up

Some people find these “annoying” (and they CAN be, if they’re not RELEVANT to the problems of your audience), but they work. They work REALLY well, and they’ll likely help you get the bulk of your e-mail subscribers.

As we mentioned earlier, your e-mail list should be the front and center of your website. The opt-in forms will help you get there.

You can create different types of forms like these through a tool like Leadpages (the second image, the pop up above is created through that tool), or from tools within your e-mail provider (the first opt-in form above is created in ConvertKit).

There are other tools you could use to get more e-mail subscribers (like a “Welcome Mat” or “Hello Bar”), but I’ve found that those aren’t as crucial to list growth as the 3 types of forms we’ll cover in this guide, which is why I chose to omit them in this guide.

First, get the basics right. Then, if you want to use extra tools, go ahead and experiment with them!

What should you give away through your Opt-in Forms?

You’ll usually give away one of your Epic Lead Magnets through your opt-in forms.

Some people also like to call these “Content Upgrades” as they “Upgrade” your existing content on your website.

Practically, you’ll usually give away one of the three things:

  • A Relevant Lead Magnet: An Epic Lead Magnet you already created about a similar topic. For example, if I write an article about “how frequently should I e-mail my list?”, I would include this list-building guide as a Relevant Lead Magnet.
  • A PDF Version of a Guide: For ultra-long content like this guide, it makes sense to create a PDF version of the article and give it away to your e-mail subscribers. It’s a simple and effective way of collecting e-mail addresses through your content.
  • BONUS Tools or Checklists: You can offer a BONUS tool that upgrades your content (just make sure it’s EPIC). For example, I created a “Conference Battle Plan” for preparing for a conference in 24-48 hours as a Content Upgrade for my Ultimate Guide to Attending Conferences

For shorter blog posts, I usually just offer a Relevant Lead Magnet. For guides like this one, I always start with offering the PDF version, and sometimes create bonuses that support the guide.

The only 3 opt-in forms you need

Beyond landing pages (which we already covered), you’ll only need 3 different types of opt-in forms on your website:

  • Pop Up Opt-in Forms
  • Blog Post Opt-in Forms
  • Sidebar Opt-in Forms

Once you set these up, your website will be fully optimized for collecting new e-mail subscribers, and you’ll be able to continue onwards to creating Remarkable Content.

Pop Ups

First, let’s talk about pop ups. These are perhaps the MOST important out of all the opt-in forms. These are the forms that “pop up” on the screen after a reader starts reading your website after 10-30 seconds, like this one on my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks:

Why do we need these “pop ups”, you ask? Because they’ll convert an INSANE amount of your website into e-mail subscribers.

For example, this simple pop up above turns 39% of my Ultimate Guide into e-mail subscribers, For every 1,000 people that see the guide, that’s 390 new e-mail subscribers. Not bad, eh?

To write the copy for these pop-ups, you can either use Minimalist Opt-in Copy (like I did in the example above), or 3-bullet copy, like this example from Sam Gavis-Hughson:

There’s no “right” or “wrong” here. Either approach can work. Use the one that’s closer to you, experiment with it, then iterate and improve.

There’s a lot of “data” out there on the “best timing” of these, but in my opinion, it’s not worth your energy to find the “ideal” timing of pop ups. Instead, spend the extra time creating better lead magnets or writing better opt-in copy.

I use a 10 seconds timer on most of my pop ups, and it works just fine.

These pop-ups should convert at least 10% of your readers into e-mail subscribers (you can look up the “form-specific opt-in rates” in your e-mail provider or opt-in form software.

Blog posts

Next, you’ll want to use Opt-in Forms at the end of your blog posts (or, occasionally, with longer content, within your blog posts), like this example from Will Darling:

You should always have an opt-in form at the bottom of your blog posts. These won’t convert as well as pop ups, and getting a 2-5% opt-in rate on these is usually a great start.

You can use very similar copy to your pop ups in your blog post opt-in forms (as well as sidebars) as well – you can make it slightly longer or shorter if needed, but generally, you don’t need to reinvent the wheel.

Sidebar

Finally, you’ll want to add an opt-in form into your sidebar of the website (if you have one). This should be the first item in your sidebar so it’s always visible and on top.

Here’s a great example from Geraldine Lepere:

Writing your copy for a sidebar opt-in, as well as opt-in rates, will be pretty similar to writing your opt-in forms for your blog posts.

The only difference is that in your sidebar, you’ll usually have one “main” Epic Lead Magnet (you can use the one you use on your Homepage of your website), rather than an ultra-relevant lead magnet (because creating a dedicates sidebar for each of your blog posts might require some advanced coding).

How much time should you spend setting up your website?

Going through ALL of these steps should take you 1-2 days, and NOT weeks.

It’s better to make your website “good enough” and move on to actually creating and promoting your content to build an e-mail list, than to spend weeks tweaking your website and putting it out into the world.

It’s better to launch it, get some visitors to it, see what your site-wide opt-in rate is, then gradually improve it with each piece of content you create or promote.

Summary: How to Create a High-Converting Website

That’s it!

In this chapter, we went over all the basics and most important elements of creating your High-Converting Website.

First, we talked about why creating a High-Converting Website even matters BEFORE creating Remarkable Content (don’t send your traffic to a leaky bucket!).

Then, we established that the #1 goal of your website is to collect e-mail subscribers, and how to measure how well your website converts (through a “side-wide opt-in rate”, which should be at 5-10%).

We also covered why you don’t need to spend $5,000 on a website design, and went over the 4 crucial steps to creating your website:

  • Buy a website domain (through GoDaddy or Hover)
  • Get hosting for your domain (through WPEngine)
  • Set up your blog platform (I recommend WordPress)
  • Add a theme to your website (StudioPress themes are amazing)

We then went over the 5 types of pages you’ll need to create:

  • Homepage: The first page your readers will see (a simple landing page)
  • Blog page: The page for your Remarkable Content
  • About page: The page where your readers find out if your website is for them
  • Landing pages: For guest posts, podcasts, or new Epic Lead Magnets you create
  • HUB pages: For organizing and promoting your old content, once you have 10+ pieces of content written

And we also talked about why you don’t need “work with me”, “contact pages” and other pages that add more clutter to your website.

We talked about 3 types of “content upgrades” you can give away through your opt-in forms:

  • A Relevant Lead Magnet: An Epic Lead Magnet you already created about a similar topic.
  • A PDF Version of a Guide: A PDF version of a long-form piece of content.
  • BONUS Tools or Checklists: Upgrades that make your EPIC content easier to implement.

We talked about the 3 types of opt-in forms you should have on your website:

  • Pop Up Opt-in Forms: Forms that “pop up” after 10 seconds after someone visits your website or blog post
  • Blog Post Opt-in Forms: Forms that you can include at the end of your blog posts
  • Sidebar Opt-in Forms: Forms that you can include in your website sidebar

And finally, I explained why you should set up your website in 1-2 days (and NOT weeks).

Continue to Chapter 12: How to Break the Magical 1,000 Subscribers Mark

Your turn: What’s one thing that helped you increase your site-wide opt-in rate?

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit

How to Promote Your Content: An In-Depth Guide

By Primoz Bozic 2 Comments

You’re currently reading Chapter 10 of The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

To grow your e-mail list, you need to promote your remarkable content, ESPECIALLY when you’re just starting out with growing your e-mail list.

But how do you promote your content in a way that’s authentic, non-spammy, and doesn’t get people to hate you and kick you out of online communities in your industry?

That’s exactly what we’ll talk about this SUPER in-depth post.

In the first part of this post, we’ll cover IF and WHEN you should be promoting your content (the answer to that questions isn’t black and white), and we’ll also look at the 80/20 Content Promotion Myth.

In the second part of this post, we’ll take a detailed look at 21 proven content promotion strategies that you can start using today (as well as which strategies YOU should use in your business to create your own content promotion plan).

We’ll also break down and analyze countless real-world content promotion examples, such as a recent book launch of Best-Selling author Ramit Sethi.

Let’s dive in!

How much time should you spend promoting your content?

In one of his viral articles, Derek Halpern from Social Triggers famously said that you should spend 20% of the time writing Remarkable Content, and 80% of the time promoting it.

As I interviewed 20 established online entrepreneurs with e-mail lists of 1,000-40,000 e-mail subscribers to write this guide, I decided to put that technique to the test and see just how many entrepreneurs actually spend 80% of their time promoting their content.

In other words, do you really need to spend 80% of your time promoting your content to build an e-mail list of 10,000+ e-mail subscribers?

The surprising answer? Not necessarily.

For example, here’s what Peter Nguyen from The Essential Man said about content promotion:

“I used to share my content on Facebook, Tweet it out, share it on Instagram, e-mail people and ask them to share it, but it never really worked. It just wasn’t moving the needle for my business.

Now I just focus on creating awesome content for my readers, share it with my mailing list and optimize it for SEO. I also make sure the “Wikipedia Strategy” where I keep linking to my old content through all the new content that I create.

I play to my strengths and focus on writing and dominating SEO.”

Danny Margulies from Freelance to Win shares a similar story:

“I just focus on writing great content. All these other things, like “20% writing, 80% promotion”, I’m NOT a believer of them. I do almost no promotion, all of my creative energy goes into WRITING, pushing the bar. Some people are great at networking and promote their content, but I’m not so I don’t do it.”

Finally, Luke McIntosh said:

“I don’t do any content promotion. I just post my content. That’s the beautiful thing about YouTube. It does the work for you if you make good content.”

These are all entrepreneurs with tens of thousands of e-mail subscribers (and there are more examples like them – entrepreneurs like Geraldine Lepere and Christina Rebuffet also just post their content on YouTube, Rusty Gray just focuses on SEO…

So is the 80/20 Content Promotion Rule a myth? Not necessarily.

Through my interviews, I discovered that promoting your content DOES work, and it can be crucial to getting your online business off the ground.

Here are some great examples:

  • Michelle Rebosio, went from 0 to 1,000+ e-mail subscribers in less than a month by creating an Epic Lead Magnet and promoting it through Facebook Groups
  • Olivia Angelescu went from 0 to 400+ e-mail subscribers in a few days by creating an Epic Lead Magnet and sharing it in a Facebook Group
  • Peter Nguyen got 1,000+ new e-mail subscribers through a Guest Post that linked back to an Epic Lead Magnet on his website

Content Promotion is a nuanced topic, and isn’t black and white.

It’s not true that you should always spend 80% of the time promoting your content. It’s also not true that you don’t need to promote your content.

Here’s what I can conclude based on all the data that I collected though.

There are 7 guidelines you can follow that will help you figure out exactly when you should go the extra mile with promoting your content and when you should skip content promotion altogether, based on how big your e-mail list is, your strengths, and the type of content you’re creating,

Should You Promote Your Content? Answer These 7 Questions

You can ask yourself these 7 questions to get a clear idea if you should promote a piece of Remarkable Content or an Epic Lead Magnet you just wrote using the techniques I’ll share in this post.

Q1: Is Content Promotion my Strength or Weakness?

To some online entrepreneurs, promoting their content comes pretty easily. Others would rather spend 3 hours at a dentist having their teeth pulled than to promote their content.

While you might have to “suck it up” and go through a few hours of content promotion when you’re starting out with growing your e-mail list (which, as Karen Dudek-Brannan says, is probably not as bad as working 40-70h/week in a job you hate), it doesn’t mean you’ll have to promote your content forever.

If content promotion is hard for you, use the tactics for overcoming your fear of self-promotion from the previous chapter of this guide to get to 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers. Then, once you have the critical mass of e-mail subscribers that can promote the content for you, you can focus on just creating more Remarkable Content like Danny Margulies or Peter Nguyen.

If, on the other hand, you find that content promotion comes easy for you (and brings you the results you want it to), you should by all means spend 80% of the time promoting your content and 20% creating it, ESPECIALLY if creating content feels harder to you than promoting it.

As a fun fact: When I spoke with Derek Halpern about his 80/20 Content Promotion Rule, he said that the reason he even came up with it was that a lot of people hated writing but wanted to grow their blog audience, so this rule specifically serves those people.

If you love writing but hate content promotion, that rule might not be the best rule for you to follow.

Q2: How big is my existing network?

If you’ve been working in an industry like International Development (Michelle Rebosio) or Speech Pathology (Karen Dudek-Brannan) for all of your life, and decide to turn it into a business, you’ll likely have a large professional network.

If you have a lot of existing relationships with people that might be able to spread the word about your content, you should absolutely let them know about any Remarkable Content you create to spread the word about it.

The same goes for when you grow your business and your business network – the more people you know, the easier it will be for you to promote your content.

But if you don’t know anyone in your industry yet, you might want to spend less time promoting your content (and perhaps more time building relationships with top experts in your industry, for which you should read The Ultimate Guide to Surrounding Yourself With Successful Entrepreneurs).

P.S. Did you just mention how I “casually mentioned” my Ultimate Guide here – that’s a form of content promotion as well!

Q3: How big is my e-mail list?

A trend that I noticed with online entrepreneurs that have 5,000+ or 10,000+ e-mail subscribers is that they generally spend very little time promoting their content, UNLESS it’s a piece of content that they spend tens or hundreds of hours creating.

By contrast, I noticed that they DID promote their content a lot more when they were just starting out with growing their e-mail list (until they came to a point of diminishing results, or decided to focus their time and energy into their strengths).

Most online entrepreneurs that have e-mail lists of tens of thousands e-mail subscribers simply publish their content, e-mail it out to their e-mail subscribers, then let them spread the word about it. Many of them focus some of their attention on SEO, which also helps them promote their content through Google.

If your e-mail list is still pretty small (less than 1,000 e-mail subscribers), I definitely recommend giving content promotion a shot (who knows, you might notice it’s actually not so bad or that you enjoy it) until you do get to 1,000+ e-mail subscribers, and you should definitely at least promote your Epic Lead Magnet.

But once your e-mail list grows and you see that every time you publish a piece of content it keeps getting traction for days or weeks to come, you can shift your attention to simply creating more content, rather than aggressively promoting it.

Q4: How remarkable is my content?

Not all content is made the same.

Promoting an Epic Ultimate Guide you spent 50 hours creating isn’t the same as promoting a blog post you put together in an hour.

If you put yourself into the minds of people who are exposed to your content through an online community, they’ll be a lot more excited about an Epic Ultimate Guide than a “decent” blog post (which they might consider spam without even reading it).

Same thing goes for e-mailing your network – if you e-mailed all of your professional friends every time you publish a blog post they might get sick of you / feel like you’re just using them – while if you only e-mailed them once a year when you created an incredible resource, they might be excited to help you spread the word about it.

Deep down, you know that. That’s why you’ll feel a lot more confident about promoting content that’s truly remarkable (that you spent hours and hours putting together). You know the work that went into it, and you know that people will notice it.

For example, content promotion definitely isn’t my strength, and I never do it for “regular” blog posts I write. But every time I write an Ultimate Guide, I take the time to spread the word about it. And with The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List that I already spent 100+ hours creating, I’ll definitely take the extra time to promote it once it’s finished.

Though of course, I won’t follow the 80-20 Promotion Rule, as promoting it for 400+ hours would quickly lead to diminishing returns.

Q5: What is my main content platform?

There are certain platforms like Youtube, Quora, Reddit, Pinterest or Instagram that promote your content “for you”.

The entrepreneurs I interviewed that use YouTube as a main list-building strategy (Will Darling, Christina Rebuffet, Geraldine Lepere, Luke McIntosh and Sam Gavis-Hughson) might spend up to 20 hours creating a YouTube video, and then let the YouTube promote it to their audience for them.

For them, it makes more sense to spend another 20 hours creating another YouTube video than to promote their video on the internet (as they noticed that consistent publishing is one of the key ways to build your e-mail list through YouTube).

If, on the other hand, you’re publishing content on your blog and you don’t have an existing e-mail list that you can promote your content to (or your e-mail list is lower than 1,000 e-mail subscribers), then content promotion will be more important to build traction around your content.

Q6: What kind of results am I getting from content promotion?

“Double down on what works, and stop doing what doesn’t”.

That’s a golden piece of advice I got from one of my mentors, Ramit Sethi, a few years ago, and I still carry close to my heart.  

This rule couldn’t be more true when it comes to content promotion.

I encourage you to try some of the different content promotion strategies that I’ll share in this chapter and just see what works and what you enjoy doing.

Do more of the strategies that work. Stop doing the ones that don’t.

Do more of the strategies you enjoy. Stop doing the ones you hate.

You don’t NEED to constantly use 20 strategies to promote your content, you just need to find the 1-2 strategies that work for you and use them over and over again.

And if you notice that promoting your content doesn’t make a difference for your business (like Peter Nguyen), then, by all means, just spend more time creating content instead of promoting it.

Q7: Can I create a snowball effect?

Some Epic Lead Magnets or pieces of Remarkable Content that you create in your business will take off more and faster than others. Some might even go viral!

Those pieces of content are the ones you should spend the extra time promoting, as you know that they resonate with your audience, as well as provide leverage for you to promote more easily.

If a piece of content is already getting a lot of love / views / shares, more people are likely to check it out and share it with others, and you can even mention that as you promote it.

Your goal with these pieces of content is to create a “snowball” effect that leads to more and more traction over time, rather than saying “oh this is doing well, so I don’t have to promote it”.

A quick recap of the 7 questions

By asking yourself these 7 questions:

  • “Is content promotion my strength or weakness?”
  • “How big is my existing network?”
  • “How big is my e-mail list?”
  • “How remarkable is my content?”
  • “What is my main content platform?”
  • “What kind of results am I getting from content promotion?”
  • “Can I create a snowball effect?”

You can more easily determine if you should promote a piece of content on a “case-by-case basis”.

If content promotion is your strength, spend more time promoting content.

If you have a big network in the industry, spend more time promoting content.

The bigger your e-mail list, the less you need to promote your content.

The more remarkable your content, the more time you should spend promoting it.

If you are publishing your content on a platform with an existing audience like YouTube, focus your energy into creating more content rather than promoting it.

If content promotion is significantly helping your grow your e-mail list, keep doing it – if not, spend more time creating content (or revisit your business idea).

If a piece of content starts to gain a lot of traction, spend extra time promoting it to create a snowball effect.

Ok – now you should have a LOT more clarity around whether you should promote your content or not.

Now let’s talk about the actual strategies for promoting your content!

21 Simple and Effective Content Promotion Strategies

In the first part of this post, we talked about if (and when) you should be promoting your content.

We concluded that you should indeed promote your content, especially if you’re at the early stages of growing your online business and have less than 1,000 e-mail subscribers (though you might be able to get away with less content promotion as your business grows).

Once you’ve written your Epic Lead Magnet or the first few pieces of Remarkable Content, promoting your content can help you go from 100 to 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers over the course of a few weeks.

In this chapter, we’ll go over 20 content promotion strategies that will help you authentically promote your content to the right people, without feeling sleazy or spammy or getting banned from online communities.

The Content Promotion Matrix

Here’s where these strategies fall visually on the Content Promotion Matrix:

Since 21 strategies is A LOT, I organized them into different categories for you.

First, we’ll go over 3 “meta-strategies” that you should always keep in mind when promoting your content:

  • Be So Good They Can’t Ignore You
  • Shout it From The Rooftops
  • The 80/20 Rule of Content Promotion

Then, we’ll go over the remaining 18 strategies which I organized into 4 different categories for you:

  • Inbound Short-Term Promotion: You will use these quick & easy strategies to promote your content to your EXISTING audience  
  • Inbound Long-Term Promotion: You will use these strategies that require a larger time commitment to promote your content to your EXISTING audience
  • Outbound Short-Term Promotion: You will use these quick & easy strategies to reach NEW audiences  
  • Outbound Long-Term Promotion: You will use these strategies that require a larger time commitment to reach NEW audiences

I organized split these into inbound/outbound strategies (outbound strategies will typically require you to promote your content outside of your website / e-mail list, while inbound strategies will help you to promote your content within your website / e-mail list).

I also organized them into short-term and long-term strategies (short-term strategies are strategies that are quick & easy to execute, while long-term strategies are strategies that will require a bigger time commitment, or that you’ll keep implementing over and over again).

Meta-Strategies:

  • Be so good they can’t ignore you
  • Shout it from the rooftops
  • The 80+20 rule of content promotion

Inbound Short-Term Promotion:

  • Welcome e-mail
  • High-converting website
  • List Launch

Inbound Long-Term Promotion:

  • Wikipedia strategy
  • Cliffhangers
  • Nurture sequence
  • HUB pages

Outbound Short-Term Promotion:

  • Close the loop
  • Simple share
  • Social media share
  • Promo video
  • Email everyone

Outbound Long-Term Promotion:

  • Guest posting
  • Partnerships
  • Podcasts & summits
  • FAQ sites
  • Casual mentions
  • Media publications

Ok, let’s dive in!

Content Promotion Meta-Strategies

Let’s kick things off with two “meta-strategies”. These are two principles you should always keep on top of mind as you’re promoting your content, regardless of which content promotion strategy you’re using:

  • Strategy #1: Be So Good They Can’t Ignore You
  • Strategy #2: Shout it From The Rooftops
  • Strategy #3: The 80/20 Rule of Content Promotion

Strategy #1: Be So Good They Can’t Ignore You

Yep, this is a reference to Cal Newport’s phonomenal book, So Good They Can’t Ignore You. While this book is all about excelling in your career, I feel like the same principles apply to creating and promoting your content.

Remember these two quotes from the last chapter on “putting yourself out there:

Ryan Hildebrandt said:

“When you’re afraid to put your content out there, sometimes your content just isn’t that good / unique. The solution isn’t to work on your mental game, it’s to write better content.”

Karen Dudek-Brannan shared Ryan’s opinion:

“I know my content. If you are confident in your solution, you can say “I know my stuff, this works, I validated it myself”, if I know what I have is what people needed.”

When it comes to Content Promotion, creating Remarkable Content or a truly EPIC Lead Magnet is 90% of the battle.

When you’re creating content, your goal should be to create the “single best piece of content out there”, which will absolutely require you to go the Extra Mile.

What I noticed from my own experience is that when I create content that I KNOW is by far the best out there:

  • A lot more of my readers share and recommend it to their friends on their own
  • It’s a lot easier for me to put myself out there and promote it
  • A lot more people will notice how good the content is and appreciate it

Promoting a remarkable piece of content will feel completely different than a mediocre piece of content.

Think about the last time you read a great book. You probably shared it with your friends or talked about it because it was so good, right?

On the flip side, if you read a book that was just “okay”, you wouldn’t really recommend it to anyone, even if the author themself asked you to do it.

Before you apply the strategies in this chapter of the guide, make sure you took the time to create content that’s so good it can’t be ignored.

Strategy #2: Shout it From the Rooftops

What about when you DID spend hours and hours creating an incredible piece of content that you just KNOW that people need to know about?

That’s when, as Sam Gavis-Hughson would say, you “shout it from the rooftops”:

“Once I finished my free e-book, I went into free Facebook groups, reddit, wrote a few blog posts about the e-book, even guest posted about it. I always talked about the FAST strategy (shouted it from the rooftops), but only shared additional examples etc. in the e-book.”

When you spent 20+ hours creating something incredible, people NEED to hear about it. That’s why you should use every opportunity you get to talk about your Epic Lead Magnet or Remarkable Content, and genuinely “shout it from the rooftops”.

Strategy #3: The 80/20 Rule of Content Promotion

Something that kept coming up over and over again in the interviews that I did for this guide is the 80/20 Rule of Content Promotion:

You should only focus on a few content promotion strategies that work for you, while ignoring all others.

For example:

  • Peter Nguyen said that Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, and asking people to share his content never really worked for him (but a guest post brought him 1,000+ e-mail subscribers)
  • Danny Margulies happily ignores most content promotion strategies, but attracted thousands of e-mail subscribers through Guest Posting and Media Publications
  • Luke McIntosh tried using Facebook Groups and Reddit to promote his content which didn’t really work, but built an e-mail list of 25,000+ e-mail subscribers through YouTube videos

While I share 18 specific content promotion strategies in this guide, chances are only a handful of those will work for you (and you’ll enjoy doing). Instead of trying to do EVERYTHING, experiment and find a handful of tactics that work well for you, keep doing them, and ignore all others.

Inbound Short-Term Content Promotion Strategies

Ok, let’s talk about some of the more practical content promotion strategies. First, we’ll talk about inbound short-term strategies.

These are quick & easy strategies that you can use to promote your content to your EXISTING audience and generate some initial traction and word-of-mouth with every piece of content you publish:

  • Strategy #4: Welcome e-mail
  • Strategy #5: High-converting website
  • Strategy #6: List Launch

You’ll use these strategies through your own website or e-mail list (whether you have 100 or 10,000 e-mail subscribers).

Strategy #4: Welcome E-mail

If you went through the steps of the previous chapter on setting up your e-mail list, your welcome e-mail or incentive e-mail should already invite your readers to read your Epic Lead Magnet.

This means that every single new person that subscribes to your e-mail list will have the opportunity to read your best content.

Once you have more than one Epic Lead Magnet or a few pieces of really popular Remarkable Content, you can work those into your welcome e-mail as well.

Here’s a great example from Nagina Abdullah’s Welcome E-mail:

In her e-mail, Nagina lets you know about two popular blog posts on her website (5 everyday spices that can help you lose weight and the masala mixed nuts recipe) as soon as you subscribe to your e-mail list.

If 100 new people subscribe to your e-mail list over a course of a week, that’s 100 opportunities to put your best content in front of your new readers who are eager to learn from you. That’s 100 opportunities for your new readers to read, love and share your content with their friends (and promote it FOR you).

Strategy #5: Your High-Converting Website

The final short-term inbound content promotion strategy is to sprinkle your best content throughout your website.

Your Epic Lead Magnet should be in the front and centre of your website, and all of the roads should lead to it.

Here’s a great example from Peter Nguyen.

As soon as you come to his website, you’ll get the chance to download his Ultimate Spring Style Guide:

Then, as you continue to his blog page, you can find his guides through his menu on the top of the website:

As well as the sidebar on his blog:

We’ll cover all the specific places where you should include your Epic Lead Magnets in more detail in the chapter on creating your High-Converting Website.

For now, all you need to know is that whenever you create a new piece of Remarkable Content you want to spread the word about, it should be accessible within 1-2 clicks from any page on your website.

Strategy #6: List Launch

Whenever you publish a new piece of content on your website, the very first thing you should do is e-mail your e-mail subscribers about it.

This is what I call the “List Launch”. Instead of launching your online course or a coaching product, you’re launching a new piece of content to your e-mail list, and you should treat it with the same rigour as you would treat a product launch.

You should go through this step regardless of whether you have 100 or 10,000 e-mail subscribers.

You can launch your content to your e-mail list in a number of different ways:

  • The single e-mail launch
  • The 5-day launch
  • The EPIC launch

Which of these launch formats you choose will depend on the type of content you created.

The single e-mail launch:

This is the launch format you’ll most commonly use (probably in 80-90% of the cases), every time you publish a new piece of Remarkable Content.

For example, when I published my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks, I sent a single e-mail to my e-mail subscribers:

When I recently wrote a blog post about Temi, a transcription tool that I love, I wrote a similar e-mail to my e-mail list:

Whenever you publish a new blog post, the single e-mail launch should be your go-to way for sharing your content with your e-mail subscribers.

You can simply talk about:

  • Problem Worth Solving: The problem(s) that your new piece of content solves
  • Tangible Outcomes: How your readers will benefit from reading this new piece of content
  • Remarkable Content: Invite your new readers to read (and share) your new content

If we apply the above framework to my second example, it would look something like this:

  • Problem Worth Solving: You have a lot of interviews you want to transcribe, but it’s time consuming or prohibitively expensive
  • Tangible Outcome: Transcribe hours and hours of interviews within minutes, at 1/10 of a cost of regular transcriptions
  • Remarkable Content: Check out my new post about Temi, this amazing transcription tool

Writing an e-mail like this should only take you 10-20 minutes, and will be a great option for most of your content.

The exception is when one of your pieces of content gains a lot of traction – in that case, you might want to follow up this e-mail with a few e-mails that acknowledge that and invite your readers to read it if they haven’t done so yet.

Here are some examples of follow up e-mails I could write for my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks:

  • “This is how Jack wrote a blog post that got 200,000+ views”: I could share a story about how one of my readers used my guide to get a Tangible Result (and invite others to read the guide as well)
  • “This is what people are saying about my sticky idea guide”: I could share a few raving comments on my guide with my e-mail list (and invite my subscribers to read it)
  • “How to come up with your sticky idea in 7 easy steps”: I could point my readers to a specific chapter in the guide (that they might not have read yet)

The general rules here are:

  • The more your piece of content takes off, the more e-mails you should send about it (the snowball effect) as you’re likely to reach exponentially more people.
  • The more work you put into a piece of content (or the more detailed it is), the more interesting e-mails you can send to your e-mail list about it.

For example, if I wanted to, I could definitely send out more e-mails about my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks (or even turn it into a 5-day launch if I chose so), since it’s deep enough to create 3-5 strong e-mails about it, and got great feedback from my audience.

My blog post about Temi on the other hand is a lot less detailed, so it might not make sense to spend as much time promoting it to my audience.

The 5-day launch

The 5-day launch is the next “level” of a launch, and will usually include sending 3-5 e-mails about your new piece of content to your e-mail list over the course of 5-7 days (sometimes longer).

You’ll want to use the 5-day launch for your Epic Lead Magnets and Remarkable Content that you spent 20+ hours creating, that you really want to “shout from the rooftops”.

If you took the time to create this incredible resource, you want to give it all the attention it deserves so it can reach as many people as possible, and for that, sending a single e-mail is not enough.

You should launch your Epic Lead Magnets (or Remarkable Content) in a similar way as you would launch a new online course that you spent hours and hours creating (and you could even launch it in a similar way).

Your 5-day launch will consist of 3 parts:

  • Anticipation: You’ll spend 1-3 e-mails building anticipation and suspense around your Epic Lead Magnet (or even have your readers contribute to it)
  • Reveal: You’ll reveal your Epic Lead Magnet to your e-mail subscribers with a BIG BANG
  • Follow up: You’ll follow up with 1-3 e-mails with success stories from your Epic Lead Magnet, BONUS chapters and resources, or raving comments about it

Here’s a great example of a 5-day launch from Heidi Sew from Successful Fashion Designer for her Ultimate Guide to Creating Your Fashion Portfolio.

This 5-day launch was extended over a few weeks (rather than a few days), but follows the same principles we talk about here.

First, she sent out an e-mail asking her readers for resources to include in her guide (anticipation e-mail):

Then, she sent a P.S. in one of her Podcast e-mails further “planting the seed” about her guide (second anticipation e-mail):

In her third e-mail (The Reveal), she revealed her new guide:

After the reveal, she sent a Follow Up E-mail about a BONUS chapter of her guide:

And another Follow Up E-mail where she mentioned the guide and shared an extra video related to her guide:

Her 5-day launch sequence looked like this:

  • Anticipation:
    • Email #1: Can I get your advice for my guide?
    • Email #2: P.S. my guide goes live this Friday!
  • The Reveal:
    • Email #3: The guide is live!
  • Follow Up:
    • Email #4: Get the bonus chapter of the guide!
    • Email #5: Here’s a video related to the guide

This way, she was able to generate a lot more buzz around her guide than she would with a single e-mail launch.

Let’s say that like Heidi, you’ve spent 20+ hours developing an Ultimate Guide for your readers.

In your Anticipation E-mails, you can:

  • Send out a survey related to the guide
  • Ask your readers what they’d like you to cover in the guide
  • Share a “preview chapter” of the guide
  • “Plant the seed” when the guide will be launching

These will get your readers excited and talking about the guide before you even launch it. It’s like knowing a week in advance that you’ll go to this amazing restaurant, rather than just deciding you’ll go there spontaneously. This way, you get to really savour the experience days before.

In your Reveal E-mail, you can:

  • Reveal your guide
  • Talk about the Problems Worth Solving and Tangible Outcomes related to the guide
  • Ask readers to comment on it or share it

This e-mail is very similar to the single e-mail launch, and it’s also the most straightforward e-mail to write as your guide will do most of the work for you.

In your Follow Up E-mails, you can:

  • Share BONUS chapters or resources of the guide
  • Talk about the results of your readers that successfully used your guide
  • Share Raving Comments on the guide
  • Create and share follow-up resources (videos, blog posts or other resources) related to the guide
  • Ask your readers for the feedback on the guide (what they liked, and what they didn’t like)

Typically, you’ll want to send out:

  • 1-2 Anticipation E-mails
  • 1 Reveal E-mail
  • 1-2 Follow Up E-mails

Though it’s totally fine to tweak these guidelines to your situation. There’s nothing wrong with sending out 3 Anticipation or Follow Up E-mails!

The larger your audience, the more e-mails it makes sense to send. If you have only 100 e-mail subscribers, you might want to send a few less e-mails (as sending extra e-mails will bring diminishing returns).

If you have LESS than 100 e-mail subscribers, you should be focusing on getting to 100+ e-mail subscribers, rather than sending out e-mails to your existing e-mail subscribers.

However, if you already have thousands of e-mail subscribers, sending out 5 e-mails to promote your guide to your audience makes perfect sense.

The EPIC Launch

Finally, we have an “EPIC” Launch format.

This is a launch that typically stretches out over a few weeks where you’ll send 5+ (or tens of) e-mails to your audience about your new resource. The EPIC Launch will usually be very similar to launching a book, with a lot of build up and follow up e-mails.

I recommend doing an EPIC launch once:

  • You already have an audience of hundreds (or thousands) of e-mail subscribers
  • You’re releasing an in-depth EPIC resource that you spent 50+ or 100+ hours creating

You can think of the epic launch as an extended 5-day launch. You’ll follow the same framework for Anticipation, Reveal, and Follow Up E-mails, though there might be a lot more of those e-mails.

Because your resource will be insanely detailed, you’ll have plenty to talk about in those e-mails.

One additional element of an EPIC Launch are EPIC Events.

These are events that typically engage your community, get your readers to talk about your new resource and help you spread the word about it.

Here are some examples of EPIC Events.

  • You could do a “launch party” once the resource is live – a live call where you talk about the resource and answer questions about it
  • You could do a “challenge” around your resource, like Gabriela Pereira’s Book Club where she walks her readers through her book
  • You could start a Private Facebook Group where your readers go through your resource, discuss it and give you feedback on it
  • You could offer critiques or makeovers to your audience (for example, if you were a stylist, you could offer 3 of your readers live style makeovers)
  • You could do a Q & A call a week after launching the resource where you coach your readers on the same topic as the resource

The sky is the limit here. You can have fun with this process, run experiments, and see which EPIC Events resonate with your audience.

Here’s a great example of an EPIC Launch from Ramit Sethi, who recently launched his updated book on personal finance. 90% of these e-mails talk about his book.

And since I love going into the trenches on case studies like this, let’s look at the most interesting parts of his launch.

Anticipation E-mails:

In the first e-mail, titled “guess what happened 10 years ago?”, he revealed that he wrote his book 10 years ago:

He shared a few interesting “behind the scenes” stories:

He wraps up the e-mail by inviting his readers to share success stories from his book and hints at a big announcement:

In the second Anticipation E-mail, he announces his new, updated version of his book:

He also includes two EPIC events in his e-mail. First, he lets his readers know that they’ll get access to a handful of videos from his online courses if they pre-order the book:

As well as an opportunity to be coached by him through a Private Facebook Group:

In his next Anticipation e-mail, Ramit invited his readers to his book tour:

Another interesting EPIC Event was his interview with Mark Manson about the book (he also shared a few other interviews after this one):

He then shared a nation-wide book tour:

In his Reveal E-mail, he announces that the book is live, and invites you buy a copy (or 5) of his book:

In his first Follow Up E-mail, he announces a LIVE Q & A that he’s doing online:

In his first Follow Up E-mail, he announces a LIVE Q & A that he’s doing online:

Then, he writes about a “mistake he made when writing the book”:

In his next e-mail, he shares “6 lessons he learned on his book tour”:

And in his final e-mail (so far), he shares that he’s live-streaming his sold-out book tour event:

WOAH, that was a lot, right!?

Don’t worry, you don’t need to write 30+ e-mails about your next guide or fly all over the country to promote it.

But I thought I’d show you a great example of how a master promotes content that he spent hundreds of hours creating, and show you that he follows the exact same frameworks we are talking about in this guide.

You might also get some of your own ideas for your own Epic Launches ;).

Here’s a quick recap of most interesting elements of Ramit’s book launch:

  • Anticipation: I wrote a book 10 years ago, big announcement tomorrow
  • Anticipation + EPIC EVENTS: New book coming up, pre-order it and get access to a few course videos + private facebook group opportunity
  • Anticipation + EPIC EVENT: Come to the book tour!
  • Anticipation + EPIC EVENT: Podcast interviews talking about the book
  • The Reveal: The new book is live! Buy a few copies
  • Follow up + EPIC EVENT: Live Q & A
  • Follow up: Book is #7 on Amazon!
  • Follow up: A mistake I made writing the book
  • Follow up: 6 lessons I learned on book tour
  • Follow up + EPIC EVENT: Book tour live stream

Pretty awesome, huh?

While not quite on the same scale as Ramit’s book launch, I’m also doing an EPIC Launch for my Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List.

If you’re subscribed to my e-mail list, you might have noticed that:

  • I sent out a survey about list-building to write a guide you love
  • Hinted at releasing the guide in a few of my e-mails before the release
  • I’m sending you each chapter of the guide as it’s written
  • Asked for your feedback on the guide so I can make it even better

And in the future weeks, there will be a few EPIC events as well:

  • There will be a big “launch party” once the guide is finished
  • I’m doing a “website critique challenge” for my e-mail subscribers over the next few days
  • And a few other surprises that I won’t share yet

While a big book tour across the country might be out of reach to you for now, you could DEFINITELY host a few EPIC Events like these next time you launch an Epic Lead Magnet to generate more buzz around it.

Inbound Long-Term Content Promotion Strategies

Ok, let’s talk about long-term content promotion strategies.

These are long-term strategies that you can use to promote your content to your EXISTING audience and generate additional streams of traffic throughout your website for years to come.

This strategies will help you make sure that the content you create doesn’t get lost in the trenches of your website, and that your new readers can find your best content you’ve written months (or years) ago.

Here are the strategies that we’ll cover in this section:

  • Strategy #7: Wikipedia strategy
  • Strategy #8: Cliffhangers
  • Strategy #9: Nurture sequence
  • Strategy #10: HUB pages

Let’s dive in!

Strategy #7: Wikipedia Strategy

When I talked to Peter Nguyen from Essential Man how he promotes his content, he said:

“I used to use Facebook, Tweet, Instagram, email people, ask them to share it (which never really worked), but these strategies weren’t moving the needle.

Now I share it with my mailing list and just optimize for SEO. I just create awesome content, and make sure my readers can talk about old content I’ve written

I also use the Wikipedia Strategy. Because I spend so much time creating awesome content, I link to my old content in my new content and consistently share it in my newsletter.”

To make sure your readers find your old content, think of your website as a Wikipedia where everything is connected, and your new posts link to old relevant posts.

You’ll see me do that through-out this guide.

For example, here’s an excerpt from my chapter about writing Mouthwatering Opt-in Copy:

You’ll notice that I link to other chapters of the guide about Problems Worth Solving and Lead Magnets where relevant. That’s so that if someone stumbles upon my Opt-in Copy chapter, they can read my other relevant chapters as well, get more value from my advice, and more likely become my e-mail subscribers.

Here’s another great example from Danny Margulies’s post on 50 ways to compete with more experienced freelancers:

In his post, the majority of the links lead to existing content he’s written on his website – so if this post gets a lot of traction, a lot of his old content will benefit from that new stream of readers as well.

Whenever you’re writing a new piece of content, always think about how you can include references and links to your existing content in it, so you can continue to drive traffic to it for years to come.

The more content you write, the more you’ll be able to “interlink” your content like a huge web, eventually turning your website into a mini-wikipedia your readers love using.

Strategy #8: Cliffhangers

If you ever watched or read Game of Thrones (well, let’s ignore the last season), you probably had a love/hate relationship with it’s cliffhangers.

When an episode of the show ended JUST as something critical was about to happen, and the next season would start in a year… You know you’d be there after a year, dying to know what happens next.

These “cliffhangers” are amazing ways to keep the attention of your audience, and also a secret to creating high-converting Opt-in Copy and Lead Magnets.

Once you create your Epic Lead Magnet, you should always use it as a cliffhanger at the end of the Remarkable Content you create, like your blog posts or YouTube videos.

This won’t just help you rapidly grow your e-mail list and maximize your opt-in rate, it’s also a great way to keep putting your old Epic Lead Magnets in front of new readers.

Here’s a great example of the Cliffhanger Strategy in action.

Christina Rebuffet from Speak English with Christina created this YouTube video on How to Start a Conversation in English With Anyone.

At the end of the video, she talks about (and even SHOWS) her American English Survival Kit to her viewers:

And now that they’ve seen it, they’ll want to download their own copy.

Here’s one of my personal examples, from my post about how to plan your year in 20 minutes. In this post, I talk about my annual review system and how to use it – but you can only get access to it if you subscribe to my e-mail list:

This simple system has been downloaded and used by hundreds of entrepreneurs (and I can continue referencing it any time I talk about how I plan my weeks/months/years).

Finally, a great way to create Cliffhangers in your Remarkable Content is to point at specific techniques, modules or pages in your Epic Lead Magnets.

Once this guide is finished and I will use the PDF version of it as an Epic Lead Magnet to future content I create, I can create a cliffhanger like “You can learn how to maximize your opt-in rate through the Cliffhanger Strategy on page 183 of this guide”.

The extra specificity makes the other side of the cliffhanger just one step away, making it even more compelling for your readers.

Strategy #9: Nurture Sequence

The Nurture Sequence is an advanced content promotion strategy you can use once:

  • You already have a few thousand e-mail subscribers
  • You already have 10-20 pieces of Remarkable Content

I wouldn’t really recommend investing your time into building out a Nurture Sequence before that as your time would be better spent creating more GROWING your e-mail list through Remarkable Content, Content Promotion and Epic Lead Magnets, rather than trying to ENGAGE it.

You also need to have created a decent amount of content in order to actually know which content performs best (so you can really share your most valuable content with your new readers).

So what is a Nurture Sequence?

A Nurture Sequence is a sequence of multiple Welcome E-mails you can send to your e-mail subscribers once they sign up to your e-mail list. This sequence helps you “nurture” your new e-mail subscribers, and get them to know, trust and like you through some of your best content.

You can think of the Nurture Sequence as an extension of your Welcome E-mail – instead of sending your e-mail subscribers a single e-mail, you can write 3-5 additional e-mails to them that you typically send to them over the course of 1-2 weeks.

Here’s a GREAT example of a Nurture Sequence from Geraldine Lepere, which is also her “Double Your Frenchness” Epic Lead Magnet:

Over the course of 11 days, Geraldine sends you a set of 12 e-mails that walk you through some of her best YouTube videos:

Each e-mail includes a link to one of her videos + specific written explanations you can use for reference.

Building out a Nurture Sequence like this can take time, but once you’re attracting tens or hundreds of new e-mail subscribers to your business every day it becomes worth it, as you can take your new readers from “just finding out about you” to “knowing you, liking you, trusting you, and being ready to buy from you”, which makes selling your first product or service to them a lot easier, WHILE also sharing your most valuable content with them.

Strategy #10: HUB Pages

The final inbound content promotion strategy you can use are so-called “HUB Pages”. HUB Pages are pages on your website that serve as “hubs” that lead to your other content.

One simple example is Derek Halpern’s HUB Page for creating online courses, where he links to some of his most popular articles about creating online courses:

Derek then links to his HUB Pages from the menu at the top of his website:

Another example is the HUB Page for this guide, where I link to the specific chapters in this guide.

This helps me organize all of my content around a topic like building an e-mail list in one simple page that my readers can visit and return to to find all of my relevant articles.

Every time you notice you’ve written 5+ articles about a popular Problem Worth Solving for your audience, you can create a HUB Page that then makes those articles easy to find for your new (and existing) readers of your audience.

You can then keep updating your HUB Page with new, relevant content every time you create it and build out a true Wikipedia page.

Outbound Short-Term Content Promotion Strategies

Ok, let’s move on to the outbound content promotion strategies. These strategies will help you attract the NEW readers to your website in different, creative ways.

We’ll start with the “low hanging fruit” – the short-term strategies:

  • Strategy #11: Close the Loop
  • Strategy #12: Simple Share
  • Strategy #13: Social Media Share
  • Strategy #14: Promo Video
  • Strategy #15: Email Everyone

Let’s cover these one by one.

Strategy #11: Close the Loop

If you followed my advice and ran list-building experiments in different online communities, promoting your Epic Lead Magnet or Remarkable Content authentically becomes REALLY easy.

You can simply go back to the people that said they were interested in hearing from you, “close the loop” and share your content with them.

That’s exactly what Michelle Rebosio did to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ e-mail subscribers in under 30 days.

When she validated her business idea, she went into different Facebook Groups about International Development and asked the members of the groups if they would be interested in reading “The Ultimate Guide to Finding a Job in International Development” (which later became her Epic Lead Magnet).

In one of the groups, she received 500+ comments on her post saying they would read the guide.

Once she wrote her guide, she simply went back to that post, and “closed the loop” with everyone who commented on the post, sharing the link to her guide, and her e-mail subscribers started pouring in.

If you experienced a Moment of Traction like Michelle and a lot of people said they wanted to learn about a specific topic from you, go back and reach out to those people and let them know that your resource is finished.

You could do that by:

  • Commenting on the old post in the community where people expressed interest in the resource
  • Creating a new post in the community, and referencing / linking the post where 100+ people said they would read the resource
  • Reaching out to everyone who commented on the post individually and sending them a link to your Epic Lead Magnet

Here are some simple sample scripts you can use for each of these approaches:

Commenting on the old post:

“Hey everyone,

I’m super excited to announce that my Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List is finished!

Thank you for all of your support and suggestions for what to include in the guide, this guide wouldn’t happen without you.

You can read the guide through this link: [LINK TO GUIDE]

Enjoy!”

Creating a new post:

“Here’s the Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List that you asked for!

Hey everyone, back in March, I asked you if you wanted to read an Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List, and 100+ of you said YES: [LINK TO INITIAL POST]

After working on this guide for over 100 hours, I’m super excited to announce that the guide is finally finished!

You can read the full guide through this link: [LINK TO GUIDE]

Enjoy!”

Sending a private message:

“Hey NAME,

It’s Primoz from [COMMUNITY]. Back in March, you commented on this post and told me you wanted to read The Ultimate Guide to Growing Your E-mail List once it’s finished: [LINK TO INITIAL POST]

I just wanted to let you know that after working on it for 100+ hours, the guide is now finished! You can find it here:  [LINK TO GUIDE]

Enjoy, and have an awesome day!”

Either of these approaches can work – pick one that feels best to you and share your content with people who asked to read it :).

Strategy #12: Simple Share

When Michelle Rebosio published her Ultimate Guide and built an e-mail list of 1,000+ e-mail subscribers in under 30 days, she didn’t JUST use the Close the Loop technique.

She also went into 40 other relevant Facebook groups and shared her guide there. She really took “shouting it from the rooftops” to heart, and it worked.

In some groups, her guide didn’t get much attention. In others, it brought her 300+ e-mail subscribers, and she keeps getting new e-mail subscribers through it until this day.

In the groups where she didn’t Close the Loop, she used an even simpler strategy: The Simple Share.

She simply went into the groups and shared her guide with a message like this:

“Hi, I recently wrote a guide about finding a job in International Development. You can find it here: [LINK]”

Because her guide was so remarkable and well-written and nobody was really doing what Michelle was doing in her industry, the people in the communities loved it, read it, and shares it with others. That’s the power of choosing an amazing business idea.

Karen Dudek-Brannan also used the Simple Share Strategy to go from 0-186 e-mail subscribers with a single blog post. She wrote a blog post about a Problem Worth Solving for her audience, shared it in a Facebook group, and her e-mail list exploded overnight, even before she had an Epic Lead Magnet or Mouthwatering Opt-in Copy.

When you create truly stellar content, sharing it doesn’t have to be particularly complicated. It can be as simple as saying “I spent a ton of time creating this amazing resource, and I’d like you to have it”.

Alternatively, you COULD write a longer post about your resource that explains why it’s worth reading (this is especially crucial in communities that require you to write extremely valuable posts).

Here’s an example of how I did that recently as I shared my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks in an online community I was a part of for years:

Notice how I talked about the Problems Worth Solving (being known for content, not knowing how to create sticky ideas), shared my Journey (analyzed 20 sticky ideas) and talked about what I learned (a super detailed analysis of sticky ideas).

If you choose to go with a longer version of the Simple Share, mention:

  • What the resource you created is
  • Which problem it solves
  • The work you put into it
  • Why you’re sharing it in this community
  • How it will benefit the members

And then attach a link to the resource at the end of the post.

Here are a few additional tips on sharing your content through Facebook groups and other communities, if that’s a content promotion strategy you choose to use.

We talked about a lot of these with Sara Kirsch, who grew her e-mail list to 1,000+ subscribers largely through Facebook groups.

  • Always read the community guidelines: Some online communities will not allow you to promote your content in them. To be sure, always read the community guidelines first and act in line with them.
  • Use dedicated promo threads: Some communities offer specific threads for promoting your content – share your content there.
  • Do your research: Don’t just go into communities and ASSUME people want to see your content. Instead, see if they’re asking questions about the Problems Worth Solving you address in your content, and point to them.
  • Make friends with community moderators and administrators: Message them, introduce yourself, notice you saw that the members have problems you can help them solve, and find ways to cooperate on doing that.
  • Be respectful, positive and provide value: If someone asks a question, do a bit of research, share an idea with them, or bring other people into the conversation. Answer questions as simply as possible. Mention WHAT the solution is and WHY you recommend, and offer to answer additional questions.
  • Reach out to admins on a regular basis: Ask them if there’s anything #2 – reach out to admins on a regular basis, ask them “I love this community, is there anything I can help you with?” and make them feel special.
  • Be interactive: Reach out to the community members and offer additional help to them. Say “I saw you have this problem, I’d love to help you”, and offer them extra advice.
  • Don’t seek customers: Never go into an online community to fish for clients (not cool) or JUST to grow your e-mail list. Your first intention should always be helping people and connecting with them.
  • Don’t offer commentary that isn’t useful: Whenever you comment on something, focus on being positive, encouraging, supportive and provide value (rather than being negative and bringing people down)
  • Don’t spam: Never go into groups just to “spam” and share every piece of content you write. Only promote your best pieces of content through Facebook groups, and make sure you spend just as much time (if not more) helping community members as you do promoting your content.

You should also read this post from my friend Diana Tower on how to promote yourself through Facebook groups – she provides a different philosophy as a community manager of popular business online communities, and it’s well worth reading.

Strategy #13: Social Media Share

One of the simplest ways in which you can promote your content is by posting it on your social media platforms, like your Facebook wall.

This CAN help you generate some traction around your content under the following circumstances:

  • You’re really sharing an EPIC Lead Magnet or a Remarkable Piece of Content
  • Your have a lot of Facebook friends that are also your readers / in your target audience

If you’re just sharing a regular blog post you wrote, chances are you won’t see much traction through this approach.

The same goes for not having a lot of friends / followers yet that are in your target audience. If I teach how to play guitar but none of my Facebook friends want to learn how to play it, it’s unlikely that sharing my content there will generate much traction there.

You’ll very quickly see how well this strategy works for you, and then decide if you want to keep doing it or not.

I do share my content (only) on Facebook as that’s where I’m connected with many online entrepreneurs, and my Ultimate Guides tend to generate a lot of traction there.

Here’s a recent example of a post I wrote about my Ultimate Guide to Creating Content That Sticks:

It’s similar to the “Simple Share”, and focuses on Problems Worth Solving, Tangible Outcomes and Building Blocks of my Epic Lead Magnet.

This post got a lot of traction and helped generate hundreds of e-mail subscribers through people reading and sharing the guide.

One thing I like to do whenever I publish an incredible piece of content I spent 20+ hours putting together is to also tag 10-20 specific friends in a comment of the post that would benefit from reading it (or know people who would).

I only do this with my best content once every few months, but I find that it helps create extra buzz and traction.

Strategy #14: Promo Video

If you want to get a bit more creative with content promotion, you could record a promo video / trailer for your Epic Lead Magnets, like Sam Gavis-Hughson:

In the video, Sam talks about The Problems Worth Solving:

Then, he introduces his new e-book:

He continues to talk about his FAST Method, a Sticky Idea that is a Building Block of his e-book.

Briefly mentions that the e-book is completely free:

And finally, links to the landing page where you can download his e-book.

Pretty cool huh?

You could create a similar video for your Epic Lead Magnets if you use a YouTube Channel to distribute your Remarkable Content, or even play around with sharing a video like this as a Facebook video to attract new readers.

Strategy #15: Email Everyone

The final strategy comes from my Q & A session with SEO expert Neil Patel, where I asked him how he promoted his ultra-popular Ultimate Guides.

He said:

“You need to get the word out there for the guide to do well, and this indirectly helps you get more links to your guide. You want to send your guides to everyone you’re connecting with on the social web. I’m not talking about just posting them on Facebook and LinkedIn, I’m talking about direct messaging every single person you know and saying ‘Hey so and so, thank you for being a friend, I just wrote this guide, feel free to go here and check it out.’ That drives a lot of traffic when the guide first comes out.”

This one is simple. When you spent 20, 50 or 100+ hours creating something incredible that you really believe will help people, you can e-mail everyone you know about it (private messages via Facebook work too)

You could e-mail:

  • Your friends that would be interested in the subject (or know anyone that would be)
  • Specific readers / e-mail subscribers / clients that would love it
  • Your mentors or coaches
  • Any other people you’re connected with in your industry

I suggest e-mailing everyone that already personally know and you have a reasonably strong relationship with. If you think about them receiving the e-mail from you and think “they’d love to read this”, you should email them.

If you’re in doubt, don’t.

As you do this, it’s usually nice to include a personal message that makes the other person FEEL really amazing as they see it.

For example, if someone e-mailed me, I would love if they said something like “Hey Primoz, how are you?? I’m really enjoying your list-building guide, it’s awesome! I really love [CHAPTER] because of [REASON], nice work man!!”, it would make me smile.

It could also be a personal message about something you talked about recently (“how did your powerlifting competition go?” or “did you end up finding any awesome omelette recipes?”).

I try to make these messages genuine and as long as they need to be, as I’m not reaching out to my network just to promote my content, but also to connect with them.

You can use the script below to reach out to your network and share your content with them in a non-spammy way:

“Hey NAME,

[Insert Personal Message]

Over the past few months I wrote this super detailed [Ultimate Guide Title] – and I thought I’d send it your way because you might enjoy it (or know someone who does).

Have a great week!

-Your NAME”

Here’s an example of a simple e-mail that I sent to a friend when I wrote one of my guides (no personal message on this one as we just talked the previous day, so I just wanted to keep it clear and to the point):

I definitely don’t use this strategy every time I publish a piece of content, but I do it every time I write an Ultimate Guide I spent 50+ hours writing.

Outbound Long-Term Content Promotion Strategies

Woohoo! We’re almost crossing the finish line – just 6 outbound long-term content promotion strategies to go!

These strategies will help you add new stream of readers to your website for years to come. They’re also a bit more time consuming and strategies you’ll use over and over again in your business.

Here they are:

  • Strategy #16: Guest posting
  • Strategy #17: Partnerships
  • Strategy #18: Podcasts & summits
  • Strategy #19: FAQ sites
  • Strategy #20: Casual mentions
  • Strategy #21: Public speaking

Strategy #16: Guest Posting

Guest posting on other notable websites in your industry seems to be a popular option for promoting your content, especially in the earlier stages of growing your e-mail list:

  • Nagina Abdullah used guest posting as a primary content promotion strategy to grow her e-mail list to 5,000+ e-mail subscribers
  • Peter Nguyen jump-started his e-mail list growth by attracting 1,000+ e-mail subscribers through a single guest post
  • Rusty Gray got 400+ e-mail subscribers with one of his guest posts
  • Danny Margulies and Olivia Angelescu also used guest posting as go-to content promotion strategies to grow their e-mail lists

Guest posting can be a great way of promoting your content and growing your e-mail list if:

  • You really enjoy writing
  • There are a lot of websites in your industry
  • You already have a decent network

But there’s also a danger of being stuck in Endless Pitching, where you send out tens of guest post pitches but rarely hear back (and spend more time waiting on answers than growing your e-mail list).

We’ll dive into Guest Posting in more detail in a dedicated chapter of this guide as it’s such a deep topic (as we can talk about which websites to pitch, how to pitch them, how to write a great guest post, etc.), but for now, know that it’s a great option for promoting your content.

Here’s how you can use guest posting to promote your content (we’ll look at the guest post from Peter Nguyen that got him over 1,000 new e-mail subscribers):

Step #1: You write a guest post for a popular website in your industry

Peter wrote an Ultimate Guide to Buying a Leather Jacket:

Step #2: Offer a RELEVANT BONUS at the end of your guest post

Peter offered the readers a PDF version of the guide and a printable shopping checklist for buying a leather jacket (super relevant!):

Step #3: Create a dedicated Lead Magnet Page on your website

Finally, he created a special Lead Magnet Page for readers of the guest post:

And attracted 1,000+ new e-mail subscribers to his website within 30 days of publishing the guest post (plus hundreds more over the years as his article ranks really high on google for “how to buy a leather jacket”).

Strategy #17: Partnerships

There are other ways of partnering up with other bloggers or websites in your industry to create WIN-WIN Partnerships.

Nagina Abdullah used partnerships as one of the key strategies to grow an e-mail list of over 16,000 e-mail subscribers:

“I reached out to people with complementary audiences, sent them an e-mail, and said “I love what you’re talking about, I want to share your message with your audience, is there a way for us to work together?”, and we got on a phone and made it happen.

It could be a joined webinar, we could share our lead magnets with each other’s e-mail lists, or write guest posts for each other.

These partnerships were really powerful because I could get 30, 100, or even 200 e-mail subscribers per person, and if I really focused on it, I could get 1,000+ subscribers within a month.”

Partnerships will become relevant to you when you already have a decent audience, and you should try to partner up with entrepreneurs with similar audiences as you have.

For example, if you have 1,000 e-mail subscribers, you could partner up with an entrepreneur that also has 1,000 e-mail subscribers. If you have 5,000, find someone that also has around 5,000 e-mail subscribers.

Find people with similar messages whose work you believe in, and help each other grow your e-mail lists.

The beauty of partnerships is that you can do them in so many different ways and always find something that works for you:

  • If you love writing, do guest posts
  • If you prefer speaking, do a joined webinar
  • If you want to do something quickly, share a lead magnet with each other’s audience
  • If you have a YouTube channel, do a collaboration
  • If you want to take things further, you could even do an affiliate launch

If you love collaborating with other experts and there are plenty of experts in your industry, partnerships can be a great way to continue growing your e-mail list.

Strategy #18: Podcasts & Summits

Another strategy that Nagina Abdullah used to get the word out about herself and her website and build an e-mail list of 16,000+ e-mail subscribers was being a guest speaker at podcasts and summits.

She was a guest at podcasts in both the Health and Fitness and Business industries. She went on Business podcasts because she felt like she had a lot to say about entrepreneurship, and her audience listened to business podcasts.

She developed a system for doing that, reached out to 5 podcasts/week for months, and eventually hired a Virtual Assistant to pitch for her, so she could focus on other parts of her business.

She is also a regular guest at online summits (online conferences that last for 3-21 days and host up to 30 experts).

She would appear on these summits, send out 1-2 e-mails to her e-mail list about them, and talk about her appearance on the summit. She would then do the interview and offer a free gift to the viewers of the summit (similarly to how you would offer a bonus to your guest post readers) to grow her e-mail list.

Through being a guest at these summits, she on average attracted 60-75 e-mail subscribers, with some of them bringing as many as 800-1,000 e-mail subscribers to her website.

To find summits to speak at, she would find past summits in her industry online, ask the host if they’re doing any future summits, and offer to speak at them. Now she speaks at a summit every 6 weeks or so.

Being a guest speaker at podcasts and summits is a great way to get your content out into the world (as you’ll always mention your Epic Lead Magnets at the end of the interviews or even throughout them) and grow your e-mail list, especially if you prefer talking to writing.

Similarly to guest posting, being a guest on podcasts is a subject that would require it’s own chapter of the guide, which I might add to it later (to talk about which podcasts to pitch, how to best pitch them, how to grow your e-mail list through them…).

If you’d like me to write a more detailed chapter about podcasts (or other strategies from this chapter), please do leave a comment below this one to let me know!

Strategy #19: FAQ Sites

Next up, we have FAQ sites like Reddit and Quora where people go to get ask questions about various topics, including Problems Worth Solving.

Jesse Gernigin built an e-mail list of over 750 e-mail subscribers through answering questions about freelancing and Upwork on Quora:

He simply wrote really detailed answers to the questions he felt he was capable of asking really well, and promoted his Epic Lead Magnet (an Ultimate Guide to Booking Your Schedule Full) at the end of his posts:

FAQ sites (especially Quora) can be a great way to collect targeted e-mail subscribers if you love answering questions and writing the best answers to them.

The key things to keep in mind when answering questions on a platform like Quora are:

  • Make sure that the questions you are answering are actually related to your Epic Lead Magnet (you probably shouldn’t answer questions about fat loss and then link to an e-book about building habits)
  • Take the time to write the best possible answers, to make sure they get noticed and stand out from all other answers
  • Always include your Epic Lead Magnet in your answers, and tell the readers why they should download it (mention the Tangible Results or Problems Worth Solving)

Another FAQ site that you could use to promote your content is Reddit, though I will say that Reddit serves more as a closed community, and some of the “subreddits” (the mini-communities related to specific topics on reddit) are against any sort of content promotion.

For example, both Sam Gavis-Hughson and Will Darling got banned from reddit when they tried to share their lead magnets there, even though they did it in a way that added value to the community.

Possibly the best approach to take in Reddit groups is to use the “Closing The Loop” strategy. If you asked a question on Reddit that got a huge response and a lot of redditors shared problems worth solving, you could create a free resource that addresses those questions and leave it as a comment on the original thread.

You could also apply this technique to any industry-specific FAQ sites and any online forums in your industry, and as you do, keep this in mind:

Always read the forum / community guidelines and act in line with them.

That’s the best way to authentically promote your content through them without getting banned.

Strategy #20: Casual Mentions

Another simple long-term strategy you can use are what I call “Casual Mentions”.

You can casually mention your best content where-ever relevant: in your content, partnerships and conversations.

For example, you might mention your content when:

  • You’re writing a guest post (you can link to a relevant resource within the guest post)
  • You’re speaking at a podcast or a summit (the host will usually add any resources to the show notes)
  • You’re writing your own blog posts or creating YouTube videos (this is similar to the Wikipedia Strategy)
  • You’re having casual conversations over Skype, at conferences, masterminds, meet-ups…

It’s always great to keep sharing your best content with people that are interested in it.

Strategy #21: Media Publications

One final content promotion strategy you can experiment with is getting featured in large media publications like Business Insider, Entrepreneur and Forbes.

If you write an article or get profiled in one of those publications that takes off, you could attract hundreds or thousands of new e-mail subscribers to your business.

This happened to Danny Margulies, who wrote an article for Business Insider about his freelancing journey:

“I saw they wrote an article about a freelancer traveling the world. I looked up the person that wrote the article, and sent them an e-mail with a catchy subject line (“0-6 figures freelancing story”).

I told them I read their article and had a similar story with a different angle (I made 6 figures while working from home). They wrote back to me and asked me to write the article for them.

I had a similar experience with Business Insider. I was profiled there because of my online business success, and attracted 1,000+ e-mail subscribers to my business in less than a month.

Especially if you have an amazing story or a personal transformation that could go viral, finding ways to reach out to the media can help you put your business in front of a lot more people.

My friend Selena Soo is an expert at helping entrepreneurs get more publicity for their business, so if you’re interested in learning more about how to get featured in top publications, I’d definitely follow her and check out some of her content as well as her online course Impacting Millions.

“What about influencer marketing, backlinks or Facebook Ads?”

Three content promotion strategies I didn’t mention but many “internet marketers” recommend are:

  • Influencer marketing: Asking influencers to share your content
  • Backlinks: Asking bloggers to link to your content
  • Facebook Ads: Paying for traffic to your content

Here’s why I didn’t recommend any of those strategies.

The first reason is that almost none of the entrepreneurs I interviewed for this guide used those strategies to build their e-mail lists of 1,000-40,000 people (and neither have I). That’s why I couldn’t make great recommendations around them, and this data also shows that they’re not necessary for building your e-mail list.

The second reason is that I believe that you should be able to attract traffic to your website organically, without paying for it, using the strategies in this guide. Avoiding the hard work and trying to “pay your way” into solving your traffic problems will more often than not result in flushing money down the drain.

Will Darling told me he wasted over $5,000 trying to figure out the Paid Traffic game, and he’s not alone. I heard A LOT more horror stories than success stories with using Paid Advertising BEFORE figuring out the Organic Traffic game.

Even Nagina Abdullah who used the majority of the strategies in this chapter (Guest posting, Publicity, Social Media (FB, IG, LinkedIn), FB ads, Podcasts, Summits, Partnerships and SEO, which we’ll touch on in a future chapter of this guide) said that Facebook Ads worked, but only worked for a while.

The final reason is that I’m not a believer of reaching out to people you don’t know and asking them to share your content without building a strong relationship first (and unfortunately, that’s what those strategies are about).

To me, saying “hey I saw your blog post, it’s awesome, will you share my blog post?” feels way too transactional, and even if it “works”, that’s not how I like to run my business.

I’d rather build genuine relationships with top experts in my industry than to ruin my chances of building a relationship with them by e-mailing them and asking them to share my content.

Summary: How to Promote Your Content: An In-Depth Guide

In this chapter, we covered A LOT, and I hope it will serve you as THE reference guide for promoting your content.

First, we talked about when and if you should promote your content, and concluded that you should ask yourself the following 7 questions to make the right decision:

  • Is content promotion my strength or weakness?
  • How big is my existing network?
  • How big is my e-mail list?
  • How EPIC is my content?
  • What is my main content platform?
  • What kind of results am I getting from content promotion?
  • Can I create a snowball effect?

Then, we dove into 21 content promotion strategies, which we organized into 5 different categories:

  • Meta-Strategies: Strategies you should always keep in mind when promoting your content
  • Inbound Short-Term Promotion: Quick & easy strategies to promote your content to your EXISTING audience  
  • Inbound Long-Term Promotion: In-depth strategies to promote your content to your EXISTING audience
  • Outbound Short-Term Promotion: Quick & easy strategies to reach NEW audiences  
  • Outbound Long-Term Promotion: In-depth strategies to reach NEW audiences

We organized these strategies into the Content Promotion Matrix:

content promotion matrix

And went over each of the 21 strategies in detail:

Meta-Strategies:

  • Be so good they can’t ignore you: 90% of the work is creating content that is so good that people will promote it FOR you
  • Shout it from the rooftops: When you create an EPIC piece of content, talk about it everywhere and to everyone
  • The 80/20 Rule of Content Promotion: Find the 20% content promotion strategies that bring you the best results, double down on them and ignore all others

Inbound Short-Term Promotion:

  • Welcome E-mail: Include your Epic Lead Magnets and your best content in your Welcome E-mails
  • High-converting website: Make sure your best content is the front and centre of your website and can be accessed in 1-2 clicks
  • List Launch: Always launch your content to your e-mail list through a single e-mail launch (most blog posts), a 5-day launch (Epic Lead Magnets you spent 20 hours creating), or an EPIC launch (content you spent 100+ hours creating)

Inbound Long-Term Promotion:

  • Wikipedia strategy: Turn your website into an interconnected wikipedia page of your content (keep linking to old content and updating your old content with links to new content)
  • Cliffhangers: Create cliffhangers in your blog posts / YouTube videos and offer Relevant Lead Magnets at the end of them
  • Nurture sequence: Once you have thousands of e-mail subscribers and at least 10-20 pieces of Remarkable Content, create a nurture sequence to e-mail your best content to new subscribers over the course of 5 days
  • HUB pages: Create HUB Pages on your website around major Problems Worth Solving that link to all relevant articles / videos you created on those topics

Outbound Short-Term Promotion:

  • Close the loop: Every time you run list-building experiments in online communities, Close The Loop with people who wanted to read your Epic Lead Magnets and share them with them
  • Simple share: Share your best content in online communities that allow content sharing, in a way that adds value to the communities
  • Share on social media: Share your content through your social media channels (and tag people in your best content posts that would love reading them)
  • Promo video: Create a promo video for your Epic Lead Magnet and publish it on YouTube or Facebook
  • Email everyone you know: Every time you spend 50+ hours on a piece of content, e-mail it to everyone in your network that would benefit from it (or that might know someone that does)

Outbound Long-Term Promotion:

  • Guest posting: If you love writing, write guest articles for popular websites in your industry
  • Partnerships: Partner up with bloggers with similar audience sizes and create joined webinars, exchange lead magnets or guest posts
  • Podcasts & summits: Be a guest on summits and podcasts to spread the word about your Epic Lead Magnets
  • FAQ sites: Answer questions on websites like Reddit and Quora and mention your Epic Lead Magnets at the end of your answers
  • Casual mentions: Casually mention your best content in podcast interviews, any new content you create, or casual conversations with your clients, readers, or people you meet at meet ups and conferences
  • Media Publications: If you have a personal transformation or a story worth sharing, try to get it out thorough outlets like Business Insider, Entrepreneur and Forbes

Finally, I explained why I don’t recommend using Facebook Ads, Influencer Marketing or Backlink Strategies to promote your content:

  • Very few entrepreneurs successfully used FB Ads to grow their e-mail lists (and the ones that did found that they eventually stopped working)
  • You should be able to organically promote your content BEFORE you do paid promotion. If your content doesn’t take off, make it better – don’t throw money at it!
  • Influencer Marketing and Backlinking Strategies tend to be spammy and annoying, and won’t give you a good reputation in your industry. Instead, focus on building genuine relationships and turn them into WIN-WIN partnerships

That’s it!

In the next chapter of this guide, we’ll talk about how to create a High-Converting Website – the last piece of the puzzle you need to reach 500-1,000 e-mail subscribers (and grow your e-mail list beyond the magical 1,000 subscriber mark).

Continue to Chapter 11: How to Create a High-Converting Website

Your turn: What’s your favorite way to promote your content?

Are you ready to build an e-mail list of 1,000+ BUYERS?

Download the full 393-page PDF version of this EPIC list-building guide, to print it out or read it on the go!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription.

There was an error submitting your subscription. Please try again.

I promise I won't send you any spam - I hate it as much as you do! Powered by Kit
  • « Go to Previous Page
  • Page 1
  • Page 2
  • Page 3
  • Page 4
  • Page 5
  • Interim pages omitted …
  • Page 10
  • Go to Next Page »

Copyright © 2025 · Primoz Bozic